Form 1704

PAC MANAGER
USER’S GUIDE

SNAP PAC R-Series Controllers

SNAP PAC S-Series Controllers
SoftPAC Controllers
SNAP PAC EB Brains
SNAP PAC SB Brains
PAC MANAGER™ USER’S GUIDE
SNAP PAC R-Series Controllers
SNAP PAC S-Series Controllers
SoftPAC Controllers
SNAP PAC EB Brains
SNAP PAC SB Brains

Form 1704-231227—December 2023

43044 Business Park Drive • Temecula • CA 92590-3614

Phone: 800-321-OPTO (6786) or 951-695-3000
Fax: 800-832-OPTO (6786) or 951-695-2712
www.opto22.com

Product Support Services

800-TEK-OPTO (835-6786) or 951-695-3080
Fax: 951-695-3017
Email: [email protected]
Web: support.opto22.com
 PAC Manager User’s Guide
Form 1704-231227—December 2023
Copyright © 2003–2021 Opto 22.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
The information in this manual has been checked carefully and is believed to be accurate; however, Opto 22 assumes no
responsibility for possible inaccuracies or omissions. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Opto 22 warrants all of its products to be free from defects in material or workmanship for 30 months from the
manufacturing date code. This warranty is limited to the original cost of the unit only and does not cover installation, labor,
or any other contingent costs. Opto 22 I/O modules and solid-state relays with date codes of 1/96 or newer are guaranteed
for life. This lifetime warranty excludes reed relay modules, groov and SNAP serial communication modules, SNAP PID
modules, and modules that contain mechanical contacts or switches. Opto 22 does not warrant any product, components,
or parts not manufactured by Opto 22; for these items, the warranty from the original manufacturer applies. Refer to Opto
22 form 1042 for complete warranty information.

Wired+Wireless controllers and brains are licensed under one or more of the following patents: U.S. Patent No(s). 5282222,
RE37802, 6963617; Canadian Patent No. 2064975; European Patent No. 1142245; French Patent No. 1142245; British Patent
No. 1142245; Japanese Patent No. 2002535925A; German Patent No. 60011224.
Opto 22 FactoryFloor, groov, groov EPIC, groov RIO, mobile made simple, The Edge of Automation, Optomux, and Pamux
are registered trademarks of Opto 22. Generation 4, groov Server, ioControl, ioDisplay, ioManager, ioProject, ioUtilities,
mistic, Nvio, Nvio.net Web Portal, OptoConnect, OptoControl, OptoDataLink, OptoDisplay, OptoEMU, OptoEMU Sensor,
OptoEMU Server, OptoOPCServer, OptoScript, OptoServer, OptoTerminal, OptoUtilities, PAC Control, PAC Display, PAC
Manager, PAC Project, PAC Project Basic, PAC Project Professional, SNAP Ethernet I/O, SNAP I/O, SNAP OEM I/O, SNAP PAC
System, SNAP Simple I/O, SNAP Ultimate I/O, and Wired+Wireless are trademarks of Opto 22.
ActiveX, JScript, Microsoft, MS-DOS, VBScript, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Linux is a registered
trademark of Linus Torvalds. ARCNET is a registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation. Modbus is a registered trademark
of Schneider Electric, licensed to the Modbus Organization, Inc. Wiegand is a registered trademark of Sensor Engineering
Corporation. Allen-Bradley, CompactLogix, ControlLogix, MicroLogix, SLC, and RSLogix are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Rockwell Automation. CIP and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA. Raspberry Pi is a trademark of the
Raspberry Pi Foundation. The registered trademark Ignition by Inductive Automation® is owned by Inductive Automation
and is registered in the United States and may be pending or registered in other countries. CODESYS® is a registered
trademark of 3S-Smart Software Solutions GmbH.
groov includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org)
All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.

Opto 22
Your Edge in Automation.

ii PAC Manager User’s Guide

Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
About this Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
For Developers: SNAP PAC REST API. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Product Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Opto 22 Processor Comparison Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 2: Configuring Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
When to Use PAC Manager and PAC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Choosing a Configuration Tool for SNAP I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Assigning an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
About IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Assigning IP Addresses to SNAP PAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
What’s Next? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Assigning IP Addresses to Multiple Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Assigning an IP Address to Ethernet 2 (SNAP PAC Controller Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Configuring Wireless LAN Communication (Wired+Wireless Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting with a SNAP PAC SB Brain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an I/O Unit Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating a New Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Copying an I/O Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Creating a Configuration File from Another Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Adding an I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Configuring I/O Modules and Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Configuring SNAP Digital Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Configuring Analog Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Configuring RS-232 and RS-485/422 Serial Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Configuring Wiegand Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Configuring Profibus Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Configuring SSI (Serial Synchronous Interface) Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Configuring CAN Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Configuring HART Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Moving a Configured I/O Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

PAC Manager User’s Guide iiiiii

 Copying and Pasting I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Configuring PID Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
What is a PID? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Algorithm Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Steps for Configuring PIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Sending Configuration Data to the I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Using PAC Manager to Clear Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using I/O Point Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
States (Digital Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Latches (Digital Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Counters (Digital Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Quadrature Counters (Digital Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Watchdog (Digital and Analog Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Scaling (Analog Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Minimum and Maximum Values (Analog Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Offset and Gain (Analog Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Clamping (Analog Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Average Filter Weight (Analog Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Chapter 3: Configuring Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting Up Network Security (Wired Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Limiting Access to Specific Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Limiting Access to Specific Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Configuring the PAC as an HTTP/HTTPS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Requiring a Password for FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Protecting a PAC Control Strategy from Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Configuring Ethernet Security on an I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Configuring Ethernet Security on a Standalone Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Logging Data from Memory Map Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Configuring Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Reading the Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Clearing All Data from the Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Configuring Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Using Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Configuring SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
SNMP Access Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuring the SNMP Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuring DNS Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Configuring Email. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Setting Up Initial Values in the Scratch Pad Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Scratch Pad Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Scratch Pad Integers, Floats, or Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Configuring Streaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Mirroring I/O Point Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Copying Memory Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

iv PAC Manager User’s Guide

 Copying Binary or Memory Map Data on the Same I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Copying Binary or Memory Map Data to a Different I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Configuring Modbus Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Changing Modbus Float Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Determining Modbus Unit ID and Register Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Setting Up System Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Configuring Direct Communication to Serial Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Configuring Serial Ports on an On-the-Rack Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Configuring Serial Ports on a Standalone Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Configuring PPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Configuring PPP on the I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Chapter 4: Setting Up Events and Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Event/Reaction Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
The Scratch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Using Event/Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Types of Events, Alarms, and Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Configuring Digital Events and Reactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Digital Point and Scratch Pad Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
How Digital Events Trigger Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Configuring Alarms and Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
How Alarms Trigger Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Configuring Serial or Wiegand Events and Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Configuring Event Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Chapter 5: Reading and Writing to Specific Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Reading Basic Device Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Interpreting Status Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Changing Status Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Referencing I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
SNAP PAC Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Serial Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Configuring I/O Modules, Points, and Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Point Types Requiring Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Point Features Requiring Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Configuring Analog and Digital Points and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Point Type Configuration Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Configuring Serial Modules in the Inspect Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Configuring, Viewing, or Changing PID Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Reading and Writing to Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Reading and Writing to Digital Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Reading and Writing to Analog Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Reading Analog and Digital Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Reading and Writing to SNAP High-Density Digital Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Reading System Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Reading and Writing to the Scratch Pad Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

PAC Manager User’s Guide v

 Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Reading or Changing PID Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Reading or Changing Events and Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Reading or Changing Communications and Other Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Writing Commands to the Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Using OptoMMP Device Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Using microSD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Using Other microSD Card Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Clearing Configurations and Data Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Formatting and Interpreting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Mask Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Unsigned 32-bit Integer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Digital Channel Data (4-Channel Modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
IEEE Float Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Analog Bank Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Chapter 6: Maintaining Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Changing IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Installing New Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Firmware Loading’s Effect on Data in the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Loading Controller and Brain Firmware (Except SB Brains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Loading SB Brain Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Loading Serial Module Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Loading I/O Coprocessor Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Replacing Damaged Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Installing CA Root Certificates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Maintaining Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Tools for Managing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Moving Files to the SNAP PAC Controller or I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Moving Files from the SNAP PAC Controller or I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Reading Filenames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Deleting a File from a SNAP PAC Controller or I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Using Flash Memory with the File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
PAC Manager Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Trouble Connecting to the I/O Unit or Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Trouble Assigning an IP Address to a Brain or Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Using PAC Manager to Troubleshoot Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Getting Device and Firmware Information—Individual Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Getting Device and Firmware Information—Multiple Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
TCP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Checking Ethernet Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Troubleshooting Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Troubleshooting Wireless LAN Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

vi PAC Manager User’s Guide

Appendix A: Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Appendix B: Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Add/Edit Analog Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Add/Edit Digital Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Add/Edit Event Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Add/Edit I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Add/Edit IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Add/Edit Memory Map Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Add/Edit PID Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Add/Modify New Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Assign IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Assign Secondary IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Configure E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Configure Event Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Configure I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Configure I/O Points (G4EB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Configure I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Configure Memory Map Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Configure PID Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Configure PPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Configure Profibus Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Configure Serial Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Configure SNMP Agent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Configure Streaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Configure Wiegand Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Find Opto 22 MMP Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Inspect Opto 22 Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
I/O Unit Import/Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
I/O Unit Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Move Point To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Scale Analog Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Send Configuration To I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Sending Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

PAC Manager User’s Guide vii

viii PAC Manager User’s Guide
 1: Introduction

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

Welcome to PAC Manager, the configuration and inspection tool for working with the SNAP PAC system. This
guide shows you how to configure and work with the following Opto 22 devices using the PAC Manager
software tool
• SNAP PAC S-series controllers
• SNAP PAC R-series controllers
• SoftPAC controllers
• SNAP PAC EB brains
• SNAP PAC SB brains
NOTES:

• If you are using groov EPIC or groov RIO, do not use PAC Manager. Instead, use groov Manage or PAC
Control. For details, see the following:
• groov EPIC User’s Guide (form 2267)
• groov RIO User’s Guide (form 2324)
• PAC Control User’s Guide (form 1700)
• Allen-Bradley: If you are using SNAP PAC EB brains or SNAP PAC controllers with Allen-Bradley Logix
PLC systems, do not use PAC Manager. Instead, use the EtherNet/IP Configurator. For details, see the
EtherNet/IP for SNAP PAC Protocol Guide (form 1770). Both the software and the guide are
available on our website, www.opto22.com.
PAC Manager is available for download from our website, www.opto22.com.

Contents
This guide assumes that you have some familiarity with TCP/IP, UDP/IP, and Ethernet networking. If you are not
familiar with these subjects, we strongly suggest you consult commercially available resources to learn about
them before attempting to use these systems.
This user’s guide includes the following sections:
Chapter 1: Introduction—Information about the guide and how to reach Opto 22 Product Support. Also
includes product comparison charts.
Chapter 2: Configuring Devices—How to assign an IP address to your hardware, how to configure I/O units
and I/O points, how to use I/O point features such as counters, watchdogs, and analog scaling; and how to
send configuration data to I/O units.
Chapter 3: Configuring Optional Functions—Information on configuring security, communication
protocols like SNMP and PPP, streaming, the Scratch Pad area, and other optional functions.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 11

FOR DEVELOPERS: SNAP PAC REST API

Chapter 4: Setting Up Events and Reactions—If you are not using PAC Control, information on configuring
local reactions to local events.
Chapter 5: Reading and Writing to Specific Devices—How to read data directly from a specific controller
or I/O unit or write directly to a controller, brain, or I/O points.
Chapter 6: Maintaining Devices—Changing IP addresses, upgrading firmware, and working with files on
the device.
Chapter 7: Troubleshooting—Tips for resolving difficulties you may encounter while working in PAC
Manager.
Appendix A: Menus—Describes the PAC Manager menu commands.
Appendix B: Dialog Boxes—Describes the features of PAC Manager dialog boxes.

Related Documentation
You may also need some of the following documentation, depending on the system you are using and how
you expect to communicate with it:
Opto 22
To use this See this
form #
SNAP PAC R-Series Controller User’s Guide 1595
SNAP PAC R-series controllers
OptoMMP Protocol Guide 1465
SNAP PAC S-Series Controller User’s Guide 1592
SNAP PAC S-series controllers
OptoMMP Protocol Guide 1465
SoftPAC Software-based Controller for PC-based Control
SoftPAC controllers 2020
Data Sheet
SNAP PAC Brain User’s Guide 1690
SNAP PAC EB and SB brains
OptoMMP Protocol Guide 1465
PAC Control User’s Guide 1700
PAC Control strategies PAC Control Command Reference 1701
PAC Control Commands Quick Reference Card 1703
Serial communication modules SNAP Serial Communication Module User’s Guide 1191
High-density digital modules SNAP High-Density Digital Module User’s Guide 1547

All forms are available for download from our website, www.opto22.com. The easiest way to find one is to
search on the form number.

FOR DEVELOPERS: SNAP PAC REST API

If you’re a developer who’d like to use PAC Control strategy tags in communications with other devices, the
Opto 22 SNAP PAC REST API is a secure and powerful way to do just that. The API is available in SNAP PAC
R-series and S-series controllers with PAC firmware R9.5a and higher. To configure HTTPS access to your PAC’s
RESTful server and learn how to call the API, visit developer.opto22.com.

PRODUCT SUPPORT
If you have problems installing or using PAC Manager and cannot find the help you need in this guide or on
our website, contact Opto 22 Product Support.
Phone: 800-TEK-OPTO
(800-835-6786 toll-free in the U.S. and Canada)
951-695-3080
Monday through Friday,
7 a.m. to 5 p.m. Pacific Time

2 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

Email: [email protected]

Opto 22 website: www.opto22.com

When calling for technical support, you can help us help you faster if you provide the following information to
the Product Support engineer:
• A screen capture of the Help > About dialog box showing software product and version (available by
clicking Help > About in the application’s menu bar).
• Opto 22 hardware part numbers or models that you’re working with.
• Firmware version:
– For groov EPIC processors and groov RIO modules: available in groov Manage by clicking Info and
Help > About.
– For SNAP controllers and brains: available in PAC Manager by clicking Tools > Inspect.
• Specific error messages you received.
• Version of your computer’s operating system.
• For PAC Control, PAC Display, OptoOPCServer, or PAC Manager, you may be requested to provide
additional information, such as log or dump files. You can find these files in a support files sub-folder:
a. On your Windows Desktop, double-click the PAC Project 10.4 folder.
b. Double-click Support Files.
c. Double-click on the appropriate shortcut to open the sub-folder containing the requested files.
Note: PAC Control, PAC Display, OptoOPCServer, and PAC Manager create appropriate sub-folders when they
create diagnostic log or dump files. If they have not created these files, the sub-folder may not exist; in this case,
the shortcut will not work.

OPTO 22 PROCESSOR COMPARISON CHART

This table compares SNAP PAC controllers and brains using PAC firmware R10.0 and PAC Project R10.0 software (or higher). Shaded part
numbers are obsolete as of 2022; use rack-mounted controllers in place of SNAP PAC brains.
SNAP PAC Brains
SNAP PAC Controllers
(Obsolete)
SW Standalone Rack-mounted Ethernet
SNAP-PAC-EB1-FM Serial

SNAP-PAC-EB2-FM
SNAP-PAC-R1-FM

SNAP-PAC-EB1

SNAP-PAC-EB2

SNAP-PAC-SB1

SNAP-PAC-SB2
SNAP-PAC-R1-B

FEATURE
SNAP-PAC-R1

SNAP-PAC-R2
SNAP-PAC-S1

SNAP-PAC-S2

(Obsolete)
SoftPAC

Runs PAC Control strategies      

Maximum PAC Control charts running at once (plus host task) 64 32 32 16 16 16
Two independent Ethernet network interfaces a
    
(two IP addresses)
Two switched Ethernet network interfaces (one
Communication IP address) for multi-drop configuration  

Total number of RS-232 serial ports b 2 4c 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

b
Total number of RS-485 serial ports 1 4c 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

PAC Manager User’s Guide 3

OPTO 22 PROCESSOR COMPARISON CHART

SNAP PAC Brains

SNAP PAC Controllers
(Obsolete)
SW Standalone Rack-mounted Ethernet Serial

SNAP-PAC-EB1-FM

SNAP-PAC-EB2-FM
SNAP-PAC-R1-FM

SNAP-PAC-EB1

SNAP-PAC-EB2

SNAP-PAC-SB1

SNAP-PAC-SB2
SNAP-PAC-R1-B
FEATURE

SNAP-PAC-R1

SNAP-PAC-R2
SNAP-PAC-S1

SNAP-PAC-S2

(Obsolete)
SoftPAC
TCP/IP, UDP/IP        
EtherNet/IP™ (Allen-Bradley® RSLogix® sys-
      
tems and others)
Modbus®/TCP (slave)d       
OPC driver support         f f
RESTful API     
Protocols HTTP/HTTPS     
OptoMMP memory-mapped protocol g         
SNMP (network management)       
FTP server, file system       
FTP client      
SMTP (email client with authentication and
     
attachments)
SNAP-PAC nodes for Node-RED; RESTful API     
Direct access to hard drive & network drives (Dropbox®, etc.) 
a
Realtime clock         
h
Backup battery (recharges when brain has power)         
a
Physical RAM (MB) 32 16 16 16
RAM available for Strategy (MB) 64 16 4 -- --
Battery-backed RAM (MB) 8 8 2 -- --
Flash memory (MB) i 16 8 8 8
a
Removable data storage (microSD card slot) 32 GB max.k 32 GB max.k
a
32-bit processor         
Floating-point unit (FPU) a
    
5.0 to 5.2 5.0 to 5.2
8–32 VDCl
a 5.0 to 5.2 VDC VDC VDC
Power requirements 10 W–11.3 W
@ 1.2–1.5 A @ 750 mA– @ 750 mA–
max
1.0 A 1.0 A
Operating Temperature in degrees C a -20 to 60 -20 to 60 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
Storage Temperature in degrees C -40 to 85 -40 to 85 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
a
Humidity (non-condensing) 0–95% 0–95% 0–95% 0–95%
SNAP PAC EB brains      
SNAP PAC SB brains  
Compatible
SNAP PAC R-series controllers      
I/O unitsn
groov EPIC processors      
groov RIO modules      
Combination controller and I/O processor   
Mounts on SNAP PAC I/O mounting rack n/a n/a      
Mounts on SNAP B-series I/O mounting rack n/a n/a 
Maximum number of modules allowed on largest rack:
n/a n/a o o    p p
Any mix of 16 digital, 16 analog, and 8 serial

4 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

SNAP PAC Brains

SNAP PAC Controllers
(Obsolete)
SW Standalone Rack-mounted Ethernet Serial

SNAP-PAC-EB1-FM

SNAP-PAC-EB2-FM
SNAP-PAC-R1-FM

SNAP-PAC-EB1

SNAP-PAC-EB2

SNAP-PAC-SB1

SNAP-PAC-SB2
SNAP-PAC-R1-B
FEATURE

SNAP-PAC-R1

SNAP-PAC-R2
SNAP-PAC-S1

SNAP-PAC-S2

(Obsolete)
SoftPAC
Input latching       
On/off status       
Watchdog timer       
High-speed counting (up to 20 kHz)q    
Quadrature countingr    
Digital I/O point
features On-pulse & off-pulse measurementq n/a n/a    
Frequency & Period measurementq    
TPO (time-proportional output)       
Digital totalizingq       
Pulse generation (continuous square wave, N
      
pulses, on-pulse, off-pulse)
Thermocouple linearization (32-bit floating point
      
for linearized values)
Minimum/maximum values       
Offset and gain       
Scaling       
Analog I/O point TPO (Time-proportional output)s       
n/a n/a
features
Output clamping       
Filter weight       
Watchdog timer       
Analog totalizingt       
Rampingt       
PID logic (maximum 96 PID loops per controller or brain)       
Data logging       
Digital events, alarm events, serial events      u u
n/a
Event messaging     
UDP streaming of I/O data to host     
I/O point data mirroring and memory map copying     
a As provided by the Microsoft Windows computer the software runs on. n For compatibility with legacy Opto 22 hardware, see form
b SoftPAC cannot communicate through serial ports on the PC. #1693.
c Serial ports are software configurable for RS-232 or RS-485. o SNAP-PAC-R1s with serial numbers lower than 600,000,
d PAC firmware >=R9.4b, 8 max connections. Lower firmware, 2 max connections. and all SNAP-PAC-R1-Bs: limited to eight 4-point digital
f Available with OptoOPCServer and PAC Control, through a SNAP PAC controller. modules per rack.
g SoftPAC includes Status Read, Status Write, and Scratch Pad memory map areas. p Not supported: serial, motion control, Profibus, & Wie-
h Models manufactured before August 2007 and S1s with serial numbers 625653 gand modules.
and lower have user-replaceable backup batteries. See original user’s guide. q Four-channel modules only; not high-density modules.
i Flash memory function implemented via a file; size is limited only by disk space. r Requires a SNAP-IDC5Q quadrature input module.
k PAC firmware 9.4a and loader 6.1a or higher. S-series with microSD & manufac- s Requires a SNAP analog TPO module (SNAP-AOD-29).
ture date older than 06/14 supports max. 2 GB microSD. t Requires a SNAP PAC controller and PAC Control com-
l Units with serial numbers lower than 500,000 have an 8–24 VDC input voltage mands.
rating. Verify voltage on the unit’s faceplate before applying power. u Does not support serial events.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 5

OPTO 22 PROCESSOR COMPARISON CHART

6 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 2: Configuring Devices

INTRODUCTION
Follow the steps in this chapter to assign IP addresses to Opto 22 devices on an Ethernet network. (Addressing
information for SNAP PAC SB serial brains is set on the brain itself. For details, see the SNAP PAC Brains User's
Guide, form 1690.) This chapter also includes steps for configuring I/O unit points and features. I/O points must
be configured before you can read or write to them.
This chapter assumes that you have already installed the hardware and software according to steps in the
device’s user’s guide. (See “Related Documentation” on page 3.)
If you are using a wireless or modem connection, or if you are using event messages, email, streaming, the
Scratch Pad area for peer-to-peer communication, or SNMP for communicating with enterprise management
systems, also see Chapter 3, which shows you how to set up these optional functions. All this information goes
in the configuration file that PAC Manager uploads to I/O units.

WHEN TO USE PAC MANAGER AND PAC CONTROL

If you will be running a PAC Control strategy on a SNAP PAC System to control I/O units, you may be
wondering when to use PAC Manager versus when to use PAC Control. These two tools serve different
purposes, but some of their functionality overlaps.
NOTE: PAC Manager cannot be used to configure groov I/O units or mistic I/O units.

• For groov I/O units, use groov Manage.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 77

ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS

• For mistic I/O units, use PAC Control.

PAC Manager Tasks

PAC Control Tasks
Assign and change Configure I/O
Configure control Program and
IP address
engine (so PC running debug control
Load firmware PAC Control can logic
Configure communications communicate with the
and events controller)

SNAP I/O can be configured in PAC Manager and imported into PAC Control.
SNAP and mistic I/O can also be configured in PAC Control.

Choosing a Configuration Tool for SNAP I/O

About E1 and E2 brain boards: You can configure E1s and E2s like any other I/O unit if you have E1/E2 firmware R1.2a
(and higher) and PAC Project 9.5000 (and higher). Also, if a SNAP PAC controller communicates with the E1 or E2, the
controller must have PAC firmware R9.5a (or higher) to use this simplified configuration method. If you are not using
these firmware and software versions (or if you prefer to use the previous method to reconfigure existing E1s or E2s),
see I/O Configuration for E1 an E2 Brain Boards (form 1576).

For most I/O units, if you are already in PAC Control, configuration is easier there and you can use the loopback
IP address for SNAP PAC R-series I/O units controlling themselves. However, some functions for I/O units
cannot be configured in PAC Control.
If you use PAC Manager, you can save your configuration to a file, load it to multiple I/O units at once, and use
it for referencing points in OPC. However, you cannot use the loopback address in PAC Manager.
Choose your configuration tool based on what you need to do:
Use PAC Control for I/O configuration if Use PAC Manager for SNAP I/O configuration if
• You have only one I/O unit or I/O unit configurations • You have multiple I/O units whose configurations
are different. are exactly the same or similar.
• The strategy will run on SNAP PAC R-series I/O • You are using a modem connection (PPP) or SNMP.
units that are controlling themselves using the • You are using event messages or email.
loopback IP address, 127.0.0.1 • You are configuring events and reactions on the I/O
• You are using an Ethernet network for unit in addition to strategy logic.
communications (or using a SNAP PAC controller • You are not using PAC Control.
with an SB brain).
• The strategy handles all logic; you are not also
configuring events and reactions on I/O units.

Whichever tool you use for configuring I/O, be aware of the impact if you later change configuration. For
example, if you configure I/O in PAC Manager, and then download the configuration file to I/O units, and then
later add a point in PAC Control, remember that your configuration file won’t contain the new point.

ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS
NOTE: If you are using redundant controllers with the SNAP PAC Redundancy Option Kit and PAC Project Professional
R9.1, do not use PAC Manager to assign IP addresses. Instead, use the PAC Redundancy Manager.

8 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

About IP Addresses
Each Ethernet-based device (controller or brain) ships from the factory with a unique hardware Media Access
Control (MAC) address and with a default IP address of 0.0.0.0, which is invalid. Each device must have a valid
IP address and subnet mask so that it can communicate on the network.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 9

ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS

Assigning IP Addresses to SNAP PAC

Checking Network Setup and PC

Before using a PC or laptop computer to assign IP addresses, check the following:

• Will your controller or brain run on a network that has a DHCP server? Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) servers can automatically respond to BootP requests and assign a “dynamic”
(changeable) IP address to the requesting device, but SNAP PAC controllers and brains must have static IP
addresses. If your network has a DHCP server, Opto 22 recommends you connect the device directly to
your computer with a network cable (even if the device is a Wired+Wireless model), and then assign the
IP address. After the device has a static IP address, you can connect it to the network.
• If the computer has an active wireless network connection, disable the wireless connection and connect
to your Opto 22 device via a wired connection. If you are connecting to a wireless Opto 22 device, you
will configure the wireless connection later.
• If the computer has multiple network interface controller (NIC) cards, disable all of them except for the
one that will be connecting to your Opto 22 device. You can re-enable them after you complete these
steps.
• If you need to modify the computer’s network interface settings, you must be logged in with
administrative rights.
• If you are using Windows Defender Firewall, verify that PAC Manager is checked for all network types,
including Domain.
• If needed, temporarily disable firewalls on the computer running PAC Manager. Firewalls, such as the
ones that come with some anti-virus software programs and the built-in firewall in Windows, can prevent
PAC Manager from receiving BootP broadcasts. (Firewalls in a router should not be a problem.)
If disabling firewalls is not an option, configure a firewall exception for PAC Manager.
– To configure a firewall exception in your system’s anti-virus software, see the manufacturer’s
instructions.
– To configure a firewall exception in Windows, open Control Panel > System and Security > Windows
Firewall > Allow an app or feature through Windows Firewall and add PAC Manager to the list of
allowed programs.
You can reenable the firewall (or remove the firewall exception) after you have assigned the IP addresses.
• Check your PC’s Network Profile. If it is set to Public, change it to Private. For Windows 10, choose
Settings > Network & Internet > Ethernet and click the name of your Ethernet connection. Set the “Make
this PC discoverable” option to On.

Assigning IP Addresses

SNAP PAC controller, must be assigned a unique, static IP address. If the network you’re using has a
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server, either assign a static IP address before connecting the
device to the network (preferred), or disable the server. (These servers may respond to BootP requests and
assign a dynamic address.)
Wired+Wireless models: These devices have a wireless LAN interface as well as wired interfaces, but they
send a BootP request only on the wired interface. First, follow the steps below to connect to them over a wired
network and assign their primary IP address. Later, you can configure the wireless interface.

TIP: If you are adding an I/O segment to an existing Ethernet network, your network administrator must provide
For multiple devices, static IP addresses and subnet masks for the I/O units. If you are creating an independent, dedicated Ethernet
see page 15. network just for I/O, you can choose your own addresses.
1. Make sure that the Opto 22 hardware is installed according to directions in its user’s guide, and that the
PAC Manager software is installed on the computer.
2. Make sure you know the IP address, subnet mask, and MAC address for each device that will receive an IP
address.

10 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

– The MAC address is on a label on the side of the controller or brain.

– SNAP PAC S-series and R-series controllers each have two separate Ethernet network interfaces;
wired+wireless models have an additional wireless interface. Each interface has its own MAC
address and must be on a separate logical network. The interface’s logical network is determined by
its IP address and subnet mask. For details, see the Simplified IP Addressing Technical Note (form
1362) or get help from your system administrator.
Only Ethernet 1 sends a BootP request. Once you have assigned this primary IP address, you can
assign Ethernet 2 (the secondary address) and the wireless address, if applicable. To assign an
address to Ethernet 2, see page 19; for wireless configuration, see page 23.
– SNAP PAC brains are different from controllers. Since the brain’s two Ethernet network interfaces act
as an Ethernet switch and share the same IP address, it doesn’t matter which interface is attached to
the network. The BootP broadcast comes through both. On a wired+wireless EB brain, the wireless
interface has a separate IP address. After you assign the primary IP address for the wired network,
see page 23 for wireless configuration.
3. Turn on the Opto 22 device(s).
4. If PAC Manager isn’t already open it, start it.1
The PAC Manager main window opens.

Menu bar
Toolbar

5. In PAC Manager’s menu bar, click Tools > Assign IP Address.

1 Click the Windows Search button and type PAC Manager 10.4.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 11

ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS

The Assign IP Address dialog box opens. Any Opto 22 Ethernet-based devices without IP addresses that
are on the computer’s network segment appear in the list of units requesting IP addresses.

If no MAC address appears, check the following:

– Is the Opto 22 device turned on?
– Is it correctly connected to the computer using a crossover cable or correctly connected to an
Ethernet switch using a straight-through cable? in
– Is the computer’s network card configured with the same subnet mask as the device? See the
computer’s user’s guide for networking information.
– Does the device already have an IP address? If you want to change the IP address, see page 199.
– Is the device booting to the loader rather than the firmware? If so, see the device’s user’s guide for
more information on STAT LED blink codes.
– Have you addressed all the items in “Checking Network Setup and PC” on page 10?
6. Double-click the MAC address of the device in the list that matches the device you are assigning the IP
address to.
CAUTION: PAC Manager lists ALL Opto 22 devices sending BootP broadcasts. Assign IP addresses only to the
devices that are yours.

The Mapping dialog box opens.

12 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

7. Enter the IP Address and the Subnet Mask for the device. If the device will be communicating with a
device on another subnet, enter the Gateway (router) address. If it will communicate only on the local
subnet, leave the gateway address all zeros (0.0.0.0).
Leave the DNS address at 0.0.0.0 and the Host Name field blank.
WARNING! Each device on your network, including computers, routers, controllers, brains, and so on, must
have a unique IP address. Failure to assign unique IP addresses may cause catastrophic network or hardware
failures. If you don’t know which IP addresses are safe to use, check with your system administrator.

8. When the IP address, subnet mask, and other fields are correct, click OK.
The new IP address information appears in the upper list in the dialog box, and the device’s status
changes to Mapped. The address information also appears in the lower list to show that this device has
been mapped to this address.

Status changes to Mapped

MAC address data

appears in lower pane

9. With the device still highlighted, click Assign.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 13

ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS

The address is saved to flash memory, and the status changes to IP Address Assigned.

Status changes to IP Address Assigned.

– Once a device’s status becomes Assigned or Static, you can no longer change its IP address
information from this dialog box. To change the address, use Tools > Change IP Settings. (For details,
see page 199.)
– If the device’s status changes from Mapped to IP Address Assigned, and then back to Mapped, and
the STAT LED on the device continues to flash (instead of steadily glowing green) this means the IP
address was not successfully assigned. This often happens when you try to assign the IP address by
using a wireless connection, rather than a wired connection. Connect to the device with a cable and
try again, and verify that you’ve performed all of the checks listed in “Assigning IP Addresses to SNAP
PAC” on page 10.
10. To verify that the IP address has been assigned successfully, highlight the device in the upper list and click
Test.
A command prompt window opens and the IP address is automatically tested using the PING command.
You should see a reply similar to the following:

If you don’t see a reply, make sure the subnet mask you’ve assigned matches the subnet mask on your
computer.

14 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

11. For future reference, write the IP address next to the MAC address on the white sticker provided on the
device.
12. Repeat steps 6 through 11 for any other devices in the list that you are responsible for.
13. To save the list of IP address and MAC address mappings (the lower list in the dialog box) for future
reference, click the Save List button. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file, enter a
filename, and then click Save.
The address information is saved. You can load this information into PAC Manager later if you need to see
it.

What’s Next?
• For a SNAP PAC R-series controller, continue to page 19 to assign an IP address to Ethernet 2.
– For a Wired+Wireless model, configure the wireless LAN interface (page 23). Then continue with
“Creating an I/O Unit Configuration File” on page 27.
• For a Wired+Wireless EB brain, configure the wireless LAN interface on page 23. Then continue with
“Creating an I/O Unit Configuration File” on page 27.
• For a SNAP PAC EB brain, continue with “Creating an I/O Unit Configuration File” on page 27.
• For a SNAP PAC S-series controller, choose from the following:
– To set up security on the wired network, see page 78.
– To assign an IP address to Ethernet 2 on a wired network, see page 19.
– (Wired+Wireless models only) To configure the wireless LAN interface, see page 23.
• To create PAC Control strategies to run on the controller, see the PAC Control User’s Guide (form 1700).
Information on peer-to-peer communication using the Scratch Pad area of the controller can be found in
the PAC Control User’s Guide; see the “peer-to-peer communication” in the index. See also the PAC Control
Command Reference (form 1701).
• To work with the controller’s file system, microSD card, and FTP, see page 215.

Assigning IP Addresses to Multiple Devices

NOTE: In order to assign IP addresses, you must be logged in with administrative rights.

If you are an OEM, integrator, or customer who has a large number of Opto 22 devices to work with at once,
you may find it easier to first create a file of MAC-to-IP address mappings, and then assign IP addresses from
the file.

Creating the Map File

1. Make sure you have the MAC addresses for all Opto 22 devices in front of you. Also make sure you know
what IP addresses and subnet masks you are going to use for them.
The MAC address for each device appears on a white sticker or space on the device itself. To determine
the IP addresses and subnet masks to use, work with the network administrator for the Ethernet network
on which the devices will be used.
NOTE: On a SNAP PAC controller, you can assign only the primary IP address using these steps. To assign the
secondary IP address (Ethernet 2), follow steps on page 19.

2. Before installing the Opto 22 devices, open PAC Manager. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
3. From the Tools menu, click Assign IP Address.
The Assign IP Address dialog box opens.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 15

ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS

Upper section is used for live

assignment to devices.

Lower section shows contents

of a file containing lists of
addresses. These addresses
may or may not be actual
assignments.

The upper section of this dialog box lists all Opto 22 devices on the same network that send a BootP or
DHCP broadcast while the dialog box is open. When you are ready to assign IP addresses, this is where
you do so. For now, ignore anything that appears here.
The lower section shows the contents of a mapping file you create, either while assigning actual
addresses or in advance of assigning them. This file can be saved, changed, and reloaded at a later time
for reference or to quickly assign addresses using the upper section—but the actual addresses on
devices cannot be assigned or changed here. The important thing to remember about this lower section
is that the list does not necessarily reflect actual addresses on devices. The IP addresses in the list may not
have been assigned yet, or a device’s address might have been changed at some point and the list not
updated.
4. In the lower section of the dialog box, click Add.

5. For the first Opto 22 device, type the correct MAC address (the first six digits are entered for you; they are
the same for all Opto 22 devices). Enter the IP address and subnet mask. Enter the Gateway address if
needed. Leave the DNS address at 0.0.0.0 and the Host Name field blank.
6. Double-check all numbers. When all are correct, click OK.

16 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

The device’s address information is listed in the lower section of the dialog box.

7. Click Add again and add additional addresses until all of them are listed in the lower section.

8. Double-check the addresses. If one is incorrect, click it to highlight it, click Modify, and make the
necessary changes.
9. To save the mapping file, click Save List. In the Save dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to
place the file, enter a filename, and click Save.
The .map file is saved as a simple text file. This allows it to be modified in text editors such as Notepad.
10. Continue with the next section to assign the addresses.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 17

ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS

Assigning Addresses from the Map File

NOTE: BootP broadcasts cannot get through a firewall in the computer where PAC Manager is running. Make sure
any firewall in the computer is disabled before you try to assign IP addresses. Firewalls in a router should not be a
problem.

1. IMPORTANT: Disable all DHCP servers on the Ethernet network you are using to assign IP addresses.
If a DHCP server is enabled on the network, it may assign IP addresses before PAC Manager has a chance
to do so. If that happens, turn off power to the devices, disable all DHCP servers, and turn the devices
back on. They should broadcast again.
2. Make sure that each Opto 22 device is installed according to directions in its user’s guide. Make sure the
computer you use is on the same network segment as the devices.
3. Turn on all the Opto 22 devices.
4. If PAC Manager isn’t already open, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
5. In the PAC Manager menu bar, click ToolsAssign IP Address.
6. If the .map file you want does not appear in the lower section of the Assign IP Address dialog box, click
Load List, locate the file, and open it.
The Opto 22 devices begin to appear in the upper section of the dialog box. IP address information from
the map file is copied to the corresponding MAC address in the upper section, and the status of each
device changes to Mapped.

Status changes to Mapped. IP address information is filled in.

7. Check the address information. If anything is incorrect, double-click the device in the lower list and
change it. Click Save List to save the change to the file.
The change is automatically made to the upper section.
8. When all addresses are correct, click Assign All.
The address is saved to flash memory, and the status changes to Static IP.
The devices now have their IP addresses. If you need to change an address, use ToolsChange IP Settings
(see page 199). To assign an IP address to Ethernet 2 on a SNAP PAC controller, see the steps in the next
section.

18 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

Assigning an IP Address to Ethernet 2 (SNAP PAC Controller Only)

NOTE: This section does not apply to SNAP PAC brains; the two Ethernet network interfaces on a SNAP PAC brain have
the same IP address.

For Wired+Wireless models, see page 23 to configure the wireless LAN interface.

SNAP PAC R-series and S-series controllers have two independent Ethernet network interfaces, labeled on the
top of the controller as Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2. The controller sends its initial BootP request from Ethernet 1,
and the IP address you assign to the controller is for this primary interface. To communicate through Ethernet
2, you must assign it a separate IP address following the steps below.
IMPORTANT: The two Ethernet interfaces will work only if they are on separate IP subnets, so the control engine can
clearly determine where to direct communication. (The subnet masks can be the same or different, but when you
perform a logical AND on the IP address and subnet mask for each interface, the two results must be different.) For
example:

Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2
IP Address: 192.168.0.12 10.0.0.5
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

NOTE: If you need to configure or modify settings for the network interface cards on your computer, you must be
logged in with administrative rights.

1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
2. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
The Inspect window opens.
– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, the window will not show any data.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 19

ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS

– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.

– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.
– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional features:
Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list of
devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

3. In the Device Name field, type the name for the SNAP PAC controller (or choose it from the drop-down
list). If the controller has not been defined in PAC Manager, the Add New Device dialog box appears.
Choose Direct Connection to Ethernet Device and enter the IP address of the primary Ethernet interface
(Ethernet 1). Leave the Ethernet port at 2001 unless you have changed it on the controller.
4. Click Status Read.

20 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

Status information for the controller is shown in the window. Scroll down till you see ETHERNET 2
Interface. If the IP address for Ethernet 2 has not been assigned yet, the IP address information will show
all zeros.

Secondary IP address
information

5. Click Status Write. Scroll down to see all the IP address fields for Ethernet 2.

Ethernet 2 IP
address fields

Restart command

6. Click the Value field for IP Address under Ethernet 2 Interface and type in the IP address. Enter the
Ethernet 2 Subnet Mask the same way. If necessary, change the Gateway. Leave the DNS as is.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 21

ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS

7. When all the secondary IP address fields are correct, click Apply.
The information is sent to the SNAP PAC, but it cannot communicate on the Ethernet 2 interface until it is
restarted.
8. In the Operation Commands section, highlight Restart Device from powerup. Then click Send Command.
The SNAP PAC is restarted.
9. Check to make sure the controller is back on line by clicking Status Read again. Click OK at the message.
Scroll down a little to see all the IP address information for Ethernet 2.

IP address for primary

interface (Ethernet 1)

Ethernet 1 IP address
information

Ethernet 2 IP address
information

10. To verify that the secondary IP address (Ethernet 2) is also communicating, make sure Ethernet 2 is
attached to the correct network. On a computer on the same subnet as Ethernet 2, open the PAC
Manager Inspect window. Enter the Ethernet 2 IP address (or a different name) in the Device Name field
and click Status Read.
The controller now shows the same information, but through the secondary interface:

22 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

IP address for secondary

interface (Ethernet 2)

Ethernet 1 IP address
information

Ethernet 2 IP address
information

Configuring Wireless LAN Communication (Wired+Wireless Models Only)

This section applies only to SNAP PAC controllers and EB brains with wireless LAN interfaces (models ending in
-W). These devices send their initial BootP request from Ethernet 1, and the IP address you assign to them is for
this primary interface. To communicate through the wireless LAN interface, you must assign it a separate IP
address and configure communication following the steps below.
IMPORTANT: The wireless LAN interface will work only if it is on a separate IP subnet, so the device can clearly
determine where to direct communication. (The subnet masks can be the same or different, but when you perform a
logical AND on the IP address and subnet mask for each interface, the two results must be different.) For example, on
a SNAP-PAC-S1-W you might use the following addresses and subnet masks:

Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2 Wireless LAN

IP Address: 11.192.55.162 10.10.10.7 146.87.12.250
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

NOTE: If you need to configure or modify the settings for the network interface cards on your computer, you must be
logged in with administrative rights.

1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
2. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
The Inspect window opens.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 23

ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS

– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, the window will not show any data.

– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.

– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.
– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list

24 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

3. In the Device Name field, type the device’s name or IP address (or choose it from the drop-down list).
4. Click Wireless LAN and choose Wireless LAN Configure from the popup menu.

5. In the WLAN Enable line, click the arrow next to Disabled and choose Enable.
6. Leave WLAN Logging disabled and Rx Inactivity Timeout at the default of 300.
7. Under Network Block Configuration, enter the IP address and subnet mask for the wireless network.
Remember that it must be on a separate network segment from the wired interfaces on the device.
8. If necessary, enter the Primary and Secondary Gateway addresses. Leave the Primary and Secondary DNS
fields blank.
9. Type in the name of the wireless network (SSID).

PAC Manager User’s Guide 25

ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS

10. For Encryption Type, click the arrow next to None.

11. From the drop-down list, choose the security used on the wireless network.
Additional fields appear.
12. Choose the Network Key Input Type, either Hexadecimal or ASCII (WEP is normally Hex; WPA and WPA2
are normally ASCII).
13. Enter the Network Key (the password for the network).
This field will show the password when you enter it; however, if you inspect the device later, the field will
show only asterisks.
14. When all fields are complete, click Apply.
15. At the message asking whether you want to restart the device, click Yes.
The configuration information is sent to the device and stored to flash memory, and the device is
restarted. The WLAN LED turns orange to indicate that the interface is searching for or authenticating the
wireless network. Once the network is found, the LED turns solid green.

26 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

16. To see connection status and signal strength, click the View Status button. (You can also see this screen
by clicking Wireless LAN > Wireless LAN Status.)

CONNECTING WITH A SNAP PAC SB BRAIN

Most devices you communicate with using PAC Manager are Ethernet-based. That is, they have at least one
Ethernet network interface and can be reached directly over an Ethernet network that includes the computer
where PAC Manager is installed.
SNAP PAC SB brains are an exception: they have no Ethernet interface and instead communicate over a serial
network. PAC Manager can communicate with SB brains in two ways, however.
• Through a SNAP PAC controller, via an Ethernet connection to the controller and then a serial connection
from the controller to the brain. This method is easy and does not require the brain to be located near the
computer.
• Directly from the computer to the brain, using the computer’s serial port via a serial cable and an RS-485
adapter, such as an Opto 22 PCI-AC48 adapter card. This method is useful for configuring points and
features before brains are deployed to the field, or if you are not using a SNAP PAC controller.
For connections, see wiring instructions in the SNAP PAC Brains User's Guide (form 1690).

CREATING AN I/O UNIT CONFIGURATION FILE

About E1 and E2 brain boards: You can configure E1s and E2s like any other I/O unit if you have E1/E2 firmware R1.2a
(and higher) and PAC Project 9.5000 (and higher). Also, if a SNAP PAC controller communicates with the E1 or E2, the
controller must have PAC firmware R9.5a (or higher) to use this simplified configuration method. If you are not using
these firmware and software versions (or if you prefer to use the previous method to reconfigure existing E1s or E2s),
see I/O Configuration for E1 an E2 Brain Boards (form 1576).

PAC Manager User’s Guide 27

CREATING AN I/O UNIT CONFIGURATION FILE

Before you create a control strategy using PAC Control, or before you read or write to I/O units, you need to
configure the I/O points and features the strategy or other application will use. You can use PAC Manager to
copy a configuration or to configure all points, save the configuration to a file, and then upload the
configuration to one I/O unit or to several at once. You do not need to be attached to the I/O unit while you
are creating the configuration file and configuring its points.
NOTE: If you are using OPC to communicate with the I/O unit, you can use the configuration file (tag file) that PAC
Manager produces as an easy way to reference points for OPC. For details, see the OptoOPCServer User’s Guide
(form 1439, available with the purchase of PAC Project Professional or OptoOPCServer).

You can start configuration in one of three ways:

• If this is a new configuration, you can create a new configuration file (page 28).
• If an existing I/O unit has the exact configuration you want, you can copy it directly to another I/O unit
(page 29).
• If you have a PAC Control strategy with similar I/O units configured, you can save them as a configuration
file (page 31) and modify the configuration. Note that this method transfers I/O unit and point
information only; any event messages, email or SNMP settings, and so on are not included when a
configuration file is exported from or imported to PAC Control. Also, 4-channel digital module and point
information is generic; you will need to reenter specific digital configurations.

Creating a New Configuration File

1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
2. In the PAC Manager main window, click the New button or click FileNew.
3. In the Create New Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the location where you want the file to be. Type a
filename. Click Open.
A new configuration tree appears. (If you are familiar with PAC Control, you’ll notice that this window
looks like part of a Strategy Tree.)

Configuration tree

You can expand and collapse the folders to see or hide the I/O units and points in them. Closing the
configuration tree is the same as closing the configuration file.
4. To save the configuration file, click the Save button (or in the menu bar, click FileSave).
5. Once the file is saved, continue with “Adding an I/O Unit” on page 32.

28 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

Copying an I/O Unit Configuration

If you have an I/O unit or a previously saved I/O unit image file with exactly the configuration you want to use,
you can copy the configuration information to another I/O unit or to an I/O unit image file. This works with all
SNAP PAC Ethernet and serial brains.
1. In the PAC Manager menu bar, click ToolsImport/Copy I/O Unit.

Source

Destination

2. For the source, choose one of the following:

– Existing I/O Unit Flash Memory: Choose an existing I/O unit. If you want to add or modify an I/O unit,
click Options. For help, see “Add/Modify New Device” on page 241.
– Previously Saved I/O Unit Image File: Enter the name of the I/O image file you want to use, or click the
browse button to find the file.
3. When the source is correct, click Read.
A success message appears when the data has been read. Click OK.
4. For the destination, choose one of the following:
Send Image To I/O Unit Flash Memory. Choose an existing I/O unit. If you want to add or modify an I/O unit,
click Options. For help, see “Add/Modify New Device” on page 241.
Make sure you have entered the correct IP address. The configuration will overwrite anything currently in the I/O
unit’s flash memory.

Save To I/O Unit Image File. Enter the name of the I/O image file you want to write to, or click the browse
button to find the file.
Create New I/O Unit: Select this option to copy all the point information from a brain to create a new I/O
unit in PAC Manager. You will be prompted to enter an I/O unit name. For more information, see
“Creating a New I/O Unit from an Existing One” on page 29.
5. When the destination is correct, click Send, Save, or Create depending on the destination type.
A success message appears when the operation has completed.

Creating a New I/O Unit from an Existing One

The Create New I/O Unit option on the I/O Unit Import/Copy dialog box allows you to create a new I/O unit by
importing point information from the flash memory of an existing I/O unit directly into the tree structure of a

PAC Manager User’s Guide 29

CREATING AN I/O UNIT CONFIGURATION FILE

configuration file (also known as a tag database). You can then configure, add, or delete points in the new I/O
unit just as you would with an I/O unit created from scratch.
1. Make sure to save the existing I/O unit’s configuration information to flash memory. See “Saving
Configuration to a Device’s Flash Memory” on page 190.
2. Open an existing configuration file on the File menu, or create a new one. For information, see “Creating
a New Configuration File” on page 28.
3. In the PAC Manager menu bar, click ToolsImport/Copy I/O Unit.
4. For the Image Source, choose Existing I/O Unit Flash Memory.
5. Enter the IP address of the existing I/O unit, and click Read.
A success message appears when the data has been read. Click OK.
6. For the destination, choose Create New I/O Unit, and click Create.

Click Create

7. In the Add I/O Unit dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new I/O unit, and click OK.
The new I/O unit is added to the open tag database and a success message appears. Click OK.
8. Close the I/O Unit Import/Copy dialog box.
9. Expand the new I/O unit to see the imported points.

Tag database (configuration file)

New I/O unit
Imported points

10. Before you can save the new I/O unit, the digital points must be assigned specific modules as follows:
a. Right-click a digital point and select Configure from the popup menu.
b. Double-click a generic digital module.

30 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

Generic digital
module

c. In the Edit Module dialog box, select a digital module to match the existing I/O unit, and then click
OK.

Select a digital module

d. Repeat steps b and c for each generic module on the new I/O unit.
e. Close the Configure I/O Points dialog box.
11. Save the new I/O unit.

Creating a Configuration File from Another Strategy

If you use PAC Control and have a strategy with SNAP PAC I/O units already configured, you may want to
export that file and use it as a starting point, rather than creating a configuration file from scratch. The
exported file will contain all the I/O units in the strategy. However, note the following:
• I/O unit and point data is transferred; optional functions such as event messages are not.
• Four-channel digital modules and points do not retain specific configurations but revert to generic ones.
Specific data will have to be reentered.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 31

ADDING AN I/O UNIT

• You cannot save changes you make in PAC Manager back to the strategy file. Instead, you save them to a
configuration file, which can then be imported into PAC Control.
Follow these steps to create a configuration file from an existing strategy:
1. In PAC Control, open the strategy that contains the I/O units whose configurations you want to export.
2. In the configuration tree, right-click the I/O Units folder and choose Export from the pop-up menu.
3. In the Export I/O Units to an Opto Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the location where you want to
save the configuration file. Enter a name for the file, and click Save.
4. If PAC Manager isn’t already open, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
5. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Open button or click FileOpen.
6. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, locate the file you just saved and open it.

Configuration tree

7. Expand the I/O Units folder in the configuration tree to see the units and points that are already
configured.
8. Continue with the next section to add or change I/O units.

ADDING AN I/O UNIT

About E1 and E2 brain boards: You can configure E1s and E2s like any other I/O unit if you have E1/E2 firmware R1.2a
(and higher) and PAC Project 9.5000 (and higher). Also, if a SNAP PAC controller communicates with the E1 or E2, the
controller must have PAC firmware R9.5a (or higher) to use this simplified configuration method. If you are not using
these firmware and software versions (or if you prefer to use the previous method to reconfigure existing E1s or E2s),
see I/O Configuration for E1 an E2 Brain Boards (form 1576).

An I/O unit consists of a SNAP I/O mounting rack, plus the I/O processor (brain or on-the-rack controller) and
I/O modules mounted on it. Racks used with SNAP PAC I/O units can hold up to 16 modules.
You must add an I/O unit before you can configure its modules and points.

32 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

1. Make sure the configuration file is open. On the configuration tree, double-click the I/O Units folder to
open the Configure I/O Units dialog box:

2. To configure a new I/O unit, click Add or double-click anywhere in the box below any listed units.
The Add I/O Unit dialog box appears.

A
B

C
D
E
F
G

Address List area

PAC Manager User’s Guide 33

ADDING AN I/O UNIT

3. For a SNAP PAC SB brain, skip to step 5. For an Ethernet-based unit, complete the fields as follows:

A—Name. Enter a name for the I/O unit. The name must start with a letter and may contain letters,
numbers, and underscores. Spaces are converted to underscores.

B—Description. (Optional) Enter a description of the unit.

C—Type. Select the type of I/O unit from the drop-down list.

D—Temp. Choose whether temperatures will be handled in Fahrenheit or Celsius.

E—Port. Specify the communication port to use (2001, unless you have changed it for security
purposes according to instructions starting on page 78).

F—Address. Enter the IP address for the I/O unit.

G—Secondary. If it’s a SNAP PAC R-series I/O unit with a secondary IP address, enter the secondary IP
address.

H—Watchdog. Select whether you want a Watchdog on the unit. The default is No (disabled). If you
select Yes, a new field appears; enter the Watchdog timeout value in seconds. The default timeout is 0.5
seconds. For information on watchdogs, see page 74.
4. The Address List area shows IP addresses of the I/O units that should receive this configuration. If this is
the only I/O unit to receive the configuration, don’t add any addresses here. However, if you have I/O
units that are exactly alike, list all of them here. That way you can download the configuration file to all
the I/O units at once.
a. To add an IP address, click Add.
In the dialog box, you can add a single IP address or a range of addresses.

b. Enter the IP address(es) and click OK.

The addresses appear in the Address List area.
c. Skip to step 6.
5. For a SNAP PAC SB brain, complete the dialog box as follows:

34 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

A
B

C
F G
D
E

A—Name. Enter a name for the I/O unit. The name must start with a letter and may contain letters,
numbers, and underscores. Spaces are converted to underscores.

B—Description. (Optional) Enter a description of the unit.

C—Type. Select the type of I/O unit from the drop-down list.

D—Temp. Choose whether temperatures will be handled in Fahrenheit or Celsius.

E—Connection. Choose whether you are connecting to the SB brain through a SNAP PAC controller or
directly from the computer (for more information, see “Connecting with a SNAP PAC SB Brain” on
page 27).

F—Ethernet Passthrough.
– Enter the controller’s IP address. Leave the port at 2001 unless you have changed it.
– Enter the controller’s serial port where the brain is connected. On a SNAP-PAC-S1, it’s Serial 2.
On a SNAP-PAC-S2, it could be any port.
– The baud rate on the controller must match the rate set on the brain.
– Enter the serial address of the brain.

G—Serial Direct.
– Enter the serial port on the computer where the brain is connected. The baud rate on the
controller must match the rate set on the brain.
– Enter the serial address of the brain.

H—Watchdog. Select whether you want a Watchdog on the unit. The default is No (disabled). If you
select Yes, a new field appears; enter the Watchdog timeout value in seconds. The default timeout is 0.5
seconds. For information on watchdogs, see page 74.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 35

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

6. When information in the Add I/O Unit dialog box is complete, click OK.
The new I/O unit appears in the Configure I/O Units dialog box.

7. Continue with the next section, “Configuring I/O Modules and Points.”

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

About E1 and E2 brain boards: You can configure E1s and E2s like any other I/O unit if you have E1/E2 firmware R1.2a
(and higher) and PAC Project 9.5000 (and higher). Also, if a SNAP PAC controller communicates with the E1 or E2, the
controller must have PAC firmware R9.5a (or higher) to use this simplified configuration method. If you are not using
these firmware and software versions (or if you prefer to use the previous method to reconfigure existing E1s or E2s),
see I/O Configuration for E1 an E2 Brain Boards (form 1576).

Once you have added an I/O unit, you can configure its modules and points. See the following pages for
configuration steps. For motion control modules (such as SNAP-SCM-MCH16), see the SNAP PAC Motion
Control User’s Guide (form 1673).

Configuring SNAP Digital Points

About E1 and E2 brain boards: You can configure E1s and E2s like any other I/O unit if you have E1/E2 firmware R1.2a
(and higher) and PAC Project 9.5000 (and higher). Also, if a SNAP PAC controller communicates with the E1 or E2, the
controller must have PAC firmware R9.5a (or higher) to use this simplified configuration method. If you are not using
these firmware and software versions (or if you prefer to use the previous method to reconfigure existing E1s or E2s),
see I/O Configuration for E1 an E2 Brain Boards (form 1576).

Use the following steps to configure digital points on all digital modules supported by the brain or
on-the-rack controller.
1. In the Configure I/O Units dialog box, make sure the I/O unit for the point you are adding is highlighted.
Click the I/O Points button.

36 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

The Configure I/O Points dialog box appears. The dialog box shown here is for a SNAP I/O unit.

2. Double-click the number that represents the digital module’s position on the rack. (For help, see the
diagrams starting on page 155.)
3. For a SNAP I/O unit, choose the module type and then the exact module part number from the list.

4. Click OK.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 37

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

5. Back in the Configure I/O Points dialog box, click the plus sign next to the new module to expand it.
Notice that the module icon is color-coded to reflect the type of module being configured: white for
digital DC input, red for digital DC output, yellow for digital AC input, and black for digital AC output.

Module icon

Expand or collapse points on

the module by clicking the +
or - sign in the box.

Points

6. Double-click the point you want to configure.

A
B

7. Complete the fields as follows:

A—Name. Enter a name for the point. The name must start with a letter and may contain letters,
numbers, and underscores. Spaces are converted to underscores.

B—Description. (Optional) Enter a description of the point.

C—Type, Module. For a SNAP I/O unit, the type and module are already filled in for you.

D—Features. To use a feature of the module, choose it from the drop-down list. (See “Using I/O Point
Features” on page 71 for explanations of point features. Note that some features, such as pulsing and
totalizing, can be configured in PAC Manager but require PAC Control to use them.)

38 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

E—Watchdog. (Output modules only) To configure a status the point should be set to if the
Watchdog timer on this I/O unit expires, click Yes and choose On or Off from the drop-down list.
8. When you have completed the fields, click OK.
The new point appears in the list.

9. To configure more digital points, repeat the steps. To configure analog points, see page 41.

Configuring Digital Points for a G4EB2

Use the following steps to configure digital points on all G4 or Quad Pak digital modules supported by the
G4EB2 brain. The G4EB2 replaces a 32-channel brain in a mistic or Pamux system with an
Ethernet-based 32-channel digital brain that uses OptoMMP protocol. The G4EB2 brain is functionally similar
to a SNAP-PAC-EB2 brain without analog I/O functionality. Input and output modules can be placed in any
order.
1. In the Configure I/O Units dialog box, highlight the digital I/O unit the points are on, and click I/O Points.
The Configure I/O Points dialog box appears.

Points that have not been configured yet show as Not Used.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 39

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

For G4 modules, there is one channel per module.

For Quad Pak modules, there are four channels
per module which must be grouped together as
shown.
Module Position Channels Used
First 0–3
Second 4–7
Third 8–11
Fourth 12–15
Fifth 16–19 First module (channels 0–3)
Sixth 20–23
Seventh 24–27
Eighth 28–31

2. Double-click the channel number for the point you want to add.
The Add Digital Point dialog box appears.

A
B

C
D
E

3. Complete the fields as follows:

A—Name. Enter a name for the point. The name must start with a letter and may contain letters,
numbers, and underscores. Spaces are converted to underscores.

B—Description. (Optional) Enter a description of the point.

C—Type. Select the type, either Input or Output.

D—Module. Select a module from the drop-down list.

E—Features. To use a feature of the module, choose it from the drop-down list. (See “Using I/O Point
Features” on page 71 for explanations of point features. Note that some features, such as pulsing and
totalizing, can be configured in PAC Manager but require PAC Control to use them.)

F—Watchdog. (Output modules only) To configure a status the point should be set to if the Watchdog
timer on this I/O unit expires, click Yes and choose On or Off from the drop-down list.
4. When you have completed the fields, click OK.
The new point is added.

40 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

5. To configure more digital points, repeat the steps.

Configuring Analog Points

About E1 and E2 brain boards: You can configure E1s and E2s like any other I/O unit if you have E1/E2 firmware R1.2a
(and higher) and PAC Project 9.5000 (and higher). Also, if a SNAP PAC controller communicates with the E1 or E2, the
controller must have PAC firmware R9.5a (or higher) to use this simplified configuration method. If you are not using
these firmware and software versions (or if you prefer to use the previous method to reconfigure existing E1s or E2s),
see I/O Configuration for E1 an E2 Brain Boards (form 1576).

To configure points on analog modules supported by the brain or on-the-rack controller:

1. In the Configure I/O Points dialog box, double-click the number that represents the analog module’s
position on the rack. (For help, see the diagrams starting on page 155.)
2. For a SNAP I/O unit, choose the module type and then the exact module part number from the list.

3. Click OK.
4. In the Configure I/O Points dialog box, click the plus sign next to the new module to expand it. Notice
that the module icon is color-coded to reflect the type of module being configured: blue for analog
input, green for analog output.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 41

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

Module icon

Expand or collapse points on

the module by clicking the +
or - sign in the box.

Points

5. Double-click the point you want to configure.

A
B

E
D
F

6. Complete the fields as follows:

A—Name. Enter a name for the point. The name must start with a letter and may contain letters,
numbers, and underscores. (Spaces are converted to underscores.)

B—Description. (Optional) Enter a description of the point.

C—Type, Module. For a SNAP I/O unit, the type and module are inserted for you, but you may be able
to choose a different range or module from the drop-down list.

D—Units, Scale. Units and scaling for this module. See “Using Custom Scaling” on page 43.

42 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

E—Scaling Default. To return the units, zero-scale value, and full-scale value to the defaults for the
module, click Default.

F—Scaling Custom. To assign custom units and values to the module, click Custom. For example, you
could scale the voltage range of a -10 to +10 VDC module to be interpreted as engineering units of liters
per second instead of volts. See “Using Custom Scaling” on page 43.

G—Watchdog. (Outputs only.) To configure a value this point should be set to if the Watchdog timer
on this I/O unit expires, click Yes and enter the value.
7. When you have completed the fields, click OK.
The new point is added. This image shows a SNAP I/O unit.

Point types and features are shown in the Features/Subtype column.

8. To add more analog points, repeat the steps. To add digital points, see page 36.

Using Custom Scaling

Analog modules can be set to show something other than the actual inputs or outputs. For example, you
could scale the readings of a -10 to +10 VDC input point to measure its input as zero liters per second when
the real-world reading is zero VDC, and 1000 liters per second when the real-world reading is five VDC.
Thermocouple values are not linear and cannot be scaled.
NOTE: Custom scaling has no effect on the resolution or accuracy of the module.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 43

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

1. In the Add Analog Point dialog box, click the Custom button in the Scaling area to open the Scale Analog
Readings dialog box.

This example shows units scaled to liters per

second. At an actual input of 0 VDC, the point
will show 0 liters per second. At an actual input
A of 5 VDC, the point will show 1000 liters per
second.
B
C

D
E

Custom scaled values are floating point values:

– For analog input points with PAC firmware R8.0a and higher, you can use inverted scaling. Inverted
scaling means the lower value is greater than the upper value; inverted scaling can accommodate a
sensor, for example, that is wired to the SNAP module in a way that produces a negative current or
voltage.
– For analog output points you cannot use inverted scaling. The upper value must be greater than the
lower value.
2. Complete the fields as follows:

A—Scaled Units. Enter new engineering units for the module. The example uses liters per second.

B—Actual Lower Value. Enter the actual real-world lower value that the scaled lower value
corresponds to. Note that inputs typically have under-range capability, which means you can specify a
lower actual value that is less than the zero-scale value. Outputs do not have under-range capability.

C—Scaled Lower Value. Enter the new scaled lower value. This value can be any floating point value.

D—Actual Upper Value. Enter the actual real-world upper value that the scaled upper value
corresponds to. For inputs, you can specify an upper actual value greater than the full-scale value.

E—Scaled Upper Value. Enter the new scaled upper value. For outputs, this value can be any floating
point value greater than the scaled lower value. For inputs, it can be greater than or less than the scaled
lower value. This example uses 1000, which scales the output to 1000 liters per second when its actual
reading is 5 VDC.
3. Click OK.

44 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

The new custom-scaled units appear in the Add Analog Point dialog box.

Notice the new units of liters per second and the

new minimum-scale (“Zero Scale”) and
maximum-scale (“Full Scale”) values of -2000 and
+2000. The example connects a sensor with a
range of 0–1000 liters per second, but an output of
only 0–5 volts, to a SNAP-AIV module with an
output of -10 to +10 volts. The figures shown reflect
the total possible range of the module, not the
sensor.

Custom Module’s
scale scale
(Liters/sec) (VDC)
Possible low
–2000 –10
value for module
–1000 –5
Upper & lower 0 = 0
values entered
in dialog box 1000 = 5

Possible high
2000 10
value for module

Calibrating Offset and Gain

This section describes how you can manually set offset and gain or have them automatically calculated and
set for you.
NOTE: You must use the manual method (page 47) if:

• You don't have access to a calibrator, or

• The point uses inverted scaling and your device has PAC firmware R9.5b or lower. (In inverted scaling, the
lower scaled value is greater than the upper scaled value.)
Starting with the introduction of SNAP-B3000-ENET, all SNAP PAC brains (including SBs), SNAP Ethernet I/O units,
and E2 brain boards can automatically calculate offset and gain for analog input points. If a -50 mV to +50 mV
input receives signals that are slightly off (for example, not exactly -50 mV at the lowest point), the offset and gain
can be calculated so that values appear accurately when read.
Offset and gain values affect engineering units (EU). For a temperature input, engineering units are in degrees
C or F, depending on how the I/O unit is configured.
IMPORTANT: To calibrate the point, the I/O unit must be turned on and attached to the network, and you must
have access to the I/O unit in order to use the calibrator. For points on a SNAP PAC SB-series brain, connect directly via
serial or through the controller via Ethernet. (See page 27 for details.)

Save the configuration to flash so that it is not lost when power is turned off. Since each calibration is for a specific
point on a specific I/O unit, the result cannot be saved to the configuration file and cannot be sent to any other I/O
unit.

First, calculate offset, and then calculate gain. The offset must be calculated at the signal corresponding to
zero engineering units (EU), and the gain must be calculated at the signal corresponding to the point’s
maximum input range value (or, for inverted scaling, the point’s minimum input range value—in inverted
scaling, the lower scaled value is greater than the upper scaled value).

PAC Manager User’s Guide 45

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

1. In the Configure I/O Points dialog box, highlight the analog input point you want to calibrate.

2. Click the Calibrate button in the lower-right corner of the dialog box.

To have the offset and gain calculated for you:

1. On the analog input point, use a calibrator to input the signal that corresponds to zero Engineering Units
(EU).
Example 1:SNAP-AIV (-10 to +10 VDC) configured with default scaling
zero EU = 0 VDC
Example 2: SNAP-AIV (-10 to +10 VDC) configured with custom scaling
Actual Scaled
Units VDC PSI
Lower -10 0*
Upper +10 100
*Zero EU is 0 PSI, which corresponds to a -10 VDC field signal

2. Click Offset, and then click the Set Offset button.

3. Use the calibrator to input the signal corresponding to the maximum input range value—or for inverted
scaling, to the minimum input range value—for the configured point type.
(In inverted scaling, the lower scaled value is greater than the upper scaled value.)
For the exact values, refer to the configured Point Type or see the module's data sheet.

46 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

Example:SNAP-AIV module; Point Type of -10 to +10 VCD:

Maximum Input Range Value = +10 VDC
For inverted scaling, Minimum Input Range Value = -10 VDC
4. Click Gain, and then click the Set Gain button.
To manually set offset and gain:
a. Click the More button.

b. Enter the Offset value. Click the Set Offset button.

c. Enter the Gain value. Click the Set Gain button.
When you have finished calibrating the point, close the dialog box to return to configuring I/O points.
NOTE: To store offset and gain values permanently, you must save the change to flash when you send the
configuration data to the I/O unit (see page 69).

Configuring RS-232 and RS-485/422 Serial Communication Modules

NOTE: For information on connecting a Windows serial application to a remote serial device through a SNAP
Ethernet-based system, see the SNAP Serial Communication Module User’s Guide (form 1191).

(Not applicable to SB brains) RS-232 and RS-485/422 serial communication modules do not require
configuration unless you need to change communication parameters such as port numbers or baud rates.
Because these serial modules require no configuration, they do not appear in the Configure I/O Points dialog
box in PAC Manager; you have to remember which positions on the I/O unit are filled with serial modules. For
more information on these modules, see the SNAP Serial Communication Module User’s Guide (form 1191).
Default port numbers are shown on page 156. Default communication parameters are:
• 1 start bit (not configurable)
• 9600 baud
• No parity
• 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit
• No handshaking
• Send a test message when the module is turned on.
• SNAP-SCM-232: No flow control
• SNAP-SCM-485-422: 2-wire mode

PAC Manager User’s Guide 47

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

Port numbers and all parameters except the last two (flow control and 2- or 4-wire mode) can be changed in
the I/O unit’s configuration file using the following steps. For flow control and 2- or 4-wire mode, see the steps
on page 49.
1. With the configuration file open, right-click the name of the I/O unit the serial module is on. From the
pop-up menu, choose Configure.
The Configure I/O Units dialog box opens.

Modules
button

2. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted. Click the Modules button and choose Serial Modules from
the pop-up menu.

3. Click the status cell for the module number and port number whose parameters you want to change.
From the pop-up menu, choose Enabled.
The Status changes to Enabled.
4. To change a communication parameter, click the cell you want to change within the highlighted line.
Choose from the drop-down list, if there is one, or type the new value in the cell.
NOTE: The start bit is not configurable. To set flow control and 2- or 4-wire mode, see the steps on page 49.

48 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

NOTE: EOM (end-of-message) characters apply only when using the serial module port with serial events (see
page 140). The device can check any one of up to four characters as the EOM indicator, and you enter them in
the field in hex. Example: 0x0D0A0000 looks for a 13 (hex 0D) or 10 (hex 0A).

5. When you have finished changing parameters for serial modules, click OK to close the dialog box and
return to configuring I/O units.
IMPORTANT: If you have changed a TCP port number, you must save the change to flash and restart the I/O unit
when you send the configuration data to the I/O unit (see page 69).

Configuring Flow Control and 2- or 4-Wire Mode

IMPORTANT: You can configure flow control on a SNAP-SCM-232 and 2- or 4-wire mode on a SNAP-SCM-485-422
using PAC Manager. However, these configurations cannot be saved to the configuration file. The I/O unit that
contains the serial module must be on the same network as your computer, and the configuration is sent directly to
the I/O unit.

1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .

The Inspect window opens.
– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, the window will not show any data.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 49

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.

– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.
– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list
of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

2. In the Device Name field, type the name of the I/O unit (any unique name, usually the name configured
in PAC Control) or choose it from the drop-down list. (You can also enter the IP address.) Then click
Refresh.

50 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

If the I/O unit has not been defined in PAC Manager, the Add New Device dialog box appears. Choose
Direct Connection to Ethernet Device and enter the IP address of the device. Leave the Ethernet port at
2001 unless you have changed it on the device.
3. Click the Communications button and choose Serial Modules from the pop-up menu.
Information from the I/O unit is displayed in the window.

4. Click the Serial Module Number drop-down list and choose the module’s position number on the rack to
see the module’s communication parameters.
5. To change a parameter, click its value in the Value column and choose from the drop-down list or enter a
new value.
NOTE: This is the only way to change hardware flow control for a SNAP-SCM-232 or 2- or 4-wire mode for a
SNAP-SCM-485-422. You can also change other parameters in this dialog box if necessary. However,
parameters changed in this dialog box are NOT saved to the configuration file.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 51

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

This example shows how to change Hardware Flow Control on a SNAP-SCM-232:

6. When you have finished changing parameters for this module, click Apply.
The configuration changes are sent to the I/O unit.

Configuring Wiegand Modules

(Not applicable to SB brains) Wiegand modules are a type of serial module. Before configuring a Wiegand
module, see the (form 1191) for more information about these modules.
1. With the configuration file open, right-click the name of the I/O unit the Wiegand module is on. From the
pop-up menu, choose Configure. The Configure I/O Units dialog box opens.

Modules
button

52 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

2. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted. Click the Modules button and choose Wiegand Modules
from the pop-up menu.

3. In the Number field, choose the Wiegand module’s position from the drop-down list. Click to put a check
mark in the Used box.
4. If you need to change port numbers, enter the new numbers for each port in the TCP port Number fields.
5. Click the Format/Value cell, and from the drop-down list, choose a standard data format (shown by its
total data length) or choose C for custom.
NOTE: O is the 37-bit Opto 22 format used in a sample PAC Control strategy available for use with Wiegand
modules. For details, see the SNAP Serial Communication Module User’s Guide (form 1191).

6. Change the following fields if necessary to match your Wiegand hardware device:
Data Length—total length of data in the transmission
Site Position—first bit of the site code
Site Length—length of the site code, in bits
Badge Position—first bit of the badge code (should be the next bit after the site code)
Badge Length—length of the badge code, in bits
7. When data for both ports is correct, repeat from step 3 for additional Wiegand modules.
8. When all Wiegand modules are configured, click OK to close the dialog box and return to configuring I/O
units.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 53

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

IMPORTANT: If you changed a TCP port number, you must save the change to flash and restart the I/O unit when you
send the configuration data to the I/O unit (see page 69).

9. When you are ready to send all configuration data to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the
I/O Unit” on page 69.

PAC-R
Configuring Profibus Modules
EB
UIO
1. With the configuration file open, right-click the name of the I/O unit the Profibus module is on. From the
EIO pop-up menu, choose Configure.
The Configure I/O Units dialog box opens.

Modules
button

2. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted. Click the Modules button and choose Profibus Modules
from the pop-up menu.

54 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

3. In the Number field, choose the Profibus module’s position from the drop-down list. Click to put a check
mark in the Used box.
4. If you need to change port numbers, enter the new numbers for each port in the TCP port Number field.
5. Change the Baud Rate and EOM Character List fields if necessary to match your Profibus devices. Choose
whether to have the module automatically send a Test Message when turned on (the default is Yes).
6. When data is correct, repeat from step 3 for additional Profibus modules.
7. When all Profibus modules are configured, click OK to close the dialog box and return to configuring I/O
units.
IMPORTANT: If you have changed a TCP port number, you must save the change to flash and restart the I/O unit
when you send the configuration data to the I/O unit (see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O Unit” on page 69).

Configuring SSI (Serial Synchronous Interface) Modules

Serial synchronous interface (SSI) modules (part number SNAP-SCM-SSI) are a special type of serial module.
Unlike other serial modules, these can be used with SNAP PAC serial brains.
Before configuring an SSI module, see the SNAP SSI (Serial Synchronous Interface) Module User’s Guide (form
1931) for information you will need to configure it.
1. With the configuration file open, right-click the name of the I/O unit the SSI module is on. From the
pop-up menu, choose Configure.
The Configure I/O Units dialog box opens.

Modules
button

PAC Manager User’s Guide 55

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

2. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted. Click the Modules button and choose SSI Modules from the
pop-up menu.

3. In the Number field, choose the SSI module’s position from the drop-down list. Click to put a check mark
in the Used box.
4. Configure all parameters for each port used. See the SNAP SSI (Serial Synchronous Interface) Module User’s
Guide (form 1931) to obtain the data for these fields. For each port, choose Enabled in the Enable
Scanning field.
5. Repeat for additional SSI modules.
6. When all SSI modules are configured, click OK to close the dialog box and return to configuring I/O units.
7. When you are ready to send all configuration data to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the
I/O Unit” on page 69.

Configuring CAN Modules

The SNAP-SCM-CAN2B provides an interface to a Controller Area Network (CAN) that allows your SNAP PAC
system to receive data from CAN devices. Before configuring a CAN module, see the SNAP SSI (Serial
Synchronous Interface) Module User’s Guide (form 1931) for more information about these modules.
Configuration for the SNAP-SCM-CAN2B module is normally done in a PAC Control strategy using the example
subroutine from the CAN RX/TX Integration Kit for PAC Project, part number PAC-INT-CAN-RXTX, a free
download available on our website, www.opto22.com. As described below, you can also use PAC Manager to

56 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

change the IP Port Number, Baud Rate, Data Masks, or Filters for the SNAP-SCM-CAN2B serial module.
However, the settings in your strategy will override the settings in PAC Manager for each module.
1. With the configuration file open, double-click the I/O Units folder.
The Configure I/O Units dialog box opens.

Modules
button

2. Highlight the I/O unit the CAN module is on. Click the Modules button and choose CAN Modules from
the pop-up menu.
Information from the I/O unit is displayed in the window.
3. Click the CAN Module number dropdown list and choose the module’s position number on the rack to
see the module’s communication parameters.

CAN module
number

4. To change a parameter, click its value in the Value column.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 57

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

To change the Baud Rate on a SNAP-SCM-CAN2, choose from the drop-down list

To change the Filter or Data Mask values, see the next section below.
5. When you have finished changing parameters for this module, click OK.
6. Repeat the previous step for additional CAN modules.
7. When all CAN modules are configured, click OK to close the dialog box and return to configuring I/O
units.
8. When you’re finished configuring I/O units, close the dialog box. Choose File > Save to save the
configuration file.
9.

SNAP-SCM-CAN2B Filters and Data Masks

The filters and data masks for each CAN2B module are normally configured in a PAC Control strategy using the
sample subroutines provided in the CAN RX/TX Integration Kit for PAC Project, part number
PAC-INT-CAN-RXTX. You can also use PAC Manager to configure these settings. However, the filter and data
mask settings in your PAC Control strategy will override the settings in PAC Manager for each module.
In PAC Manager the Data Masks and Filters are all set to 0 by default, which means that all CAN packets will be
received. If you want the SNAP-SCM-CAN2B module to provide filtering, then configure the Data Masks and
Filters.
Always start with the highest priority mask and filter, Data Mask 0 and Filter 0. Mask 0 uses Filter 0 and Filter 1,
in that order. Then Data Mask 1 uses Filters 2–5, in that order.

Masks and filters each consist of 32 bits; in PAC Manager these are entered in hex. The mask determines how
broadly or narrowly the filter will be applied, that is, which bits of the CAN ID to pay attention to when
deciding to accept or reject a CAN packet. The following table shows how the mask and filter work together.
Mask Bit Filter Bit CAN ID Bit Accept/Reject
0 X* X* Accept
1 0 0 Accept
1 0 1 Reject
1 1 0 Reject
1 1 1 Accept
* X = Don't Care

The configuration examples below show how to build the masks and filters.

58 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

These examples assume you are using module firmware 2.0b or higher.

Example 1

Suppose many CAN frames are placed on the bus at regular intervals (in no particular order). Some are
standard CAN frames; others are extended CAN frames. You are interested in only one frame, an extended CAN
frame with an Arbitration ID of: 0x14613A2C
This is the only frame you want to capture. How do you configure the Mask and Filter fields to capture it?
Parameter Value Description
A mask with all bits set means the module should consider each bit of the arbitra-
Mask 0 0x1FFFFFFF
tion ID for acceptance. This makes the filter more stringent.
Since this is an extended CAN frame, you want the filter to apply to extended
CAN frames received. So bitwise OR the Arbitration ID with the Extended ID
Filter 0 0x54613A2C
Enable (EXIDE) flag. This flag tells the brain that the filter should apply to
extended CAN frames. The value of this flag is 0x40000000.
Filter 1 0x0 Not used, since you are interested in only one CAN frame.
Mask 1 0x0 Not used
Filters 2 - 5 0x0 Not used

Here are representations of the 32-bit mask and the 32-bit filter for this example:
Mask 0
Bits: 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit values: 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mask in hex: 1 F F F F F F F

Filter 0
For data in an extended frame, set the EXIDE flag, which is bit 30. The Arbitration ID of 0x14613A2C
becomes 0x54613A2C when bit 30 is set:
EXIDE flag
Not used

Not used

Arbitration ID

Bits: 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit values: 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
Filter in hex: 5 4 6 1 3 A 2 C

Example 2

Building on Example 1, suppose now you decide that in addition to the extended CAN frame with Arbitration
ID 0x14613A2C you also want to capture a standard CAN frame with Arbitration ID 0x1EC.
For this second frame you have two options:
• You could put the standard frame at Filter 1 so that both frames are using Mask 0.
• You could use a different mask, Mask 1, and use Filter 2.
In either case you need to map the 11-bit (standard) Arbitration ID to the 32-bit value the module is
expecting. The module expects the 11-bit standard ID to be in bits 28–18 of the 32-bit filter. So, in terms of

PAC Manager User’s Guide 59

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

math: mask the desired 11-bit Arbitration ID with 0x7FF and then left-shift by 18 bits: ((11-bit
Arbitration ID) & 0x7FF)<<18

Using Mask 0. Mask 0 is already considering each bit in the Arbitration ID, and since we only want to look at
these two CAN frames, we could use Filter 1.
Parameter Value Description
A mask with all bits set means the module should consider each bit of the arbitra-
Mask 0 0x1FFFFFFF
tion ID for acceptance. This makes the filter more stringent.
Since this is an extended CAN frame, you want the filter to apply to extended
Filter 0 0x54613A2C
CAN frames received. So bitwise OR the Arbitration ID with the EXIDE flag.
Value of standard Arbitration ID filter after mapping it to its 32-bit value. Do not
set the EXIDE flag. In this case the lower 18 bits (the extended arbitration bits)
Filter 1 0x07B00000
are excluded from the acceptance check, even though the mask would indicate
otherwise, since this is a standard CAN frame filter.
Mask 1 0x0 Not used
Filters 2 - 5 0x0 Not used

Using Mask 1. If Mask 0 were less stringent (fewer set bits) so it would not cause acceptance of just the
0x1EC Arbitration ID, then you could use the Mask 1 and Filter 2.
Parameter Value Description
A Mask with much less stringent acceptance criteria. The set mask bits are used
Mask 0 0x1C63FFFF
in the comparison with the filter, while the cleared bits are “Don't Care.”
Since this is an extended CAN frame, we want the filter to apply to extended
CAN frames received. So bitwise OR the Arbitration value with the EXIDE flag.
Filter 0 0x54613A2C (Depending on the Arbitration IDs of other CAN frames on the bus, other
extended CAN frames will also be accepted, for example 0x15613A2C,
0x16613A2C, 0x17613A2C, 0x14713A2C, and so on.)
Filter 1 0x0 Not used
A mask stringent on the standard arbitration bits but allowing all the extended
Mask 1 0x1FFC0000
arbitration bits.
Value of standard Arbitration ID filter after mapping it to its 32-bit value. Do not
Filter 2 0x07B00000
set the EXIDE flag. This filter captures only the 0x1EC standard CAN frame.
Filter 3 - 5 0x0 Not used

Configuring HART Modules

HART® SNAP I/O are a special type of serial module that provides communication with other Highway
Addressable Remote Transducer (HART) current loop devices. For more information, see the HART SNAP I/O
Modules Data Sheet (form 2080).
1. With the configuration file open, right-click the name of the I/O unit the HART module is on. From the
pop-up menu, choose Configure.

60 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

The Configure I/O Units dialog box opens.

Modules
button

2. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted. Click the Modules button and choose HART Modules from
the pop-up menu.

3. In the Number field, choose the HART module’s position from the drop-down list. Click to put a check
mark in the Used box.
4. Configure all parameters for each port used.
– Port Number: If you need to change port numbers, enter a new number for each port in the Port
Number field.
– Primary Master: 0 = Secondary Master, 1 = Primary Master
A master is a device that is in control of the HART Bus. Either master (Primary or Secondary) can
initiate a transaction with a slave field device attached to the bus.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 61

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES AND POINTS

If you want a permanent master connected to the HART bus, use Primary Master = 1. This allows you
to temporarily attach another master device to configure a device or troubleshoot the HART bus.
– Retry Limit: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5
If the module does not receive a valid message from the slave device it is talking to, it will
automatically send up to the configured number of retries until it gets a valid response. If it does get
a valid response after the maximum number of retries, it will report back that an error occurred.
– Burst Message: 0 = Don't report burst messages, 1 = Report burst messages
A burst message occurs in a special mode where one slave device on the HART Bus is periodically
sending data without a request generated by a master device. Burst messages can be retrieved
using the Receive HART Burst Response command in your PAC Control strategy. For more
information, see the Analog group of commands in the PAC Control Command Reference (form
1701).
– Promiscuous Mode: 0 = Don't report other master requests/responses, 1 = Report other master
requests/responses.
When enabled (1), the module reports transactions initiated by the other master on the bus,
including requests generated by the other master and responses to those requests by the addressed
slave. You can retrieve Promiscuous Mode messages using the Receive HART Burst Response
command in your PAC Control strategy. For more information, see the Analog group of commands
in the PAC Control Command Reference (form 1701).
– Preambles Count: 5 to 20
Preamble characters are sent with every message to indicate that data is about to be transmitted.
The default of 5 should work in most situations. However, you might need to increase the number if
the slave device requires more preamble characters, which is generally true of older HART devices
and can be determined using HART command 0.
5. Repeat the previous step for additional HART modules.
6. When all HART modules are configured, click OK to close the dialog box and return to configuring I/O
units.
7. When you are ready to send all configuration data to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the
I/O Unit” on page 69.

Moving a Configured I/O Point

You can move a configured I/O point to an empty position on the same I/O unit or on a different I/O unit.
1. In the Configure I/O Unit dialog box, highlight the unit the point is on and click I/O Points.
The Configure I/O Points dialog box opens.
2. If necessary, expand the modules by clicking Expand All.

62 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

3. Highlight the point you want to move and click Move To.

4. In the Points area of the Move Point To dialog box, highlight the location you are moving the point to.
Then click OK.
You return to the Configure I/O Points dialog box, and the point has been moved.

COPYING AND PASTING I/O UNITS

You can copy configured I/O units and paste them into the same configuration file or into another
configuration file.
1. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit. On the submenu, click Copy.
2. Choose one of the following:
– To paste the I/O unit into the same
configuration file, right-click the I/O
Units folder and click Paste on the
submenu. The I/O unit is pasted. As
shown in the graphic at right, the
names of the pasted I/O unit and Original unit
points are the same as the originals, and points
except with an underscore and a
number added.
– To paste the I/O unit into a different
configuration file, close the first file,
Pasted unit
and then open the file into which you and points
want to paste the I/O unit. Right-click
the I/O Units folder in the configuration
tree. On the submenu, click Paste. The
I/O unit is pasted. To see it in the
configuration tree, you can click the plus sign to expand the folder.
3. To change the name or configuration of the pasted I/O unit, double-click it. Make the changes in the Edit
I/O Unit dialog box and then click OK.
4. To change the name or configuration of a point on the pasted unit, double-click the point’s name. Make
changes in the dialog box and then click OK.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 63

CONFIGURING PID LOOPS

CONFIGURING PID LOOPS

What is a PID?
PID loops (or simply PIDs) are used to drive an input (process variable) toward a particular value (the setpoint)
and keep the input very close to that value by controlling an output. For example, consider temperature
control, where the input is a measurement of ambient temperature, the setpoint is the desired temperature,
and the output is a heater. A PID will use a mathematical formula (algorithm) that controls the output to
maintain a desired temperature, efficiently adjust to changes in setpoint, and compensate for changes in load,
such as the influx of cold air. In this example, a temperature sensor (analog input), a thermostat (analog input),
and a heater control (analog output) are components of one system, controlled by a PID loop.
This guide assumes that you are already familiar with using PIDs. PID calculations are complex and the physical
qualities of systems suitable for PID control differ greatly. This guide includes only basic information for
configuring PIDs on SNAP PAC I/O units.
SNAP PAC R-series I/O units support 96 PID loops per I/O unit; SNAP PAC EB and SB I/O units support 32 PID
loops per I/O unit. These PIDs can control isolated systems or be part of cascaded systems where one loop
controls the setpoints or input variables of others.
NOTE: On SNAP PAC R-series, PID loops run on the I/O side, independent of any PAC Control strategy. Once it starts
running, a PID continues running until the I/O unit loses power or the PID is set to Manual. If you subsequently
download a different strategy to the control engine, you’ll receive an error message (-700) reminding you that a PID
loop is still running and that it may conflict with the new strategy. To turn off the PID loop, use Inspect mode in PAC
Manager to change the PID’s algorithm to None.

Each PID must be configured with essential parameters and then individually tuned for efficiency. You can
configure PIDs through either PAC Manager or PAC Control. For tuning PIDs, it’s easier to use the graphic
tuning tools in PAC Control. (For details, see the PAC Control User’s Guide, form 1700.)
If you are not using PAC Control, it is possible to configure and tune PIDs through the I/O unit’s memory map.
The memory map is in the OptoMMP Protocol Guide (form 1465).
For additional help with PIDs, see the OptoTutorial: SNAP PAC PID (form 1641).

Algorithm Choices
When you configure a PID loop, choose one of these algorithms2:
• Velocity (Type C)
• ISA
• Parallel
• Interacting
Velocity (Type C) is typically used to perform velocity control. The ISA, Parallel, and Interacting algorithms are
derived from the article “A Comparison of PID Control Algorithms” by John P. Gerry in Control Engineering

2 The following obsolete algorithms support PID loops configured before PAC Project R9.5. For details, see the Opto 22

KnowledgeBase article KB82058

• Velocity (Type B) Obsolete
• ISA (Obsolete)
• Parallel (Obsolete)
• Interacting (Obsolete)
Do not use these obsolete algorithms with groov RIO. For other devices, you can continue to use them, but Opto 22
recommends you use the new algorithms when configuring new PID loops.

64 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

(March 1987). These three equations are the same except for the tuning coefficients; converting from one
equation to another is merely a matter of converting the tuning coefficients.
Key to Terms Used in Equations
Derivative tuning parameter. In units
Process variable; the input to the
PV TuneD of seconds. Increasing magnitude
PID
increases influence on output.
SP Setpoint Output Output from the PID
InLo, The Error (PV – SP) from the previ-
Range of the input Err_1
InHi ous scan
Integrator. Anti-windup is applied
OutLo,
Range of the output Integral after the output is determined to be
OutHi within bounds.
Proportional tuning parameter. PV from the previous scan and the
Gain PV1, PV2
Unitless. May be negative. scan before that.
Integral tuning parameter. In units
Actual scan time (time since previ-
TuneI of seconds. Increasing magnitude ScanTime
ous scan)
increases influence on output.

Equations Common to All Algorithms

Err = PV - SP
Span = (OutHi - OutLo) / (InHi - InLo)
Output = Output + FeedForward * TuneFF

Equations Common to ISA, Parallel, and Interacting

Integral = Integral + Err
TermP = Err
TermI = TuneI * ScanTime * Integral
TermD = (TuneD / ScanTime) * ( PV - PV1 )

Velocity (Type C) Algorithm

TermP = ( PV - PV1 )
In this part of the formula, you adjust TuneI.
TermI = TuneI * ScanTime * Err
In this part of the formula, you adjust TuneD.
TermD = TuneD / ScanTime * ( PV - 2 * PV1 + PV2 )
In this part of the formula, you adjust Gain.
Output = Span * Gain * ( TermP + TermI + TermD )
ISA (or “Ideal”) Algorithm
Output = Span * Gain * ( TermP + TermI + TermD )

Parallel (or “Independent”) Algorithm

Output = Span * ( Gain * TermP + TermI + TermD )

Interacting (or “Classic”) Algorithm

Output = Span * Gain * ( TermP + TermI ) * ( 1 + TermD )
NOTE: In SNAP PAC PIDs, the derivative is applied only to the process variable (the input) and not to the setpoint. This
means you can change the setpoint without causing spikes in the derivative term. These PIDs also prevent integral
windup by back calculating the integral without the derivative term. The feed forward term (“bias”) is added before
output clamping and has a tuning factor.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 65

CONFIGURING PID LOOPS

Steps for Configuring PIDs

1. With the configuration file open, right-click the name of the I/O unit the PID will be on. From the pop-up
menu, choose Configure.
The Configure I/O Units dialog box opens.

PID Loops
button

2. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted. Click the PID Loops button.

3. Double-click the lowest unused PID number.

66 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

A
B

C D
E
F

G
H
I

N
K
O
L
M P

4. Complete the fields as follows:

A—Name. Type a unique, descriptive name for the PID.

B—Description. (Optional) Enter a description of the PID.

C—Input. Select the type of input: I/O Point, Host, or PID Output.
– If the PID’s process variable comes from an I/O point on the same unit, select I/O Point. Choose the
point from the drop-down list or type a point name to configure a new point.
– If the PID’s process variable comes from a PAC Control strategy, select Host. Enter an initial value for
the input.
– If the PID’s process variable is the output of another PID on this I/O unit (a cascading control loop),
select PID Output. Choose the PID from the drop-down list.

D—Square Root. (Optional) If you chose I/O Point or PID for step C, check this box if the error should be
calculated based on the square root of the process variable (applies to flow control systems where volumetric
flow is proportional to the square root of a signal from a flow transducer).

E—Low/High Range. Set the valid range of the process variable by entering the low range and the high
range. (See J for optional responses to out-of-range input.)

F—Setpoint. Choose the source for the setpoint: I/O Point, Host, or PID Output.
– To control the setpoint using a device such as a potentiometer, select I/O Point; choose an I/O point
from the drop-down list or type a new point name.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 67

CONFIGURING PID LOOPS

– To control the setpoint using PAC Control or PAC Display, select Host and enter an initial value.
– If another PID loop will control the setpoint, select PID Output and choose the PID from the
drop-down list.

G—Output. Choose the destination for the PID output: I/O Point or Host. (To use the output for controlling
the setpoint or input of another PID, choose Host.)

H—Lower/Upper Clamp. Enter upper and lower clamp values to prevent the output from exceeding a
desirable range. These values should equal the range of the output point, if used. Or choose values to make
sure that the output device doesn’t shut off (for example, keeping a circulation pump running regardless of
the PID output) or that the output never reaches a destructively high setting (for example, keeping a motor
below maximum).

I—Min/Max Range. (Optional) Enter minimum and maximum change values. The output won’t respond
until the minimum change is reached (for example, you may not want a heater to turn on to correct a 1
degree error). Maximum change prevents too drastic a change in output (for example, you could limit the
increase in a pump’s output to prevent pipe breakage). The default for both minimum and maximum is zero,
which disables the feature.

J—Output Options. Choose how the PID should respond if the input goes out of range. If no boxes are
checked, the PID will freeze output at the current value. To have PAC Control logic or an operator respond,
check Switch to manual mode. To force the output to a specific value, check Force output and type the output
values. NOTE: If both boxes are checked (forced output and manual mode), the output will be forced and the PID put
into manual mode; but if the PID is already in manual mode, the output will not be forced.

K—Algorithm. Choose algorithm: Velocity-Type C, ISA, Parallel, or Interacting. See page 64 for more
information.

L—Mode. Choose Mode. Auto activates the PID. Manual requires that PAC Control logic or an operator
control the PID output.

M—Scan Rate. Enter a scan rate to determine how often the input is scanned and the controller output is
calculated. Minimum value is 0.001 (1 millisecond). Scan time should be greater than system lag (the time it
takes for the controller output to have a measurable effect on the system). Also consider other PIDs and tasks
on the I/O unit competing for processing power.

N—Gain. Enter a positive or negative value for Gain. Heating systems usually require a negative value and
cooling systems a positive value. NOTE: Gain is usually refined during the tuning process.

O—Fd Fwd Initial and Fd Fwd Gain. (Optional) Enter Feed Forward Initial and Feed Forward Gain values
if you need to offset the controller output in your application. These values are constants that are multiplied
and added to the controller output; often they are not used in PIDs.

P—Tune I, Tune D. (Optional) Enter Integral and Derivative settings if you know the desirable settings.
However, Integral and Derivative are not essential to basic configuration and are better determined in the
tuning process.
5. Click OK.

68 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

The new PID appears in the list.

6. When you have finished configuring PIDs, click Close.

PIDs appear in the configuration tree under the I/O unit.

PID loops

SENDING CONFIGURATION DATA TO THE I/O UNIT

After you have configured I/O units and set up optional functions such as security, email, and SNMP from
Chapter 3, you must load the configuration file onto the I/O unit.
You can load the configuration file into RAM only, or you can save it to flash memory at the same time. If you
don’t save to flash, the configuration is lost if the I/O unit is turned off. When you save to flash, the new
configuration overwrites any configuration already in the flash memory. Note that for some functions, you
must save to flash and restart the I/O unit for the configuration to take effect.
1. With the configuration file open, click ToolsSend Configuration to I/O Unit.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 69

SENDING CONFIGURATION DATA TO THE I/O UNIT

The Send Configuration dialog box appears.

The list on the left shows all the I/O units in this configuration file. (In the case of an SB I/O unit, there is
only one.) When you click a unit, the Address List shows the serial address or IP addresses for all I/O units
associated with the highlighted unit. This is the address list you set up in the Add I/O Unit dialog box,
shown on page 33.
2. Highlight the I/O unit configuration(s) you want to send.
3. Highlight the IP addresses to receive the I/O unit configuration.
If you don’t highlight any addresses, the configuration will be sent to the entire list.
NOTE: If you highlighted more than one unit configuration, each unit configuration will automatically be sent
to all the IP addresses associated with it.

4. If necessary, change the Timeout field.

The timeout field shows how long, in milliseconds, PAC Manager will try to communicate with the I/O
unit before returning a timeout error.
5. To save the configuration file to flash memory as well as to RAM, check Save to Flash. (If you don’t save to
flash, the configuration is lost if the I/O unit is turned off.) To also restart the unit, check Restart Device.
IMPORTANT: For the following configurations, you must save to flash and restart the unit in order for
configuration to take effect:

Changes in TCP port for serial modules SNMP configuration

Email configuration PPP configuration

Data logging interval

6. Click Send.
The configuration data is sent to the I/O units whose IP addresses you chose.

Using PAC Manager to Clear Flash Memory

You can also use PAC Manager to clear configuration data from flash memory in one or more I/O units. (This
action does not affect brain or controller firmware, strategy files, or files from the I/O unit’s file system that may
be stored to flash.)
1. With the configuration file open, click ToolsSend Configuration to I/O Unit.

70 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

2. In the Send Configuration dialog box, highlight the I/O unit configuration and addresses for the I/O units
you want to clear.
3. Click Clear Flash.
Configuration data in flash memory is cleared.

USING I/O POINT FEATURES

The I/O point features available on I/O units depend on the combined capabilities of the I/O processor (brain
or on-the-rack controller), the module, and in some cases, the protocol used. See page 9 to determine which
features are available for the processor you are using. Note that some features (such as pulsing and totalizing)
can be configured in PAC Manager but are currently available for use only through PAC Control. For details, see
the PAC Control User’s Guide (form 1700).
The following table defines the features. Some have referenced pages for more information.
Feature Description See
(digital input and output)—A digital point is either on or off. You can read the
States page 73
current state of a digital input or write an on/off state to a digital output.
(digital input)—When the value of a digital input point changes from off to on, an
on-latch is automatically set. While the value of the point may return to off, the
Latches on-latch remains set, as a record of the change, until you clear it. Similarly, an page 73
off-latch is set when the value of a digital point changes from on to off, and it
remains set until cleared.
(digital input)—A counter keeps track of the number of times a digital input
changes from off to on. The count accumulates until it reaches the maximum
count available in the I/O unit or until you reset the counter to zero. For example,
to count the number of widgets produced per shift, you would clear the counter
Counters page 73
at the start of each shift and read it at the end of each shift.
For points on a 4-channel module, the speed of the counter depends upon the
brain or controller’s capabilities and the speed of the module used. For points
on a high-density module, counting is done in the module.
(digital input)—A quadrature counter requires a SNAP quadrature input module,
Quadrature which is attached to the encoder device. The module sends a pulse to the I/O
page 73
counters unit upon each change in quadrature state, and the I/O unit counts the pulses
and keeps track of the direction and rotation.
(digital input)—Frequency is the speed with which a digital point changes state
Frequency
and is usually measured in counts per second. For example, reading the fre- *
measurement
quency can help you determine the speed of rotating machinery.
(digital input)—Period refers to the elapsed time for a complete on-off-on transi-
Period
tion on a digital point. Measurement starts on the first transition (either off-to-on *
measurement
or on-to-off) and stops on the next transition of the same type.
Time-propor- (digital output)—Time-proportional output varies the duty cycle and the percent-
tional output age of on time within that cycle. TPO is often combined with a PID loop and *
(TPO) used to control the output, for example in a heater or oven.
Pulse (digital input)—A pulse is a brief on (or off) state, usually repeated at a specific
duration interval. The brain can measure the first pulse, that is, the amount of time the N/A
measurement input stays on (or stays off).
Pulse and (digital output)—A pulse turns a digital output on (or off) briefly, either once or for
square wave a specified number of times at a specified interval. A digital square wave is a *
generation specific pattern of on and off states, repeated continuously.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 71

USING I/O POINT FEATURES

Feature Description See

(digital and analog input)—For a digital input, a totalizer accumulates the total
amount of time that a digital input is on (or off). The on-time totalizer shows how
long the point has been on; the off-time totalizer shows how long the point has
Totalization been off. Totalizers are often used to determine maintenance or use schedules. *
For an analog input, a totalizer accumulates readings by sampling the input
point at set intervals and storing the total value, for example to determine total
flow based on a varying flow rate signal.
(digital and analog points)—A watchdog monitors communication on the
OptoMMP port (port 2001, unless you have changed it). If nothing accesses the
port for the length of time set in the watchdog, the I/O unit automatically sets
designated digital and analog I/O points to the values you have determined.
A watchdog helps make sure that a communication failure doesn’t result in
disaster. If communication fails between the host and the I/O unit controlling a
Watchdog page 74
process, the watchdog makes sure the process is automatically brought to a
safe state. For example, a valve could automatically close to avoid completely
emptying a tank.
IMPORTANT: A strategy running on a SNAP PAC R-series controller accesses
the points on its own rack directly, not through the OptoMMP port. Conse-
quently, reads and writes to the local I/O are not seen by the watchdog.
(analog input and output)—Analog input and output points can be scaled as
Scaling needed. For example, you can scale a -5 V to +5 V input point to reflect 0% to page 74
100%
(analog input)—Minimum and maximum values are sometimes called peaks
Minimum and and valleys. You can read these values at any time, for example, to record min-
maximum imum and maximum temperatures. You can also reset min/max values. For page 75
values example, if you want to record the maximum temperature at point 2 in each
24-hour period, you must reset the values after they are read each day.
(analog input)—The I/O unit automatically converts the thermocouple junction's
Thermocouple millivolt values into temperature values, so you don’t have to. Choose the
--
linearization appropriate module and make sure you configure the point as the correct ther-
mocouple type (E, K, etc.) for your purpose.
(analog input)—Offset and gain calculations are used to calibrate analog points.
If a -50 mV to +50 mV input receives signals that are slightly off (for example,
Offset and gain page 75
not exactly -50 mV at the lowest point), the offset and gain can be
calculated so that values will appear accurately when read.
(analog output)—Clamping limits values that can be sent to analog output points
so they do not go above or below a specific value. For example, if you are using
Clamping a 0–10 VDC output module, but the device attached to one of its points can han- page 75
dle a maximum of only 5 VDC, you can set an upper clamp of 5 VDC for that
point. The values for upper and lower clamp are set in engineering units.
(analog output)—Some devices attached to analog outputs should not be
abruptly stepped up or down, because a sudden change might damage the
Ramping *
equipment or cause other problems. Instead, you can gradually ramp the device
up or down to the desired value.
(analog points)—Proportional integral derivative (PID) loops are used to drive
PID loop an input toward a particular value (the setpoint) and keep the input very close to
page 64
control that value by controlling an output. PID loops are often used in temperature con-
trol.
Average filter (analog inputs)—A filter weight smooths analog input signals that are erratic or
page 75
weight change suddenly.
* Requires PAC Control and a SNAP PAC controller for use. For details, see the PAC Control User’s Guide
(form 1700).

Some I/O point features are discussed in the following sections.

72 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

States (Digital Points)

You can read the ON or OFF state of a digital input point or write to a digital output point to turn it on or off.
This feature is automatic and needs no configuration.

Latches (Digital Points)

Latching is available on both 4-channel and high-density digital points. It is automatic and needs no
configuration. Using memory map values, you can read the on-latch or off-latch state of a digital point, and
you can clear latches.

Counters (Digital Points)

Any SNAP digital input can be used as a counter. Note the differences in counting between 4-channel and
high-density digital modules:
SNAP 4-channel digital counters SNAP high-density digital counters
SNAP-PAC-R1 (-B, -FM1, -W1)
1, SNAP-PAC-R22 (-FM1, -W1)
SNAP-PAC-R1 (-B, -FM -W1)
SNAP-PAC-EB11 (-FM1, -W1)
Processor compatibility SNAP-PAC-EB11 (-FM1, -W1)
SNAP-PAC-EB21,2 (-FM1, -W1)
SNAP-PAC-SB11111
SNAP-PAC-SB11
SNAP-PAC-SB21,211111
Counting is done on... ...the brain ...the module
High speed (depends on speed of mod-
Counting speed Low speed (up to 50 Hz)
ule; modules available up to 20 KHz)
• Each point to be used as a counter • Configure points only if using PAC
must be configured. Control.
• Counters start as soon as configured. • Counters are always counting.
Configuration and Use • Counters can be Started, Stopped, • Counters can be Read or Read &
Read, and Read & Cleared. Cleared.
• Counters cannot be Started or
Stopped.

G4EB2—Any digital input can be used as a counter. Counters must be configured. They start as soon as they
are configured and can be Started, Stopped, Read, and Read & Cleared.
Use PAC Control digital point commands to work with counters.

Quadrature Counters (Digital Inputs)

I/O units with the following I/O processors support quadrature counters for quadrature encoder devices:
• SNAP-PAC-R1
• SNAP-PAC-R1-B
• SNAP-PAC-EB1 (obsolete)
• SNAP-PAC-SB1 (obsolete)
(obsolete)(obsolete) (obsolete)A quadrature counter requires a SNAP quadrature input module (SNAP-IDC5Q),
which is attached to the encoder device. The module sends a pulse to the processor upon each change in
quadrature state, and the processor counts the pulses and keeps track of the direction and rotation. For each
axis, the counter counts up if Phase A leads Phase B; it counts down if Phase A lags behind Phase B. Each axis
can have counts from 0 to 2,147,483,647.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 73

USING I/O POINT FEATURES

If your encoder device has an index feature, you can use two separate digital input points as indexes, one for
each axis. The index automatically resets the count, and it shows what the count was when the index was
triggered. Counts are sometimes lost, due to noise or encoder problems, for example; with the index, you can
see whether the count varies too much.

Watchdog (Digital and Analog Points)

To configure a watchdog, set the watchdog when configuring the I/O unit. Then when you configure a digital
or analog output point, you can choose the status or value the point should be set to if the watchdog timer
expires.
About E1 and E2 brain boards: You can configure E1s and E2s like any other I/O unit if you have E1/E2 firmware R1.2a
(and higher) and PAC Project 9.5000 (and higher). Also, if a SNAP PAC controller communicates with the E1 or E2, the
controller must have PAC firmware R9.5a (or higher) to use this simplified configuration method. If you are not using
these firmware and software versions (or if you prefer to use the previous method to reconfigure existing E1s or E2s),
see I/O Configuration for E1 an E2 Brain Boards (form 1576).

Scaling (Analog Points)

You can scale analog input or output points to match your needs. For example, you can scale a
-5 V to +5 V input point to reflect 0% to 100%. Point types may be unipolar or bipolar.

Examples of Unipolar Points Examples of Bipolar Points

4–20 mA analog output -25 mV to +25 mV analog input
0–10 A RMS analog input -10 to +10 VDC analog output

Unipolar and bipolar points are scaled in the same way, with the lowest reading reflecting the low scale and
the highest reading reflecting the high scale. Here are two examples:

Unipolar Input Point Bipolar Input Point

Low scale High scale Low scale High scale

Actual reading 0 mA 20 mA -5 V 0V +5 V

Scaled for percentage 0% 100% 0% 50% 100%

Scaled for counts* 0 +25,000 -25,000 0 +25,000

*Counts for input points always range -25,000 to +25,000.

Unipolar Output Point Bipolar Output Point

Low scale High scale Low scale High scale

Actual reading 4 mA 20 mA -10 VDC 0 VDC +10 VDC

Scaled for percentage 0% 100% 0% 50% 100%

Scaled for counts* 0 4,095 0 2,047.5 4,095

*Counts for output points always range 0–4,095.

74 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 2: CONFIGURING DEVICES

NOTE: With PAC firmware version 8.1 and higher, you can also use inverted scaling. For example:

0 mA 20 mA
742 fpm -27 fpm

Minimum and Maximum Values (Analog Points)

Starting with the introduction of SNAP-B3000-ENET, all SNAP PAC brains (including SBs), SNAP Ethernet I/O
units, and E2 brain boards automatically keep track of minimum and maximum values on analog points. You
can read and clear these values using PAC Manager’s Inspect mode.

Offset and Gain (Analog Points)

Starting with the introduction of SNAP-B3000-ENET, all SNAP PAC brains (including SBs), SNAP Ethernet I/O units,
and E2 brain boards can automatically calculate offset and gain for analog input points. If a -50 mV to +50 mV
input receives signals that are slightly off (for example, not exactly -50 mV at the lowest point), the offset and gain
can be calculated so that values appear accurately when read.
Offset and gain values affect engineering units (EU). For a temperature input, engineering units are in degrees
C or F, depending on how the I/O unit is configured.
IMPORTANT: To calibrate the point, the I/O unit must be turned on and attached to the network, and you must
have access to the I/O unit in order to use the calibrator. For points on a SNAP PAC SB-series brain, connect directly via
serial or through the controller via Ethernet. (See page 27 for details.)

Save the configuration to flash so that it is not lost when power is turned off. Since each calibration is for a specific
point on a specific I/O unit, the result cannot be saved to the configuration file and cannot be sent to any other I/O
unit.

First, calculate offset, and then calculate gain. The offset must be calculated at the signal corresponding to
zero engineering units (EU), and the gain must be calculated at the signal corresponding to the point’s
maximum input range value (or, for inverted scaling, the point’s minimum input range value—in inverted
scaling, the lower scaled value is greater than the upper scaled value).
For details, see “Calibrating Offset and Gain Using the Default Method” on page 174.
If you don't have access to a calibrator, or if the point uses inverted scaling and your device has PAC firmware
R9.5b or lower, see “Calculating Offset and Gain Using the Two-Point Method” on page 176.
If you are using Modbus/TCP, you will need to calculate the offset and gain yourself. Then you can write offset
and gain values to the I/O unit. For details, see page 45Calibrating Offset and Gain.

Clamping (Analog Points)

SNAP I/O units with analog capability and SNAP PAC SB brains can clamp values sent to analog output points
so they do not go above or below a specific limit. For example, if you are using a 0–10 VDC output module,
but the device attached to one of its points can handle a maximum of only 5 VDC, you can set an upper clamp
of 5 VDC for that point. The values for upper and lower clamp are set in engineering units. (See “Configuring
I/O Modules, Points, and Features” on page 157.)

Average Filter Weight (Analog Points)

SNAP PAC I/O units and SNAP PAC SB brains can use a filter weight to smooth analog input signals that are
erratic or change suddenly. The formula used for filtering is Y = ( X - Y )/W + Y, where Y is the filtered value, X is
the new unfiltered value, and W is the filter weight.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 75

USING I/O POINT FEATURES

This graph shows the effect of filter weights (W) 2, 5, and 10 on a step input signal:

Y = (X-Y)/W + Y
Filter Response for Different values of 'W'

4 As this graph shows, the

larger the filter weight (W)
3
you use, the smoother the
analog signal.
2

1
Input
2
0
5
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41
10
-1

-2

-3

-4

A filter weight of zero turns off the calculation. Values less than or equal to 0.5 are changed to zero, since those
values would cause an unstable signal.
Filtering is applied to values that are in engineering units, including minimum and maximum values. Filtering
does not apply to values that are in counts. Set filter weight when configuring the analog point. Use the PAC
Manager Inspect window to set filter weight (see “Configuring I/O Modules, Points, and Features” on
page 157). If you are using PAC Control, you can also set filter weight in your control strategy using the
command Set Analog Filter Weight.

76 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 3: Configuring Optional
Functions

INTRODUCTION
Chapter 2 showed you how to configure I/O unit points and features. This chapter includes instructions for
setting up the following optional functions:

Setting up network security (wired network) page 78

Logging data page 87

Sending event messages via email, SNMP, a stream packet, or a serial module page 92

Using SNMP for communicating with enterprise management systems page 96

Configuring DNS Servers page 99

Sending email page 100

Using the Scratch Pad area for peer-to-peer data sharing page 102

Streaming data page 104

Mirroring I/O point data page 107

Copying memory map data page 109

Configuring Modbus options page 112

Setting system date and time page 116

Communicating serially with devices attached directly to a controller page 118

Using PPP for communicating via modem with the device page 123

In most cases, you use the same configuration file in PAC Manager to set up optional functions as you did to
configure I/O units, so the complete configuration information can be uploaded to I/O units all at once.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 77

77
SETTING UP NETWORK SECURITY (WIRED NETWORK)

SETTING UP NETWORK SECURITY (WIRED NETWORK)

For network security on a wireless LAN, see “Configuring Wireless LAN Communication (Wired+Wireless
Models Only)” on page 23.
You can use PAC Manager to set up security on a wired network for an Opto 22 SNAP PAC Ethernet-based
device. You can limit access to specific computers or other devices on the network. You can also limit access to
specific protocols used with the Opto 22 device, such as SNMP (below). You can require a password for using
FTP (see page 79). In addition, you can protect a PAC Control strategy so that it runs without possibility of
interference from a host (page 81).

Limiting Access to Specific Computers

You can limit access to the controller or I/O unit based on the IP address of the computer or other host device
attempting to communicate with it. You specify the IP addresses that may access the controller or I/O unit.
Anyone on a computer or other host device with an acceptable IP address has access.
Work with your network administrator to make sure you are specifying the correct IP addresses. See
“Configuring Ethernet Security on an I/O Unit” on page 82 or “Configuring Ethernet Security on a Standalone
Controller” on page 85 for instructions.

Limiting Access to Specific Protocols

You can also limit access to specific protocols the controller or I/O unit uses. These protocols can travel
simultaneously over the Ethernet/TCP/IP link and set up sessions, or ports, on the device:
• File transfer protocol (FTP), used for exchanging files between the device and a computer (applies to
SNAP PAC R-series, S-series, and SoftPAC only)
• Modbus/TCP protocol, used by Modbus/TCP software and hardware
• OptoMMP, the IEEE 1394-based memory map protocol, used by most other tools for interfacing with the
SNAP device
• Simple network management protocol (SNMP), used to communicate with SNMP-based enterprise
management software
For security purposes, you can hide or disable one or more of the protocols by changing the port number
from its default. The following table shows these default ports.
NOTE: If you change any port number, you must restart the device before the changes will take effect.

Protocols for Default Ports:

Protocol Used by Default Port
FTP PCs for file exchange 21
SNMP enterprise management system 161
Modbus/TCP Modbus/TCP software and hardware 502
OptoMMP PAC Manager and most other tools 2001

Preventing Access. For example, suppose you want to prevent any device from accessing a controller using
FTP. To do so, you would change the port number for the FTP protocol from the default of 21 to zero. Since
zero is an invalid port, no device could access the controller using FTP.
Limiting Access. If you wanted to limit FTP access, you could change the port number from 21 to a
non-reserved number between 1 and 65,535 (see list of reserved port numbers, below). If you change the
number, anyone (or any application) that needs to access the controller using FTP can do so by adding the
changed port number to the controller’s IP address. For example, if the controller’s IP address is 10.22.56.3 and

78 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

the port number is changed to 85, you would enter the following to access the controller:
10.22.56.3:85

Reserved Port Numbers

If you change port numbers, do not use any number in the following list. These numbers are reserved for
Opto 22 firmware:
Port Used by Port Used by
20 FTP 2222 EtherNet/IP (UDP for I/O)
21 FTP 22000 Reserved
25 SMTP 22001 PAC Control/ioControl Host
67 BootP Server 22002 PAC Control Background Downloading
68 BootP Client 22003 Reserved
161 SNMP 22004 PAC Control User Chart
162 SNMP Traps 22005 PAC Control User Chart
502 Modbus/TCP 22500–22531 Serial Communication Modules
2001 OptoMMP Host 23567 PAC Controller Redundancy
2002 OptoControl Peer 44818 EtherNet/IP (TCP & UDP Explicit messages)
2003 OptoControl Peer 50000–50999 PAC controller internal use

For more information, see “Configuring Ethernet Security on an I/O Unit” on page 82 or “Configuring Ethernet
Security on a Standalone Controller” on page 85.

Configuring the PAC as an HTTP/HTTPS Server

In addition to working as a client (for example, to send email) SNAP PAC R-series or S-series controllers with
PAC firmware R9.5a or higher include a built-in HTTP/HTTPS server and a REST API. The PAC listens for HTTP
and HTTPS requests, and then sends I/O point or strategy variable data to the client that requested it. The
complete SNAP PAC REST API and instructions to get started are on developer.opto22.com.
To prevent unauthorized access, the HTTP/HTTPS server feature in PAC R-series or S-series controllers is
disabled by default. To configure the server in your controller, you enable either HTTPS or HTTP protocol on
the controller and configure a listening port for TCP communication.
IMPORTANT: Opto 22 strongly recommends using HTTPS for secure, encrypted access to your controller.

Use HTTP for testing purposes only.

1. In PAC Manager, click Tools > Inspect, or click the Inspect button .
2. In the Inspect Opto 22 Device window, enter the IP address for the R- or S-series controller you want to
configure, or select it from the list.
3. Click the Communications button, and then choose Network Security from the pop-up menu.
4. In the WEB SERVER section:
a. Change the default value of TCP Listen Port (address 0xFFFF F03A 0014).
Typically, port 443 is used for HTTPS, and port 80 is used for HTTP.
b. Verify the value of HTTPS (address 0xFFFF F03A 007C).
– For HTTPS, the value should be Enabled.
– For HTTP, change the value to Disabled.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 79

SETTING UP NETWORK SECURITY (WIRED NETWORK)

c. Click Apply to save the changes.

5. To immediately enable the HTTP/HTTPS server feature, reboot the controller so that the changes take
effect.

Send Command

Once you’ve configured the PAC as a server, the next step is to use a browser (for example, Google Chrome™ or
Microsoft Internet Explorer®) to access the PAC and set up the administrator password and API accounts. After
that, authorized users can use the SNAP PAC REST API to access data in the controller. For details, see
developer.opto22.com.

Requiring a Password for FTP

You can configure security so that anyone who wants to access the device using FTP is required to enter a
username and password. If you are using the Opto iPAC app for iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad, we strongly
recommend you require a password.
See “Configuring Ethernet Security on an I/O Unit” on page 82 or “Configuring Ethernet Security on a
Standalone Controller” on page 85 for instructions.

80 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Protecting a PAC Control Strategy from Interference

You can set up a standalone or on-the-rack controller to run a stable strategy without the possibility of
interference from a host. This means that no one can alter or stop the strategy using PAC Control or PAC
Terminal; but it also means that PAC Display cannot communicate with the control engine.
To protect a PAC Control strategy from interference, finalize the strategy, download it, save it to flash memory,
and then set the autorun flag. (For the steps, see the PAC Control User’s Guide, form 1700.)
Then, follow the steps in the next section to change the Control Engine port number from the default of
22001 to zero, and save that setting to flash as well. The strategy will automatically run when power is turned
on, but a host cannot communicate with it.
If you need to change the Control Engine port number back to 22001, you can do so in PAC Manager, because
PAC Manager uses the OptoMMP protocol to communicate with the controller.
Turning Off EtherNet/IP
If you are not using the EtherNet/IP protocol on a SNAP PAC device, you can turn the protocol off. Note that
you must restart the device after this change.
Since this procedure sends the configuration directly to the device, the device must be on the same network
as your computer.
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .

2. In the Device Name field, type the name or IP address of the controller (or choose it from the drop-down
list).

PAC Manager User’s Guide 81

SETTING UP NETWORK SECURITY (WIRED NETWORK)

3. Click Communications and choose Network Security from the submenu. Scroll down till you see
ETHERNET/IP.

4. In the Value column, click the down arrow and choose Disabled.
To enable EtherNet/IP again, choose Enabled.
5. Click Apply to send the configuration change to the device.
6. Click Status Write. In the Operations Commands section, highlight Store configuration to flash. Click Send
Command.
7. In the same section, highlight Restart Device from powerup. Click Send Command.
The change is stored to flash memory and the device restarts.

Configuring Ethernet Security on an I/O Unit

Use these steps for an Ethernet-based I/O unit on a wired network. For security on a wireless LAN, see page 23.
For a SNAP PAC S-series standalone controller, use the steps on page 85.
1. In PAC Manager, click the Open button (or in the menu bar, click FileOpen).

82 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

3. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to set up security and
choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

Communications
button

PAC Manager User’s Guide 83

SETTING UP NETWORK SECURITY (WIRED NETWORK)

4. Click the Communications button and choose Network Security from the pop-up menu.

5. If there is no check mark in the Used box, click the box to place a check mark there.
6. To limit access to a specific protocol, change the Port number in the Value column.
CAUTION: If you change the Control Engine port to zero, a strategy that is already in the control engine will
still run, but PAC Display, PAC Control, and other hosts will not be able to communicate with it. See “Protecting
a PAC Control Strategy from Interference” on page 81.

7. To use the built-in HTTP/HTTPS server on a SNAP PAC R-series or S-series controller, see “Configuring the
PAC as an HTTP/HTTPS Server” on page 79.
8. To set up an FTP login, enter the Username and Password to be required from anyone who uses FTP to
access the device.
9. To limit access to specific computers, set up to ten filter addresses and filter masks.
The filter address is the IP address that is allowed to access the I/O unit; the filter mask indicates a range of
allowed addresses. If only one IP address may access the I/O unit, enter 255.255.255.255 for the filter
mask. If a range of IP addresses may access the I/O unit, enter a mask that reflects the subnet range.
For example, if only IP address 1.2.3.4 may access the I/O unit, enter 1.2.3.4. as the filter address and
255.255.255.255 as the filter mask. If any IP address that starts with 1.2.3 may access the I/O unit, enter
1.2.3.4 (or 1.2.3.1, or any address in the range) as the filter address and 255.255.255.0 as the filter mask.
NOTE: For troubleshooting purposes, you can use the Broadcast Filter value to temporarily turn off incoming
broadcasts to the I/O unit. Normally you would NOT want to do this; a BootP response, for example, is an
incoming broadcast.

84 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

10. When you have finished configuring security, click OK.

11. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
IMPORTANT: If you changed a port number, you must restart the device when you send the configuration to the
I/O unit. Otherwise the port change will not take effect.

When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69.

Configuring Ethernet Security on a Standalone Controller

These steps are for a wired network. For security on a wireless LAN, see page 23.
Since this procedure sends the configuration directly to the controller, the controller must be on the same
network as your computer.
NOTE: If you change a port number, you must restart the device in order for the port change to take effect.

1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .

The Inspect window opens.
– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, no data is displayed in the Status Read pane.
– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.
– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.

– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list

PAC Manager User’s Guide 85

SETTING UP NETWORK SECURITY (WIRED NETWORK)

of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

2. In the Device Name field, type the name or IP address of the controller (or choose it from the drop-down
list).
3. Click Communications and choose Network Security from the submenu.

4. To limit access to a specific protocol, change the Port number in the Value column.
CAUTION: If you change the Control Engine port to zero, a strategy that is already in the control engine will still
run, but PAC Display, PAC Control, and other hosts will not be able to communicate with it. See “Protecting a PAC
Control Strategy from Interference” on page 81.

5. To set up an FTP login, enter the Username and Password to be required from anyone who uses FTP to
access the device.

86 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

6. To limit access to specific computers, set up to ten filter addresses and filter masks.
The filter address is the IP address that is allowed to access the controller; the filter mask indicates a range
of allowed addresses. If only one IP address may access the controller, enter 255.255.255.255 for the filter
mask. If a range of IP addresses may access the controller, enter a mask that reflects the subnet range.
For example, if only IP address 1.2.3.4 may access the controller, enter 1.2.3.4. as the filter address and
255.255.255.255 as the filter mask. If any IP address that starts with 1.2.3 may access the controller, enter
1.2.3.4 (or 1.2.3.1, or any address in the range) as the filter address and 255.255.255.0 as the filter mask.
NOTE: For troubleshooting purposes, you can use the Broadcast Filter value to temporarily turn off incoming
broadcasts to the controller. Normally you would NOT want to do this; a BootP response, for example, is an
incoming broadcast.

7. When all the values are correct, click Apply to send the configuration to the controller. If you changed a
port number, also restart the controller:
a. Click the Status Write button in the upper left.
b. In the Operation Command list, highlight Restart Device from powerup.
c. Click Send Command.
The device is restarted and a Success message appears.

LOGGING DATA FROM MEMORY MAP ADDRESSES

You can use a SNAP PAC R-series, EB, or SBI/O unit to log data from up to 64 memory map addresses. The data
from all addresses goes into the same data log file, which you can view from PAC Manager. For Ethernet-based
I/O units, data from this composite file can also be emailed to someone at a time interval you set. For a
complete list of memory map addresses, see the OptoMMP Protocol Guide (form 1465).
NOTE: If you are using SNAP PAC-R with PAC Control, you may prefer to log data in a different way. For more
information about the controller’s file system, see page 215 and the PAC Control User’s Guide (form 1700).

Note that SNAP PAC brains cannot save logged data if power to the unit is cycled.

Configuring Data Logging

1. In PAC Manager, click the Open button (or in the menu bar, click FileOpen).

PAC Manager User’s Guide 87

LOGGING DATA FROM MEMORY MAP ADDRESSES

2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

3. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to set up data logging
and choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

Others
button

88 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

4. Click the Others button and choose Data Logging from the pop-up menu.

Since emails
include values
from all memory
map addresses set
up for data
logging, entries in
this section apply
to all data logging
points.

5. Choose the lowest empty Log Point number from the drop-down list and click to put a check mark in the
Used box.
NOTE: To reduce scanning time, the I/O unit stops scanning log points when it reaches an unused data logging
number. Make sure you use these numbers in order, starting with the lowest.

6. (Not applicable to SB brains) To have the data log emailed, click the Value column cell and enable email.
Also enter the number of data entries in the log you want each email message to contain.
A maximum of 140 log entries can go in each email. Remember that email applies to all points that are
logged, since all the data goes into one file.
7. In the Value column, click the cell and then enter the Scratch Pad On mask and Off mask to trigger this
data log point. Also enter the memory map address of the data you want to log and choose the format of
data in that address. Finally, enter how often data should be logged for this address, in milliseconds (to
log data just once, enter 0).
8. When all values are correct, click OK. Repeat from step 5 for additional log points.
9. Remember to also configure email to indicate where the data log should be sent. See page 100.
10. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
IMPORTANT: If you have changed the data logging interval, you must save the configuration file to flash
memory and restart the I/O unit for the configuration to take effect.

When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see page 69.

Reading the Data Log

The data log is a single file that records data from all the memory map addresses you have configured to log
data from (see steps starting on page 87). The data from up to 64 memory map addresses can be logged, and
all logged data is recorded in one file. The log file holds up to 300 lines of data; when it is filled, new entries
replace the oldest ones.
This composite log file can be viewed through PAC Manager. (On Ethernet-based I/O units, it can also be
emailed to someone at regular intervals you set.) Each line in the log file consists of the date and time stamp,
the memory map address the data is coming from, the type of data, and the data itself.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 89

LOGGING DATA FROM MEMORY MAP ADDRESSES

1. To view logged data, click the Inspect button in the PAC Manager main window.
2. In the Device Name field, enter the name of the I/O unit or choose it from the drop-down list.
Click Data Log and choose Data Logging Samples from the pop-up menu.

The log includes the following information:

Column Notes
Address of the data item within the data log itself. Data is logged in memory map
Address
addresses F3020000–F302175C. Each data item takes 20 bytes.
YYYY-MM-DD Date the data was logged
HH:MM:SS.hh Time the data was logged
Src Addr Memory map address the data came from
Type Format of the data
Data from the memory map address. NOTE: -nan means “not a number” and indi-
Data
cates that data is not in the form of an IEEE float.

Clearing All Data from the Log

1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
The Inspect window opens.
– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, no data is displayed in the Status Read pane.
– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.

90 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.

– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list
of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the I/O unit or choose it from the drop-down
list. Click Status Write.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 91

CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES

Clear Data Logging Samples

command

3. In the Operation Commands list, scroll down and click to highlight Clear Data Logging Samples. Click
Send Command.
The data log is cleared and a Success message appears.

CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES

(Not available on SNAP PAC SB brains.) You may need to send a message—via email, data streaming, SNMP, or
a serial module—from an I/O unit or a controller when a specific event occurs. For example, you could send a
message if a digital point is on, if an analog point reaches a certain value, if a specific string is received through
a serial module, or if a variable contains a specific value. You can send one type of message or more.
NOTE: You must be using a PAC Control strategy or PAC Manager R9.0a or higher to configure event messages in this
way. In the PAC Control strategy, your flowchart monitors the event and triggers the message using the command
Set I/O Unit Event Message State. Messages must be configured before they can be used in PAC Control.

If you are NOT using a PAC Control strategy or are using a PAC Manager version less than R9.0, you cannot configure
event messages in a configuration file. You must configure them using Inspect mode. See page 142.

Follow these steps to configure up to 128 event messages for use with a PAC Control strategy.
1. In PAC Manager, click the Open button (or in the menu bar, click FileOpen).

92 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

3. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to set up event
messages and choose Configure from the pop-up menu.
For a SNAP PAC S-series or SoftPAC controller, if it does not already appear in the list, add it as an I/O unit
of the type Generic OptoMMP Device with the loopback address (127.0.0.1).

Events
button

PAC Manager User’s Guide 93

CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES

4. Click the Events button and choose Event Messages from the pop-up menu.

5. Highlight an empty message number in the list and click Modify.

A
B

D
H

6. Complete the fields as follows:

A—Message Name. Enter a name for the message.

B—Message Text. For an email or serial message, and optionally for an SNMP message, enter the
message text. Message text is not sent in the streaming packet.

94 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

C—Message text is limited to 127 characters. You can place data from the I/O unit’s memory map into
the message by using a plugin (see page 95). If you are sending a serial message, make sure the text is
formatted so the serial device that receives it will understand it.

D—Scratch Pad. To trigger bits in the Scratch Pad, enter the On and Off masks to set.

E—Streaming. To send a stream of data as the message, choose Enabled from the drop-down list.
Enter how often in seconds to send the stream (0 sends it only once).

F—E-mail. To send an email message, choose Enabled from the drop-down list. Enter how often in
seconds to send the email (0 sends it only once).

G—Serial Module. To send a message through a serial module to a serial device, choose Enabled from
the drop-down list. Enter a mask representing the modules and ports to receive the message.

H—Mem Map Copy Configuration. To copy memory map data, see page 109.

I—SNMP Trap. To send an SNMP trap as the message, choose Enabled from the drop-down list. Enter
how often to send the trap (0 sends it only once). Also enter the trap type (determined by your SNMP
management software). If you are using SNMP with outgoing PPP and want the trap stored in the I/O
unit until the next communication, set Priority to Low. If you want the I/O unit to immediately dial out
and send the trap, set Priority to High.
NOTE: SNMP messages must be acknowledged. If the Period is set to more than zero, the alarm will continue to
be sent until the trap is acknowledged and the Scratch Pad trigger is reset to zero.

In PAC Control, you can use the command Set I/O Unit Event Message State to build the acknowledgment into
the flowchart logic.

In PAC Manager, you can acknowledge the trap and reset the Scratch Pad by using InspectEventsEvent
Messages (change State to Acknowledged and reset Scratch Pad bits).

7. When all fields are correct, click OK.

8. When you have configured all event messages, click Close.
9. For each type of message you configure, make sure you also set up basic configuration:
Serial: page 47
SNMP: page 96
Email: page 100
Streaming: page 104

10. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69.

USING PLUGINS
Several plugins are available for use in event messages and memory map copying. The following table guides
you in using them.
To do this Use this plugin In these places See
Include the pattern string from a
$!_str_ Serial messages page 92
serial communication module.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 95

CONFIGURING SNMP

To do this Use this plugin In these places See

Show which serial port sent the pat-
$!_port_ Serial messages page 92
tern string.
Include data from a memory map
address.
X = type of data (S=string representa-
Event messages page 92
tion of the data, D=integer, F=float, $!X_YYYYYYYY_
Memory map copying page 109
P=IP address, B=4 binary bytes)
YYYYYYYY = memory map address
(see examples below)
Number emails with a sequence ID $!_seqid_ Email messages page 92
Turn digital points on or off using a bit
&#x00000000_ Memory map copying page 109
mask

NOTE: For email messages, message text including plugins must be 127 bytes (characters) or less. The message length
after all plugins have been expanded into their data values must be 255 bytes or less.

Examples
Including Data from Memory Map Addresses
For the complete list of memory map addresses, see the appendix in the OptoMMP Protocol Guide
(form 1465).
Here are a couple of examples:
To include the on/off state of a switch on module 0, point 3, you would put this in the message:
$!D_F08000C0_
To include the temperature of an ICTD input on module 4, point 0, you would use:
$!F_F0A00400_
Sending Binary Data in Event Messages
To send binary data in the text of an event message, begin with &#x and end with _. You can include any
number of ASCII hex digits up to the 127-byte limit for the message field. You can also include multiple &#x
plugins. This plugin is resolved after all other plugins have been resolved, and only just before sending the
contents of the message field out of the specified serial ports. Examples:
To include an embedded null (one binary character):
&#x00_
To include a number of binary characters:
&#x0a0dCF0034_

CONFIGURING SNMP
(Not available on SB brains) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is used to communicate
with an SNMP-based enterprise management system, such as Computer Associates’ Unicenter®,
Hewlett-Packard’s OpenView®, or IBM’s Tivoli®, over Ethernet. These enterprise management systems can
manage analog, digital, or serial devices through a SNAP PAC controller or I/O unit just as they manage
computer equipment on the Ethernet network.

96 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

SNMP Traps
You can set up the controller or I/O unit to send messages to the management system in the form of SNMP
traps. The device can send three kinds of traps:
• Authentication trap—sent when a host requests data that is outside its access permissions
• Cold start trap—sent whenever the I/O unit is turned on
• Exception trap—sent in reaction to an event; an exception trap is a type of event message.
Authentication and cold start traps can be enabled using the steps in this section. To configure exception
traps, see “Configuring Event Messages” on page 92.

SNMP Access Privileges

Community groups control access to SNMP information from the controller or I/O unit. When you set up a
community group, you determine its privileges to read, write to, and receive traps from the system.
In order to receive traps, a host must be a registered management host and be part of a community group that
has access privileges for traps. Once a registered management host becomes part of a community group, that
group is no longer available to non-registered hosts. It includes only the hosts registered to it.
To set up community groups, follow the steps in this section. You can define up to eight community groups.

Configuring the SNMP Agent

1. In PAC Manager, click the Open button (or in the menu bar, click FileOpen).
2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it.

3. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to set up SNMP and
choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 97

CONFIGURING SNMP

For a SNAP PAC S-series or SoftPAC controller, if it does not already appear in the list, add it as an I/O unit
of the type Generic OptoMMP Device with the loopback address (127.0.0.1).

Communications
button

4. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted in the list. Click the Communications button and choose
SNMP from the pop-up menu.

A F
B G

C H

5. Complete the fields as follows:

A—SysName. Enter the name assigned to the I/O unit as a managed node within the SNMP
management system.

B—SysLocation. Enter the physical location of the I/O unit.

98 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

C—SysContact. Enter the ID of the contact person for the I/O unit.

D—Community Groups. To set up the Community Groups you need, highlight a line in the list. Click
the String cell within the line and type the name of the group. Then click in the Read, Write, and Trap cells
and choose Yes or No from the drop-down list to indicate whether that group has privileges to read,
write, and receive traps.

E—Management Hosts. To set up Management Hosts, highlight a line in the list. Start with hosts on
the local network first, because the system sends messages to hosts in numeric order. Click the
Community String cell and enter the name of the community group the host belongs to. Click the Host IP
Address cell and enter its IP address, including the dots (for example, 10.192.55.60).

F—Version. From the drop-down list, choose the version of SNMP you are using.

G—Destination Port. 162 is the default port for SNMP traps. If you know that your application will use
a different port, enter the number of that port here.

H—Authentication/Cold Start Trap. To enable authentication or cold start traps, click the box to
check it.
6. When all fields are correct, click OK.
IMPORTANT: For the configuration to take effect, you must upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, save it
to flash memory, and restart the I/O unit.

7. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69.

CONFIGURING DNS SERVERS

If you want to use host names in PAC Control comm handles or in SMTP messaging configuration, use the
DNS Resolver to designate one or two DNS servers to resolve host names into IP addresses. The servers are
queried one at a time in the order listed.
1. In Inspect mode, click the Communications button and choose DNS Resolver from the pop-up menu.

0.0.0.0 indicates that the DNS

server is not being used.

2. To add a DNS server address or to change the Retries or Timeout, click the appropriate value in the Value
column. When you have finished changing values, click Apply.
3. When you have finished changing values, click Apply.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 99

CONFIGURING EMAIL

The values are sent to the controller and stored to flash memory. Then you are prompted to restart the
controller.
4. Restart the controller to use the new configuration.

CONFIGURING EMAIL
(Not available on SB brains) You can send an email message or page someone in response to an event. Follow
the steps in this section to set up email parameters. See “Configuring Event Messages” on page 92 to set up
the message itself.
1. In PAC Manager, click the Open button (or in the menu bar, click FileOpen).
2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

3. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to set up email and
choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

100 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

For a SNAP PAC S-series or SoftPAC controller, if it does not already appear in the list, add it as an I/O unit
of the type Generic OptoMMP Device with the loopback address (127.0.0.1).

Communications
button

4. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted in the list. Click the Communications button and choose
E-mail from the pop-up menu.

A
B

C
D
E

5. Complete the fields as follows:

A—IP Address. Enter the IP address and port number of the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
server the I/O unit will use to send email. You should be able to get this information from your network
administrator.

B—Timeout. Enter the length of time in milliseconds the I/O unit should wait for a response from the
email server. The default is 30,000.

C—From. Enter a valid email address that will identify the I/O unit to the person who receives the email.

D—To. Enter the email address of the person who will receive the email.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 101

SETTING UP INITIAL VALUES IN THE SCRATCH PAD AREA

E—Subject. Enter a phrase that will indicate the purpose of the email to the person receiving it. Note
that this subject line applies to all email messages sent by this I/O unit. Plugins can be used in this field.
For example, if a similar email will be sent at intervals (such as an email of the data log), you can use the
seqid plugin to put a sequence number at the end of each subject line. This plugin is in this format:
$!_seqid_
So, for example, if you enter Process Data Log $!_seqid_ in the subject field, the first
email message will have a subject line of Process Data Log 0, the next message will have a
subject line of Process Data Log 1, and so on. For information on other plugins, see “Using
Plugins” on page 95.
6. When all fields are correct, click OK.
IMPORTANT: For the configuration to take effect, you must upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, save it
to flash memory, and restart the I/O unit.

7. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69.

SETTING UP INITIAL VALUES IN THE SCRATCH PAD AREA

Before you use this section, read “Event/Reaction Concepts” on page 127.
To set initial Scratch Pad values and save them as part of the configuration file, follow these steps. (To see
Scratch Pad values or change them in real time, see “Reading and Writing to the Scratch Pad Area” on
page 184.)
1. In PAC Manager, click the Open button (or in the menu bar, click FileOpen).
2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

3. If you are using a SNAP PAC S-series or SoftPAC controller, configure an I/O unit to represent the controller
for Scratch Pad purposes. Configure this I/O unit as a Generic OptoMMP Device, using the loopback
address (127.0.0.1). (Do not add any points or configure other features.)

102 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

4. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to configure the Scratch
Pad and choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

Scratch Pad
button

5. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted in the list. Click the Scratch Pad button and choose Bits,
Integers, Floats, or Strings from the pop-up menu.

Scratch Pad Bits

1. Click to put a check mark in the Used box.

2. Click the cell in the Value column to set initial values for either the bits in the Direct Access area or the
MOMO masks in the MOMO Access area.
3. Click OK.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 103

CONFIGURING STREAMING

Scratch Pad Integers, Floats, or Strings

The Configure Scratch Pad Floats dialog box is shown as an example. The dialog boxes for strings, 32-bit
integers, and 64-bit integers are similar.

1. For each integer you want to use, click to put a check mark in its box in the Used column. Click the cell in
the Value column and enter the initial value.
2. Repeat for each integer. When all integers have been set, click OK.

CONFIGURING STREAMING
(Not available on SB brains) Most Ethernet communication involves the two-step process of request and
response. A faster way of getting information from the I/O unit, however, is by streaming data. Streaming does
not use TCP/IP; it uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP/IP) instead.
NOTE: Because Modbus/TCP runs on TCP, not UDP, streaming data via Modbus/TCP is not possible. However, you can
stream to a non-Modbus host at the same time you are using the Modbus/TCP protocol for another purpose.

Streaming is a fast way to get continuous data from the I/O unit and is ideal for data acquisition applications.
When it streams, the system sends data at regular intervals to specified IP addresses. You set up the interval,
the IP addresses to receive the data, and (optionally) the port number. The system sends the data at the
specified interval. The communication is one-way; the system does not wait for a response.
CAUTION: If you stream to multiple IP addresses, and one or more of the streaming targets is either offline or not
running the application that receives the stream, delays may occur. If a target is offline, the I/O system will stop
streaming while it tries to resolve the IP address. If the application is not running on the computer that receives the
stream, the computer will send the I/O system an error message; if the stream occurs frequently, the additional error
messages can slow down the network.

Streaming involves two steps: setting up parameters on the I/O unit for streaming, and receiving data in your
application. Follow the steps in this section to set up the parameters. For information on receiving data in your
application, see the OptoMMP Protocol Guide (form 1465).

104 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

1. In PAC Manager, click the Open button (or in the menu bar, click FileOpen).
2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

3. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to set up streaming and
choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

Communications
button

4. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted in the list. Click the Communications button and choose
Streaming from the pop-up menu.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 105

CONFIGURING STREAMING

A
B E
F

C
D

5. Complete the fields as follows:

A—Enable Streaming. To enable streaming, choose Yes from the drop-down list.

B—Enable I/O Mirroring. I/O mirroring is a separate function. It’s generally not a good idea to use
both streaming and mirroring on the same I/O unit. See “Mirroring I/O Point Data” on page 107 for more
information.

C—Interval. Enter how often in milliseconds you want the I/O unit to send the streamed data. If you
are configuring streaming to use only as an event message, set the streaming interval to 0. Zero means
that the stream will be sent only once.

D—Use Default Streaming Area. To stream all addresses in the Streaming section of the I/O unit’s
memory map, click Use Default Streaming Area. For more information, see the memory map appendix in
the OptoMMP Protocol Guide (form 1465). (Note that the Streaming section does not include data from
high-density digital modules.)
To stream only part of the Streaming section, or to stream a different part of the memory map, click
Specify Streaming Area. Enter the starting address in the Memory Map Address field (the address must be
entered in hex), and enter the size in bytes of the data to stream in the Size Of Data field.

E—Port. Enter the port on the computers or devices that receive the streamed data. Your application
must refer to this port number. Use the default of 5001 unless you know it is already being used for
another purpose.

F—Stream Target. Enter the IP addresses of up to eight devices to receive the streamed data.
6. When all fields are correct, click OK.
7. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69.

106 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

MIRRORING I/O POINT DATA

(Not available on SB brains) Mirroring I/O point data is a way to automatically change all the points on one I/O
unit to match all the points on another I/O unit. A simple example of mirroring is controlling whether lights in
one facility are on or off by having them mirror the on or off status of switches in another facility.
Mirroring reads the current analog bank values (in Engineering Units) and the current digital bank status
(4-channel digital modules only, not high-density digital modules) of the points on a system and writes the
data to the same point numbers on a second system. The reading and writing occurs as often as you specify.
In our lighting system example, the status of switches in Facility A could be read every minute and
automatically written to the lights in Facility B. When someone turns on the switches in Facility A, the lights in
Facility B would automatically be turned on within a minute.
It’s generally not a good idea to use both mirroring and streaming on the same I/O unit. If you do use both,
streaming target #1 will receive both mirroring and streaming packets; the streaming packets are ignored, but
they unnecessarily add to network traffic.
NOTE: Due to the size limit of the mirroring packet, mirroring for digital points occurs on the first 32 points of the I/O
unit only (points on the modules in positions 0–7). Mirroring cannot be used with high-density digital modules.

Follow these steps to set up I/O point data mirroring:

1. In PAC Manager, click the Open button (or in the menu bar, click FileOpen).
2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 107

MIRRORING I/O POINT DATA

3. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to set up mirroring and
choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

Communications
button

4. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted in the list. Click the Communications button and choose
Streaming from the pop-up menu.

A
B D
E

5. Complete the fields as follows:

A—Enable Streaming. Streaming is a separate function. It’s generally not a good idea to use both
streaming and mirroring on the same I/O unit. See “Configuring Streaming” on page 104 for more
information.

B—Enable I/O Mirroring. To enable mirroring, choose Yes from the drop-down list.

C—Interval. Enter how often in milliseconds the data should be mirrored.

108 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

D—Port. Enter the port number. This is the primary port number used to communicate with the I/O
unit. The default shown is 5001; enter 2001 instead. (Exception: if you changed the MMP port for security
reasons, use the number you changed it to.)

E—Stream Target. Enter the IP address of the I/O unit to receive the mirrored data.
CAUTION: Since all digital and analog points are mirrored, make sure that the points on the second I/O unit are
configured to accept the values that will be written to them.

6. When all fields are correct, click OK.

7. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69.

COPYING MEMORY MAP DATA

(Not available on SB brains) You can use memory map copying to do the following:
• Copy data on the same I/O unit
• Copy data to a memory map location on another unit

Copying Binary or Memory Map Data on the Same I/O Unit

You can copy data on the same I/O unit, for example to write the value of an analog point to another analog
point.
1. Follow the steps in “Configuring Event Messages” on page 92 until you reach the Add Event Message #
dialog box.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 109

COPYING MEMORY MAP DATA

A
B

2. Complete the fields as follows:

A—Message Name. Enter a descriptive name for the message.

B—Message Text. In the Message Text section, enter a plugin containing a memory map address to
write from (the source address), in the following format:

$!B_F0B00000_

Data
$! indicates the start of the plugin Address _ indicates the end of the plugin
format

or a four-byte constant, in this format:

&#x00000001_
Constants must be written in exactly four bytes (8 characters).
While the data format indicator in the plugin can be other types (D=integer, F=float, B is typically used
for memory map copying. The other types copy a string representation of the data, since plugins are
primarily used for generating messages and emails.

C—MemMap Copy Destination. In the MemMap Copy Destination area, choose Enabled from the
drop-down list. Enter the Memory Map Address you are copying to (the destination address) as an
eight-digit hex number (the last eight digits of the address, for example, F0B00040). In the Period field,
enter how often to send the data, in milliseconds.
Since the points you are copying to are on the same I/O unit, type 0.0.0.0 for the IP Address, and
ignore the TCP port field.

110 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

3. When all fields are correct, click OK.

4. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69.

Copying Binary or Memory Map Data to a Different I/O Unit

You can also copy data to an address on a different system. Configure the event message in the source system
(the one you are copying from), but make sure that any points you are affecting on the destination system are
configured to accept the data.
1. Follow the steps in “Configuring Event Messages” on page 92 until you reach the Add Event Message #
dialog box.

A
B

2. Complete the fields as follows.

A—Message Name. Enter a descriptive name for the message.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 111

CONFIGURING MODBUS OPTIONS

B—Message Text. In the Message Text section, enter a plugin containing a memory map address to
write from (the source address), in the following format:

$!B_F0B00000_

Data
$! indicates the start of the plugin Address _ indicates the end of the plugin
format

or a four-byte constant, in this format:

&#x00000001_
Constants must be written in exactly four bytes (8 characters).
While the data format indicator in the plugin can be other types (D=integer, F=float, B is typically used
for memory map copying. The other types copy a string representation of the data, since plugins are
primarily used for generating messages and emails.

C—MemMap Copy Destination. In the MemMap Copy Destination area, choose Enabled from the
drop-down list. Enter the Memory Map Address you are copying to (the destination address) as an
eight-digit hex number (the last eight digits of the address, for example, F0B00040). In the Period field,
enter how often to send the data, in milliseconds.
Also enter the IP Address and TCP port for the I/O unit whose point you are copying to (the destination
system). TCP port is usually 2001.
3. When all fields are correct, click OK.
4. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69.

CONFIGURING MODBUS OPTIONS

(Not available on SB brains) If you are using Modbus/TCP to communicate with a SNAP PAC device, see the
Modbus/TCP Protocol Guide (form 1678).
Using PAC Manager, you can change the Modbus float format. In addition, if you need to read or write data in
areas of the device’s memory map that are not included in the Modbus memory map (shown in the protocol
guide), you can use PAC Manager to determine the Modbus Unit ID and Register Address that are equivalent
to the memory map address you want to use.

Changing Modbus Float Format

1. In PAC Manager, click the Open button (or in the menu bar, click FileOpen).

112 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

3. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to change Modbus float
format and choose Configure from the pop-up menu.
For a SNAP PAC S-series or SoftPAC controller, if it does not already appear in the list, add it as an I/O unit
of the type Generic OptoMMP Device with the loopback address (127.0.0.1). (Do not add any points.)

Communications
button

PAC Manager User’s Guide 113

CONFIGURING MODBUS OPTIONS

4. Click the Communications button and choose Modbus from the pop-up menu.

5. Click to place a check mark in the Used box. In the Value column, click the value shown for float format.
Choose the format you want from the drop-down list.
NOTE: Word swapped is still Big Endian, but places the most significant bit in the most significant register.

6. When the value you want is shown, click OK.

7. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69.

Determining Modbus Unit ID and Register Address

If you need to read or write data to the device’s memory map in areas not included in the Modbus memory
map, you can use PAC Manager to convert memory map addresses to Modbus Unit ID and Register Addresses,
or vice versa. For more information, see the Modbus/TCP Protocol Guide (form 1678).
1. Determine the device’s memory map address (or the Modbus Unit ID and Register Address) you want to
convert.
To find out the memory map address, you can use the memory map appendix in the OptoMMP Protocol
Guide (form 1465), or you can copy and paste the address from the Inspect dialog box in PAC Manager.
2. In the PAC Manager main window, with a configuration file open, right-click an I/O unit and choose
Configure from the pop-up menu.
3. In the Configure I/O Units dialog box, click the Communications button and choose Modbus from the
pop-up menu.

114 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

4. Click the Advanced button to see the rest of the dialog box.

5. To convert an I/O unit memory map address to a Modbus Unit ID and Register Address, type the last
eight digits of the I/O unit’s memory map address in the MemMap Address field.
Make sure there are no spaces in the address (for example, type F0300020).
6. Click the right-arrow button .

PAC Manager User’s Guide 115

SETTING UP SYSTEM DATE AND TIME

The equivalent Modbus address appears. Note that the Modbus numbers are decimal.

Memory map
address (in hex)

Equivalent Modbus
address (decimal)

7. To convert from Modbus to a memory map address, type the Unit ID and Register Address and click the
left-arrow button.
The equivalent memory map address appears.

SETTING UP SYSTEM DATE AND TIME

SNAP PAC devices have a built-in clock. The clock is set at the factory before the device is shipped to you. If
necessary, you can set the date and time on an I/O unit by following these steps. (For a SNAP PAC S-series
controller, see “Reading System Date and Time” on page 184.)
NOTE: If you are using PAC Control and want to synchronize the I/O unit’s time with your computer’s time, don’t use
these steps; instead, follow the instructions in the PAC Control User’s Guide (form 1700).

1. In PAC Manager, click the Open button (or in the menu bar, click FileOpen).

116 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

3. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to set the time and date
and choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

Others
button

PAC Manager User’s Guide 117

CONFIGURING DIRECT COMMUNICATION TO SERIAL DEVICES

4. Click the Others button and choose Date and Time from the pop-up menu.

5. Click to put a check mark in the Used box. Enter the correct time and date values in the Value column.
Click OK.
6. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69.

CONFIGURING DIRECT COMMUNICATION TO SERIAL DEVICES

Applies to SNAP PAC controllers only.
Serial connectors are located on the top of SNAP PAC controllers. For the type, number, and function of serial
ports on each device, see the device’s user guide. Depending on the device, these ports may be used for
several purposes:
• Maintenance, such as loading new firmware (see page 201).
• Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) communication via modem (see page 123).
• Connection to serial I/O units (PAC-S only).
• Sending or receiving data directly from a serial device, such as an RFID or barcode reader, a weigh scale,
or any intelligent device with a serial port. For this use, communication occurs through PAC Control
communication handles. (For more information, see “Communication Commands” in Chapter 10 of the
PAC Control User’s Guide (form 1700).
NOTE: This section shows you how to configure the controller to talk serially with devices directly connected to it.
Serial devices attached to an I/O unit through serial communication modules on the rack are configured differently.
See page 47.

Follow steps in the next section for on-the-rack controllers; see page 120 for standalone controllers.

Configuring Serial Ports on an On-the-Rack Controller

Use these steps for SNAP PAC R-series.
1. In PAC Manager, click the Open button (or in the menu bar, click FileOpen).
2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

118 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

3. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to configure direct serial
communications and choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

Communications
button

4. Click the Communications button and choose Communication Port Control from the pop-up menu.

Because a configuration file could be built for any controller or brain PAC Manager supports, this window
shows the possible ports and settings for all devices. Only a few apply to R-series PACs.
5. If there is no check mark in the Used box, click the box to place a check mark there.
Ports shown in the window are as follows:
– Port 0 = RS-232 connector on controller’s top
– Ports 1, 2, and 3 = Not used on the R-series controller
6. If Port 0 is used for modem communication, do the following:
a. In the Value field for Control Function for Communication Port 0, choose PPP from the drop-down
list.
b. In the Logging for Communication Port field, leave logging Disabled unless you are troubleshooting
serial communication (see page 229).
NOTE: Logging adds significant overhead to serial communication; do not enable it unless you need to.
7. If Port 0 is directly connected to a serial device, do the following:
a. In the Control Function for Communication Port 0 value field, choose None from the drop-down list.
b. In the Logging for Communication Port field, leave the value field set to Disabled.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 119

CONFIGURING DIRECT COMMUNICATION TO SERIAL DEVICES

Although you can use this log file for troubleshooting, when the control function is set to None, the
log file logs only characters received by the PAC Control strategy. It is better to have PAC Control log
the data rather than using the log file. The log file adds significant overhead to communication. (For
more about the log file, see page 229.)
c. In the Mode for Communication Port 0 field, leave the value set to RS232. (The R-series controller
does not support RS-485.)
8. When you have finished configuring the port, click OK.
9. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69.

Configuring Serial Ports on a Standalone Controller

These steps apply to SNAP PAC S-series controllers.
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
The Inspect window opens.
– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, no data is displayed in the Status Read pane.
– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.
– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.

– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list

120 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the controller (or choose it from the
drop-down list). Click Communications and choose Communication Port Control from the submenu.

The Inspect window shows the ports and features that apply to the controller you’re inspecting. The
example above is for a SNAP-PAC-S2, which has four ports. The following table shows how ports are
labeled on the top covers of S1 and S2 controllers.
Port = SNAP-PAC-S1 = SNAP-PAC-S2
0 S0 Serial 0
1 S1 Serial 1
2 S2 Serial 2

PAC Manager User’s Guide 121

CONFIGURING DIRECT COMMUNICATION TO SERIAL DEVICES

Port = SNAP-PAC-S1 = SNAP-PAC-S2

3 -- Serial 3

3. If you are using a modem, do the following:

a. In the Control Function for Communication Port field for the port the modem is attached to, choose
PPP from the drop-down list. Note that the lowest numbered port with PPP function configured is
the only port that can be used for PPP. See page 123 for more on setting up PPP.
b. In the Logging for Communication Port field, leave logging Disabled unless you are troubleshooting
serial communication (see page 229). Logging adds significant overhead to serial communication;
do not enable it unless you need to.
4. If you are using ports on a PAC-S2 to connect to serial I/O units, do the following for each port:
a. In the Control Function for Communication Port value field, choose None from the drop-down list.
b. In the Mode for Communication value field, choose the connection type, termination, and bias from
the drop-down list.
c. In the Logging for Communication Port field, leave the value field set to Disabled.
Although you can use this log file for troubleshooting, when the control function is set to None, the
log file logs only characters received by the PAC Control strategy. It is better to have PAC Control log
the data rather than using the log file. The log file adds significant overhead to communication. (For
more about the log file, see page 229.)
5. For each port that is directly connected to a serial device, do the following:
a. In the Control Function for Communication Port value field, choose None from the drop-down list.
b. In the Logging for Communication Port field, leave the value field set to Disabled.
Although you can use this log file for troubleshooting, when the control function is set to None, the
log file logs only characters received by the PAC Control strategy. It is better to have PAC Control log
the data rather than using the log file. The log file adds significant overhead to communication. (See
page 229.)
c. (PAC-S2 only) In the Mode for Communication value field, choose the connection type, termination,
and bias from the drop-down list.
6. When you have finished configuring the ports, click Apply.
Configuration data is sent to the controller.

122 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

7. Click the Status Write button on the left side of the Inspect window. In the Operation Command list,
highlight Store configuration to flash.

8. Click Send Command.

The port configuration data is stored to flash memory and a Success message appears.

CONFIGURING PPP
Use this section only if you have SNAP PAC R-series I/O units installed at remote locations or in other places
where an Ethernet network is not available, and you are using modems to communicate between the device
and a computer. You can set up communication so that the device can dial in to a computer, so that
computers can dial into the device, or both.
NOTE: If you are using PPP with a SNAP PAC S-series controller, see instructions in the controller user’s guide.

IMPORTANT: After you have followed the steps in this section to configure PPP on the I/O unit, see the I/O unit’s user’s
guide for information on attaching the modem to the system and setting up Windows dial-up networking or remote
access server on the computer.

Configuring PPP on the I/O Unit

1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Open button or choose File > Open.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 123

CONFIGURING PPP

2. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

3. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to set up PPP and
choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

Communications
button

4. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted in the list. Click the Communications button and choose PPP
from the pop-up menu.

124 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

B
C

E
F

5. Complete the fields as follows:

A—Local IP Address. Enter the Local IP Address for the PPP interface on the I/O unit. Enter the local Subnet
Mask only if you are using classless IP addressing. If you are not using classless IP addressing, leave the Subnet
Mask at zero, and the I/O unit will calculate the subnet mask.
IMPORTANT: The network address for the PPP interface must be different from the network ID for the Ethernet
interface. (The network address is obtained by ANDing the IP address and the subnet mask.)

B—Max Authentication Retries. Enter the maximum number of times a login/password combination
can be retried.

C—Connection Timeout and Echo Request. Change these values if necessary to establish and
maintain the connection.

D—Modem Initialization String. Change the modem initialization string, listen string, and hangup
string if necessary. Make sure you use the setting to ignore DTR signal in the modem initialization string:
The default modem initialization string is AT&D0^M~~~~
Consult the command reference that came with your modem to determine the correct initialization
command strings. A sample modem initialization string might look like this:
AT&F^M~~AT&D0&K0^M~~AT&W0^M~~AT&Y0^M~~
The &F command sets the modem back to factory defaults. The ^M tells the Ethernet I/O unit to insert a
carriage return. The ~ tells it to insert a 500ms pause. The &W0 writes the current settings to NVRAM profile 0
on the modem. The &Y0 instructs the modem to use NVRAM profile 0 after resetting.
This initialization string is just a sample; command strings for your modem may differ.

E—Outgoing PPP. If the I/O unit will send outgoing calls, complete the Outgoing PPP section:
• Choose Enabled from the drop-down list.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 125

CONFIGURING PPP

• In the Use Local IP Address field, choose Yes to have the I/O unit use the Local IP Address you entered for
the PPP link; choose No to have the remote device assign the I/O unit an IP address for the PPP link. The
default is No.
• If you want the I/O unit to use the device the I/O unit is calling as the default gateway for all
communication, choose Yes for Set As Default Gateway. The default is No.
• Enter the Login and Password the I/O unit should use for authentication when it calls the remote device.
• In the Phone number field, enter the number the modem should dial for outgoing calls from the I/O unit.
Change the following fields if necessary:
• Inactivity Timeout—If the I/O unit sends no packets and receives no packets for this number of seconds
after the PPP session is negotiated, the modem will hang up. The default is 30.
• Max Connect Time—The maximum amount of time in seconds an outgoing PPP connection can stay
connected after successful negotiation. Default is zero, which disables the timer.
• Max Dial Retries—The number of times the I/O unit will redial if the first attempt fails. Default is zero.
• Retry Interval—The number of seconds the I/O unit will wait before trying to redial after the first attempt
fails. Default is zero.
• Disable Time—If the maximum connect time or maximum number of retries has been reached, the
outgoing PPP dialer waits this number of seconds before doing anything. Default is zero.
• PPP Link Always Connected—If you want outgoing PPP to always be connected, so there is no need for
the I/O unit to dial out, check this box.

F—Incoming PPP. If the I/O unit will receive incoming calls via modem, complete the Incoming PPP
section:
• Choose Enabled from the drop-down list so the modem will listen for incoming calls.
• If you want the I/O unit to use the device calling the I/O unit as the default gateway for all
communication, choose Yes for Set As Default Gateway. The default is No.
• Change the Inactivity Timeout if necessary. The default is 30.
• Enter the Login and Password the I/O unit should accept for incoming calls.
• In the Remote IP Address field, enter the IP address the I/O unit should give to devices that dial into the
I/O unit and ask for an address. This address must be on the same subnet as the local IP address.
• Enter a modem listen string to make sure the modem automatically answers calls. The default modem
listen string is ATS0=1^M~ , which instructs the modem to answer any incoming calls on the first ring.
Again, refer to your modem’s command reference for the correct listen string.
6. When all fields are correct, click OK.
IMPORTANT: For the configuration to take effect, you must upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, save it
to flash memory, and restart the I/O unit.

NOTE: If the serial port you are using for PPP was previously used for a direct connection with a serial device, you
must use PAC Manager’s Inspect window to reset the port configuration from None to PPP. See page 118 for
more information.

7. Configure other optional functions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.
When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O
Unit” on page 69. For information on attaching the modem to the system and setting up Windows dial-up
networking or a remote access server, see the SNAP Ethernet-Based I/O Units User’s Guide (form 1460) or the
SNAP PAC R-Series Controller User’s Guide (form 1595).

126 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 4: Setting Up Events and
Reactions

INTRODUCTION
Events and reactions are automatic responses to conditions monitored by SNAP PAC I/O units. The monitored
conditions, called events, and the responses to them, called reactions, can be simple or complex. An example
of a simple event/reaction is turning on a fan in response to a rise in temperature. Complex event/reactions
may involve multiple events and multiple reactions, with a time delay in between. For example, you could set
up a temperature limit as an event that triggers a warning light, and a higher temperature limit as an event
that sets off an audible alarm and sends an email message.
CAUTION: Event/reactions you set up using these instructions in this chapter operate on the I/O side of a SNAP PAC
R-series controller, independently of any PAC Control strategy running on the processor’s control side. If you are using
PAC Control with a SNAP PAC R-series I/O system, do not use this chapter. Instead, use the flowchart logic in the PAC
Control strategy to handle reactions to events. The only reason you might set up event/reactions that operate
independently on the I/O side of the controller would be a need for very fast reactions. If that is the case, be very careful
that the event/reactions you set up do not conflict with PAC Control logic.

The chapter introduces you to the Scratch Pad and other basic event/reaction concepts. It also shows you how
to use PAC Manager to configure the following:
• Digital event/reactions (see page 131)
• Alarm event/reactions (see page 137)
• Serial or Wiegand event/reactions (see page 140)
• Event messages (see page 142)

EVENT/REACTION CONCEPTS
This section describes using the Scratch Pad to track events and alarms, and types of events, alarms, and
reactions.

The Scratch Pad

Event/reactions are available on SNAP PAC R-series, SNAP PAC EB and SB brains, SNAP Ultimate, and SNAP
Ethernet I/O units. SNAP Simple I/O units and E1 and E2 brain boards do not have event/reaction capability.
CAUTION: Event/reactions occur on the I/O side of a SNAP PAC R-series or SNAP Ultimate controller, independently
of any PAC Control strategy running on the control side. If you are using PAC Control, it is best to use flowchart logic
to handle reactions to events. If you do set up event/reactions, be very careful that they do not conflict with PAC
Control logic.

The following contain Scratch Pad areas within their memory maps.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 127

USING EVENT/REACTIONS

• groov I/O units

• groov RIO modules
• SNAP PAC controllers
•
and brains
The Scratch Pad is a convenient place to store data and easily exchange it with other groov EPIC processors,
groov RIO modules, and SNAP PAC controllers, as well as HMI, OPC, and SCADA software.
The Scratch Pad is user-defined, meaning that you define and use its addresses to fit your needs, and you can
redefine them whenever necessary. The Scratch Pad area includes sections for up to five data types: bits,
integers, floats, and strings.
• The Scratch Pad bits section is a 64-bit mask.
• The Scratch Pad 32-bit integer section is a table of 10,240 four-byte elements.
• The Scratch Pad 64-bit integer section is a table of 1024 eight-byte elements.
• The Scratch Pad float section is a table of 10,240 elements; each float is four bytes.
• The Scratch Pad strings section is a table of 64 elements. Each element can hold 128 characters or 128
bytes of binary data.
NOTE: Scratch Pad float and 32-bit integer tables are not made up of contiguous addresses in the memory map; each
table is in two address sections. You won’t notice this if you are using PAC Control Scratch Pad commands, but if you
are addressing these tables in another application, check the memory map appendix in the OptoMMP Protocol
Guide to make sure you have the correct addresses for the table elements you want.

Using Scratch Pad Bits for Events and Alarms

When Scratch Pad bits are used to track events and alarms, the 64 bits in the mask do not represent channel
numbers. Instead, they represent whatever you decide they should be. For example, you might decide that
bit 1 in the Scratch Pad will indicate a temperature level in Vat #12 (if the temperature reaches 48 °C, bit 1 is
turned on). Bit 2 might indicate the status of Pump A (if the pump is off, the bit is off; if the pump is on, the bit
is on).
Because you can use Scratch Pad bits to keep track of events and alarms, you can set up reactions based on a
variety of conditions. In the example above, you could set up a reaction on an EB brain that sends a stream
packet if bit 1 is on and bit 2 is off.

Cascading Events, Alarms, and Reactions

Scratch Pad bits are really a way to set up cascading events and reactions (that is, a series of events and
reactions dependent on each other). For example, the first event in the cascade could be the temperature in
Vat #12 reaching 40 degrees, and the reaction to it is setting Scratch Pad bit 1. The second event in the
cascade is that Scratch Pad bit #1 is set, and the reaction to that is some other action. A cascade of any number
of events and reactions can be configured, as needed.

USING EVENT/REACTIONS
(Does not apply to groov I/O units.) Event/reactions are available on SNAP PAC R-series, SNAP PAC EB and SB
brains, SNAP Ultimate, and SNAP Ethernet I/O units. SNAP Simple I/O units and E1 and E2 brain boards do not
have event/reaction capability.

128 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 4: SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS

CAUTION: Event/reactions occur on the I/O side of a SNAP PAC R-series or SNAP Ultimate controller, independently
of any PAC Control strategy running on the control side. If you are using PAC Control, it is best to use flowchart logic
to handle reactions to events. If you do set up event/reactions, be very careful that they do not conflict with PAC
Control logic.

Types of Events, Alarms, and Reactions

NOTE: groov I/O units and SB brains do not support serial events and reactions nor reactions requiring an Ethernet
network, such as sending email.

The event or reaction can consist of one or a combination of the following. The reaction can take place
immediately or after a delay.
Events:
• On/off state of a digital channel on a 4-channel module
• State of on-latch or off-latch for a digital channel on a 4-channel module
• On/off state of a digital channel on an HDD (high-density digital) module
• State of an on-latch or off-latch fora digital channel on an HDD module
• High or low value of an analog channel (in engineering units)
• Number on a digital counter or high or low number on a quadrature counter
• Analog channel value or quadrature counter that is outside allowable range
• State of a bit in the Scratch Pad bits area
• State of a bit in the Scratch Pad integer 64 area
• Specific string received by a serial module
Reactions:
• Turn on/off digital channel
• Clear on-latch or off-latch
• Copy data from one memmap location to another
• Log data
• Turn on or off a bit in the Scratch Pad bits area
• Turn on or off a bit in the Scratch Pad integer 64 area
• Send a stream packet
• Send an email message
• Send a string through a serial module to a serial device
• Send an SNMP trap
Note that the memory map section formerly called Timers, which provided digital events with a delay
between an event and the reaction to it, has been expanded in firmware 8.1 to include additional options
such as latches and HDD modules. All new digital events should be configured in Digital Events - Expanded to
take advantage of the new flexibility.
Digital events you already configured still exist in Digital Events - Old. Timers you already configured still exist
in Digital Events - Expanded.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 129

USING EVENT/REACTIONS

The following table details steps for configuring events and reactions. See page references for more. A
flowchart following the table summarizes Alarm and Serial event and reaction configuration.
Event Reaction Configuration Steps See
Turn digital point on/off (on
Configure Digital Events - Expanded page 131
same I/O unit)
Turn digital point on/off (on dif- 1. Configure Digital Events - Expanded—set Scratch Pad bit
page 131
ferent I/O unit) 2. (Email message only) Configure Email
page 100
OR (Streaming only) Configure Streaming
If digital point is on/off page 104
Log data (SNMP only) Configure SNMP
page 96
OR 3. (Except data logging) Configure Event Messages—send
Copy memory map data message or data
page 92
OR (Data logging) Configure Data Logging and configure
page 87
Send message (stream, e-mail, Email (optional)
page 100
serial, or SNMP trap).
1. Configure Alarm Events (high alarm or low alarm)—set
Turn digital point on/off (on
Scratch Pad bit page 137
same I/O unit).
2. Configure Digital Events - Expanded—turn on/off point page 131
1. Configure Alarm Events (high alarm or low alarm)—set
Scratch Pad bit
If analog point value (Engi- Turn digital point on/off (on dif- 2. (Optional for a delay) Configure Digital Events - page 137
neering Units) goes above ferent I/O unit) Expanded— use the alarm Scratch Pad bit as the event,
or below a specified value OR set the time delay, and set a Scratch Pad bit after the page 131
OR Copy memory map data delay page 100
If digital counter reaches a OR 3. (Email message only) Configure Email page 104
specified value Log data (Streaming only) Configure Streaming page 96
OR (SNMP only) Configure SNMP
Send message (stream, email, 4. (Except data logging) Configure Event Messages—send page 92
serial, or SNMP trap). message or data based on alarm bit or delay bit page 87
(Data logging) Configure Data Logging based on alarm bit page 100
or delay bit and configure Email (optional)
1. Configure Alarm Events (deviation alarm)—set Scratch
Turn digital point on/off (on
Pad bit page 137
same I/O unit)
2. Configure Digital Events - Expanded—turn on/off point page 131
1. Configure Alarm Events (deviation alarm)—set Scratch
Pad bit
Turn digital point on/off (on dif- page 137
If analog point value (Engi- ferent I/O unit) 2. (Optional for a delay) Configure Digital Events -
neering Units) or quadrature Expanded— set time delay and set a Scratch Pad bit after
OR page 131
counter goes outside an the delay
Copy memory map data page 100
allowable range 3. (Email message only) Configure Email
OR page 104
(Streaming only) Configure Streaming
Log data page 96
(SNMP only) Configure SNMP
OR
4. (Except data logging) Configure Event Messages—send
Send message (stream, email, page 92
message or data immediately or based on delay bit
serial, or SNMP trap). page 87
(Data logging) Configure Data Logging immediately or
page 100
based on delay bit and configure Email (optional)

130 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 4: SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS

Event Reaction Configuration Steps See

Turn digital point on/off (on 1. Configure Serial Events—set Scratch Pad bit page 140
same I/O unit) 2. Configure Digital Events - Expanded—turn on/off point page 131
1. Configure Serial Events—set Scratch Pad bit
2. (Optional for a delay) Configure Digital Events - page 140
Expanded— set time delay and set a Scratch Pad bit after
Send SNMP trap the delay page 131
3. Configure SNMP page 96
4. Configure Event Messages—send trap immediately or page 92
based on delay bit

If a specific string is 1. Configure Serial Events—send email

Send one-time email page 140
received by a serial module 2. Configure Email
1. Configure Serial Events—set Scratch Pad bit
Turn digital point on/off (on dif- page 140
2. (Optional for a delay) Configure Digital Events -
ferent I/O unit)
Expanded— set time delay and set a Scratch Pad bit after
OR page 131
the delay
Copy memory map data page 100
3. (Email message only) Configure Email
OR page 104
(Streaming only) Configure Streaming
Log data
4. (Except data logging) Configure Event Messages—send
OR page 92
message or data immediately or based on delay bit
Send message (stream, serial, page 87
(Data logging) Configure Data Logging immediately or
or multiple emails) page 100
based on delay bit and configure Email (optional)

The following flowchart summarizes Alarm and Serial event and reaction configuration.

CONFIGURING DIGITAL EVENTS AND REACTIONS

In a digital event, the I/O unit monitors one or more inputs, outputs, and Scratch Pad bits for a match to a
specific pattern (the event). When the pattern is matched, the I/O unit reacts in a predetermined way. The
reaction can turn digital points on or off and can also set bits in the Scratch Pad. You can configure up to 512
digital events and reactions for SNAP PAC controllers and brains.
Digital event/reactions can be as simple as turning on a light (reaction) when a door opens (event). They can
also be very complex, depending on your needs. For example, suppose you need to monitor a critical group of
switches. If switches 1, 2, and 3 are all off at once, you want to turn on an emergency light and sound an alarm.
You can set up a digital event for the state of the three switches, and a reaction that automatically turns on the
emergency light and alarm.
In addition to digital states, events can include alarm or other conditions noted in the Scratch Pad. For
instance, to regulate the temperature of a room, you might set up an alarm event that turns on a bit in the

PAC Manager User’s Guide 131

CONFIGURING DIGITAL EVENTS AND REACTIONS

Scratch Pad when the temperature reaches 78° F (see “Configuring Alarms and Reactions” on page 137). Then
you would set up a digital event/reaction to turn on a fan when that Scratch Pad bit is on.
NOTE: If you want to turn on or off digital points that are located on a different I/O unit, you can do so by using the
memory map copying feature. See “Copying Memory Map Data” on page 109 for details.

Digital Point and Scratch Pad Masks

Both events and reactions are in the form of a mask. Digital point masks represent 64 possible digital states;
you choose whether these are point states or on-latch or off-latch states. Scratch Pad masks represent
whatever you decide each bit should be.
For each digital event/reaction, you set up two to eight masks: up to four for the event and up to four for the
reaction.

For the event: The table below shows possible triggers for the event, in the form of four masks. You can
configure only Trigger #1, only Trigger #2, or both. If you configure both, both must be true for the event to be
true. Choose the trigger(s) you want to use; then set up the masks.
Trigger #1 Trigger #2
On mask Off mask On mask Off mask
Digital Point State Digital Point State Digital Point State Digital Point State
Digital Point On Latch Digital Point On Latch Digital Point On Latch Digital Point On Latch
Digital Point Off Latch Digital Point Off Latch Digital Point Off Latch Digital Point Off Latch
HDD Point State HDD Point State HDD Point State HDD Point State
HDD Point On Latch HDD Point On Latch HDD Point On Latch HDD Point On Latch
HDD Point Off Latch HDD Point Off Latch HDD Point Off Latch HDD Point Off Latch
Scratch Pad Bits Scratch Pad Bits Scratch Pad Bits Scratch Pad Bits
Scratch Pad Integer 64 Scratch Pad Integer 64 Scratch Pad Integer 64 Scratch Pad Integer 64

For the reaction: This table shows possible reactions, again in the form of four masks. You can configure
only Reaction #1, only Reaction #2, or both. When the event occurs, all configured reactions will take place.
Choose the reaction(s) you want to occur, and then set up the masks.
Reaction #1 Reaction #2
On mask Off mask On mask Off mask
Digital Point States Digital Point States Digital Point States Digital Point States
Clear Digital Point On/Off Clear Digital Point On/Off Clear Digital Point On/Off Clear Digital Point On/Off
Latches Latches Latches Latches
HDD Point States HDD Point States HDD Point States HDD Point States
Clear HDD Point On/Off Latches Clear HDD Point On/Off Latches Clear HDD Point On/Off Latches Clear HDD Point On/Off Latches
Scratch Pad Bits Scratch Pad Bits Scratch Pad Bits Scratch Pad Bits
Scratch Pad Integer 64 Scratch Pad Integer 64 Scratch Pad Integer 64 Scratch Pad Integer 64

NOTE: Trigger #1 does NOT control Reaction #1; Trigger #2 does not control Reaction #2. Instead, all the masks work
as a group. All the event masks must be a match for the I/O unit to set the reaction(s), and if the event occurs, any
and all reactions will be set. If it doesn’t matter whether a specific point or bit is on or off, leave its value at zero in both
the on mask and the off mask.

When you configure events and reactions, the masks are in hex notation. If you are setting up a Digital On
mask for points 0–7, for example, you might do so as follows:
Module position: 1 0
Point number: 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
State: On – On On – – – On
Binary notation: 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

132 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 4: SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS

Hex notation: B 1

For more information on mask data format, see page 195. See the following pages for a step-by-step example
to set up event/reactions.
You can also configure the I/O unit to send a message as a reaction to digital events. See page 92.

How Digital Events Trigger Reactions

Reactions to digital events can be level-triggered (occur continuously) or edge-triggered (occur once). The I/O
unit continually checks the digital state to see if it matches the event, and the I/O unit sends the reaction as
soon as the state matches the event. If you configure the reaction to occur continuously, the I/O unit
continues to send the reaction until the state changes. If you configure it to occur once, the reaction is sent
only once.
In either case, however, if the state changes so that it no longer matches the event, the I/O unit does NOT
reverse the reaction.

Example: Digital Event/Reaction

For example, suppose you have set up an event/reaction to turn on a light when a door is open. As soon as the
event occurs (the door opens), the I/O unit sends the reaction (turn on the light).
When the door is shut, the I/O unit stops turning on the light, but it does NOT turn the light off. To turn off the
light when the door is shut, you need to set up a second event/reaction.
Suppose the input for the door’s status is on point 0 on the module in position 0, and the output for the light
is on point 1 on the module in position 1. Here are the two event/reactions to turn on the light when the door
is open, and turn off the light when the door is shut:
Event #0: IF Mod 0 Pt 0 (Door) is OFF (Open)
Reaction #0: THEN Turn Mod 1 Pt 1 (Light) ON

Event #1: IF Mod 0 Pt 0 (Door) is ON (Closed)

Reaction #1: THEN Turn Mod 1 Pt 1 (Light) OFF

Since this example is a simple one-to-one correspondence, it is pretty easy to set up.
1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
2. Click the Open button or choose FileOpen.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 133

CONFIGURING DIGITAL EVENTS AND REACTIONS

3. In the Open Tag Database dialog box, navigate to the configuration file and double-click it to open it.

4. In the configuration tree, right-click the name of the I/O unit on which you want to set up digital events
and choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

Events
button

5. For processors with firmware 8.1 or higher, click the Events button and choose Digital Events - Expanded
from the pop-up menu.
If your processor has firmware 8.0 or lower, expanded digital events are not available; choose Digital
Events - Old. Choices are more limited with older firmware; see tables on page 73.

134 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 4: SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS

IMPORTANT: If you configured digital events in a version of PAC Manager prior to 8.1, you will find them in
Digital Events - Old. If you configured timed events in a PAC Manager version prior to 8.1, you’ll see them here in
Digital Events - Expanded.

6. In the drop-down list, choose the lowest unused Event Number. Click to place a check mark in the Used
box.
NOTE: To reduce scanning time, the I/O unit stops scanning digital events when it reaches an unused event.
Make sure you use event numbers in order, starting with the lowest.

7. Configure the Event by clicking in the Value column and entering a value or choosing from the
drop-down list.
a. Choose Enabled.
b. Choose which digital data to use as the trigger; in this example it is Digital Point State.
c. Leave the Digital ON mask all zeros. Enter the Digital OFF mask for the open door.
Remember that the masks are in hex notation. Here’s how you might figure out the Digital ON mask
to turn on the light:
Module position: 15 1 0
Digital point: 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
State: -- -- -- -- -- -- On -- -- -- -- --
Binary notation: 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Hex notation: 0 2 0
You don’t need to enter anything for Trigger #2, because the open door is the only dependency for
this event.
d. If you want a delay between the event and the reaction, enter the delay in milliseconds.
8. Configure the Reaction.
a. Choose whether the reaction should occur once or continuously; for this example, it’s continuously.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 135

CONFIGURING DIGITAL EVENTS AND REACTIONS

b. Choose the digital data and/or Scratch Pad bits to use for the reaction, and enter the masks.
Here’s how the Event and Reaction sections might appear for the door/light example.

Event: Digital OFF

mask— door on
mod 0 pt 0 is
open.

Reaction: Digital
ON mask—turn
on light at mod 1
pt 1.

9. Now choose Event Number 1 from the drop-down list and click Used. In the Event and Reaction sections,
enter the Digital ON mask for the closed door and the Digital OFF mask to turn off the light.

Event: Digital ON
mask— door on
mod 0 pt 0 is
closed.

Reaction: Digital
OFF mask—turn
off light at mod 1
pt 1.

10. Click OK.

Both event/reactions are configured.

136 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 4: SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS

11. Configure other event/reactions, or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button
to save the configuration file.

CONFIGURING ALARMS AND REACTIONS

A reaction can also be set up as a response to an alarm. You can configure alarms for analog points or digital
counters. For example, you could monitor the pressure in a tank and set up an alarm if it rises above a certain
level, or you could trigger an alarm when a specific number of boxes on a conveyor have passed through a
beam sensor. For each alarm, you configure a suitable reaction.
For analog points, alarms are based on the analog input value. For digital points, alarms are based on the
counter value (applies to points on 4-channel digital modules only). For each point, you can configure any or
all of the following alarms:
• Deviation alarm—sets a range on either side of the current value that is acceptable; beyond that range,
the reaction occurs. For example, suppose you are monitoring temperature. If the current value is 80 and
you set a deviation limit of 6, the reaction will not occur unless the value drops below 74 or rises above
86.
If you have an Alarm Event that is configured as a deviation alarm, in order to capture that an alarm
occurred you need to set a scratch pad bit (such as bit 0) as the reaction of the alarm event. Also, you
need to create another event, such as a Digital Event - Expanded, that triggers based on that scratch pad
bit. The Digital Event would set a different scratch pad bit (such as bit 1) to be used for other logic or
events. For example, digital event 0 sees set bit 0 and sets bit 1. Now bit one remains set until cleared. Set
bit 1 can be used to start a timer that clears bit 1 when it expires. Bit 1 could also trigger an event
message that requires acknowledgment.
NOTE: When a reaction occurs, the deviation limit stays the same, but the value that set off the reaction
becomes the new deviation value. In this example, if the temperature drops to 73, the reaction occurs. Six is still
the deviation limit, but now 73 is the deviation value; another reaction will not occur unless the value drops
below 67 or rises above 79.

• High-limit alarm—sets a fixed upper limit. If the analog value or counter is higher than the high limit,
the reaction occurs.
• Low-limit alarm—sets a fixed lower limit. If the analog value or counter is lower than the low limit, the
reaction occurs.

How Alarms Trigger Reactions

Reactions to alarms are edge-triggered, not level-triggered, and when the alarm state changes, the reaction is
automatically reversed. The I/O unit sends the reaction just once, as soon as the alarm occurs (at the “edge” of
the alarm). The I/O unit does not send the reaction again until the alarm occurs again. If the alarm stops,
however, the I/O unit reverses the reaction.
For example, suppose you set up a high-limit alarm that turns on a Scratch Pad bit that will turn on a fan if the
temperature goes over 70°. As soon as the alarm state occurs (the temperature goes over 70°), the I/O unit
sends the reaction (turns on the bit to turn on the fan). If the temperature remains above 70°, the I/O unit does
not continue to turn on the fan bit; the bit just stays on.
When the temperature falls back below the high limit (70° minus whatever deadband you have set), the I/O
unit automatically reverses the reaction by turning the Scratch Pad bit off. (To turn the fan off, you would have
to set up a reaction for the off bit, turning the fan off.)
Notice that the reaction and its reversal are absolute; they do not depend on the pre-alarm condition. For
example, if the bit to turn on the fan was already on at the time the temperature rose above 70°, the reaction

PAC Manager User’s Guide 137

CONFIGURING ALARMS AND REACTIONS

would turn the bit on even though it was already on. When the temperature fell back below 70°, the I/O unit
would not return the fan bit to its pre-alarm condition (on); it would turn the bit off.

Example: Alarms Event/Reaction

1. In the PAC Manager main window, with a configuration file open, right-click the name of the I/O unit on
which you want to set up alarm events. Choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

Events
button

138 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 4: SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS

2. Click the Events button and choose Alarm Events from the pop-up menu.

3. In the drop-down list, choose the Alarm Number you want to use (by default, it is the same number as
the point the alarm will monitor). Click Used.
The alarm number can be any unused number, but it is best to use the point number, since by default
that point’s memory map address and value are shown in the Value Being Alarmed field.
If you need to set two or more alarms on the same point, however, you can do so. For additional alarms,
choose a different alarm number, configure the alarm, and enter the memory map address for the point
in the Advanced Value Selection section. (A complete list of memory map addresses is in the OptoMMP
Protocol Guide, form 1465.)
4. Find the section for the type of alarm you want to use (deviation, high, or low). In the Value column, click
the Enable/Disable Alarm cell and choose Enabled from the drop-down list. Click in other cells to set
deviation or alarm limits. For high and low alarms, also set the deadband for the limit.
A deadband is an allowable variation in the limit to account for signal noise. If the signal fluctuates
slightly, the deadband limit keeps the I/O unit from sending out another alarm.
5. For each alarm, also configure the reaction in two parts:
– Scratch Pad bits that should be turned on
– Scratch Pad bits that should be turned off
See “The Scratch Pad” on page 127.
6. (Optional) If you are setting two or more alarms on the same point, use the Advanced Value Selection
area to enter the memory map address for the point to monitor, and indicate whether the value on that
point is a float.
7. Repeat from step 3 for additional alarms. When you have finished configuring alarms, click OK.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 139

CONFIGURING SERIAL OR WIEGAND EVENTS AND REACTIONS

8. Click the Save button to save the configuration file.

CONFIGURING SERIAL OR WIEGAND EVENTS AND REACTIONS

If you are using Opto 22 serial communication modules—RS-232, RS-485/422, or Wiegand—with SNAP PAC
I/O units, you can configure a serial or Wiegand event to send a serial message, to send an SNMP trap, or to
turn bits in the Scratch Pad on or off when a specific string is received from one or more modules.
Before you configure serial events and reactions, make sure you have configured the serial modules (page 47).
1. In the PAC Manager main window, with a configuration file open, right-click the name of the I/O unit on
which you want to set up serial or Wiegand events and choose Configure from the pop-up menu.

Events
button

2. Click the Events button and choose Serial Events from the pop-up menu, or if you are configuring events
for a Wiegand serial communication module, choose Wiegand Events.

140 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 4: SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS

The example above shows the Configure Serial Events dialog box; the Wiegand Events dialog box is
similar.
3. In the drop-down list, choose the lowest unused Event Number. Click Used.
NOTE: To reduce scanning time, the I/O unit stops scanning serial events when it reaches an unused event. Make
sure you use event numbers in order, starting with the lowest.

4. In the Event section, enter a mask in hex notation indicating the serial ports to monitor.
The I/O unit monitors all ports set as “on” bits in the mask (on = 1; off = 0). If the string is received from
any of those serial ports, the event triggers the reaction. For example, suppose you have serial modules in
positions 1 and 2 on the rack. (Other kinds of modules are in positions 0 and 3.) The following table
shows how you might figure out the mask to monitor three of these serial ports:
Module position: 3 2 1 0
Serial port: – – B A B A – –
Default TCP port number: – – 22505 22504 22503 22502 – –
Monitor? (Y or N): – – Y N Y Y – –
Mask (binary notation): 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
Mask (hex notation): 2 C
The complete hex mask you would enter to monitor these ports is: 0000002C.
5. Enter the pattern string the event should match.
The string is limited to 40 characters. Wildcards (* and ?) can be used.
6. In the Reaction section, do any or all of the following:
a. To send text in an SNMP trap or a one-time email message, complete the Resulting string field.
If you send a string, it is limited to 126 characters. You can place data from the serial module or the
I/O unit’s memory map into the string by using any or all of the following plugins:

$!_str_ Includes the pattern string in the resulting string.

$!_port_ Shows which serial port sent the pattern string.
$!X_YYYYYYYY_ Includes data from a memory map address. See “Using Plugins” on
page 95 for more information.

For example, a resulting string that includes the pattern string, the serial port that sent it, and the
text Overload would look like this:
$!_str_ $!_port_ Overload
b. To send an SNMP trap, also enter how often in seconds to send the trap (use zero to send it only
once), and enter the trap type. Remember to configure email (page 100).
Trap types are determined by your SNMP management system.
c. To send a one-time email notification, also enable E-mail Message. Make sure to configure email
(page 100).
To send multiple emails, don’t enable email here. Instead, turn on a Scratch Pad bit (step e) and set
up the email when you configure event messages (page 92).
d. To send a serial message out a serial port, don’t put the message here. Instead, turn on a Scratch Pad
bit (step e) and set up the serial message when you configure event messages (page 92).
e. To set Scratch Pad bits, enter masks for the bits to turn on and the bits to turn off when the serial
event occurs.
7. Repeat from step 3 for other serial events and reactions. When you have finished configuring serial
events and reactions, click OK.
8. Click the Save button to save the configuration file.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 141

CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES

CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES

If you are using PAC Control or PAC Manager 9.0 or higher, configure event messages in the
configuration file as shown on page 92.
If you are not using PAC Control or are using a PAC Manager version less than 9.0, you cannot
configure event messages in a configuration file. Instead, use PAC Manager’s Inspect mode and follow the
steps below. Note that event messages are not available on SB brains, since messaging requires an Ethernet
connection.
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
– If you have not used the Inspect window before, the window will not show any data. Select your
controller from the drop-down list.
– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.

– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.
– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list

142 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 4: SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS

of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the I/O unit (or choose it from the drop-down
list).
3. Click Events and choose Event Messages from the submenu.

4. From the drop-down list, choose the lowest unused message number.
Unused message numbers have no asterisk.
5. For an email or serial message, or optionally for an SNMP message, enter the message text.
Message text is not sent in the streaming packet. Message text is limited to 127 characters. You can place
data from the I/O unit’s memory map into the message by using a plugin (see page 95). If you are
sending a serial message, make sure the text is formatted so the serial device that receives it will
understand it.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 143

CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES

6. Enter two masks indicating the Scratch Pad on and off bits that should trigger the message.
For help in figuring out the masks, see “Digital Point and Scratch Pad Masks” on page 132.
7. Streaming section: To send a stream of data as the message, choose Enabled from the drop-down list.
Enter how often in seconds to send the stream (0 sends it only once).
For information on streaming, see page 96.
8. E-mail section: To send an email message, choose Enabled from the drop-down list. Enter how often in
seconds to send the email (0 sends it only once).
9. Serial Module section: To send a message through a serial module to a serial device, choose Enabled from
the drop-down list. Enter a mask representing the modules and ports to receive the message.
Information in “Configuring Serial or Wiegand Events and Reactions” on page 140 may be helpful.
10. SNMP section: To send an SNMP trap as the message, change Disabled to Enabled. Enter how often to
send the trap (0 sends it only once). Also enter the trap type (determined by your SNMP management
software). If you are using SNMP with outgoing PPP and want the trap stored in the I/O unit until the next
communication, set Priority to Low. If you want the I/O unit to immediately dial out and send the trap, set
Priority to High.
For information on SNMP, see page 96.
NOTE: SNMP messages must be acknowledged. You can do so in your application or in PAC Manager’s Inspect
window: in the Message section, change the State to Acknowledge and click Apply.

11. Memmap Copy Destination section: To copy memory map data, complete this section using information
from “Copying Memory Map Data” on page 109.
12. When all fields are correct, click Apply.
13. Repeat from step 4 to configure additional event messages.
14. For each type of message you configure, make sure you also set up basic configuration:

Serial: See page 47

SNMP: See page 96
Email: See page 100
Streaming: See page 104

15. When you have finished configuring all event messages and any additional configuration required for
them, in the PAC Manager Inspect window, make sure the IP address shown is the correct one. Then click
the Status Write button in the upper-left part of the window.

144 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 4: SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS

16. In the Operation Commands list, highlight Store configuration to flash.

17. Click Send Command.

The configuration data is stored to flash memory and a Success message appears.

IMPORTANT: For the following configurations, you must also restart the unit for configuration to take effect:
Changes in TCP port for serial modules SNMP configuration
Email configuration PPP configuration
Data logging interval

18. If you have configured any of these items, in the Operation Commands list, highlight Restart I/O Unit
from powerup. Click Send Command.
The I/O unit is restarted and a success message appears.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 145

CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES

146 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 5: Reading and Writing to Specific
Devices

INTRODUCTION
This chapter shows you how to read and write to a SNAP PAC controller or I/O unit directly by using PAC
Manager’s Inspect window. In addition to reading and writing specific values, you can configure points and
functions using the steps in this chapter. However, these configurations cannot be saved to a
configuration file.
Because all reads and writes using the steps in this chapter are sent directly to the controller or I/O unit, the
device you are reading from or writing to must be on the same network as your PC or laptop computer. For a
SNAP PAC SB brain, you can read or write to the brain through a SNAP PAC S-series controller, or you can
connect the computer directly to the brain using a PCI-AC48 adapter card and a serial cable. For more
information on these connections, see the SNAP PAC Brains User’s Guide (form 1690).
CAUTION—If you are using PAC Control: When you read and write to specific devices using the instructions in this
chapter, the reads and writes occur independently of PAC Control strategy logic. If you are using PAC Control, you
normally use the flowchart logic in the PAC Control strategy to read and write to the I/O unit. It’s not a problem to
read directly, but if you use the instructions in this chapter t to write to an I/O unit, be very careful that your actions
do not conflict with PAC Control logic.

As you use PAC Manager’s Inspect window, you’ll notice that the starting memory map address for each item
is shown. This can be a handy way to determine addresses you need for programming or configuration. You
can also highlight an address and right-click it to copy it; then you can paste it where you are using it.
You can also copy and paste part or all of the data you read in the Inspect window. Just highlight the data you
want to copy and use standard Microsoft® Windows® commands such as Ctrl+C to copy the data, and Ctrl+V
to paste it into a text, email, or other file.

READING BASIC DEVICE INFORMATION

1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
2. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button (or in the PAC Manager menu bar, click
ToolsInspect).
The Inspect window opens.
– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, no data is displayed in the Status Read pane.
– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 147

READING BASIC DEVICE INFORMATION

– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.

– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list
of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

3. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the controller or I/O unit (or choose it from the
drop-down list). Click Status Read.

148 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

Information from the device is displayed in the window.

Date and time data was last read

Click to update data

Scroll down to see all of the information. Data is current as of the date and time shown in the Status field
at the top right corner of the window. (Note that date and time are from the computer, not from the I/O
unit.) To update data, click the Refresh button. See the next two pages for help in interpreting data.

Interpreting Status Data

The following table may help you interpret the information you see in the Status Read window. Some items
may not appear, depending on the Opto 22 device you are using. Some of this information can be changed
(see page 152). Much of it is used only for troubleshooting. If you have additional questions about status data,
contact Product Support (see page 4).
The term “device” is used in this table to refer to a SNAP PAC brain or controller.

Description Explanation
Since a powerup clear (PUC) is automatically sent by the device whenever it is turned
Powerup Clear Flag PUC needed
on, this value should show PUC Received.
Busy Flag Zero means the device is not busy and can process your requests.
Revision number of the device’s loader. The loader is like a basic input/output system
Loader Version
(BIOS).
Memory Map Version Revision number of the device’s memory map
(PAC-R and PAC-S only) Whether the PAC booted from its Flash memory or from a
Current Boot Device
microSD card

PAC Manager User’s Guide 149

READING BASIC DEVICE INFORMATION

Description Explanation
Firmware Version
Firmware Version Date Revision number of the device’s firmware, and the date and time of the revision
Firmware Version Time
Unit Type Hex code indicating the device type.
Unit Description Part number of the device (brain or controller)
I/O Unit Hardware Revision (Month)
I/O Unit Hardware Revision (Day) Version date of the device’s hardware
I/O Unit Hardware Revision (Year)
(Applicable to rack-mounted controllers and brains manufactured starting in 2016.)
Revision number of the I/O coprocessor firmware. If the value is 0 (zero) or A0.0a,
I/O Coprocessor Firmware Version
your device does not have an I/O coprocessor.
For more information, see the SNAP PAC I/O Coprocessor Firmware Readme.
Installed Ram Number of bytes of RAM in the device
Product Serial Number (SB brains only) Barcoded product number inside the brain
Address (SB brains only) Current serial address of the brain
Baud Rate (SB brains only) Current baud rate of the brain
(SB brains only) A serial transmission error; normally zero. If it’s not zero, verify baud
Number of Framing Errors
rate or check for noise on the serial bus.
(SB brains only) Normally zero. Any value other than zero indicates that serial charac-
Number of FIFO Overrun Errors
ters are being dropped.
(SB brains only) A value of 1 indicates that Communication Error Blink Codes are
Communications Debug Flag
enabled. See the brain user’s guide for details.
Unique hardware Media Access Control (MAC) identifier for the device, assigned at
MAC Address
the Opto 22 factory. MAC addresses for all Opto 22 devices start with 00-A0-3D.
IP Address
IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for the device on the Ethernet network.
Subnet Mask
You assign these numbers; see page 8.
Gateway
DNS or Name Server Not currently used; leave at 0.0.0.0
(SNAP PAC controllers only) Unique hardware Media Access Control (MAC) identifier
Ethernet 2 MAC Address
for the second Ethernet interface on the device.
Ethernet 2 IP Address
(SNAP PAC controllers only) IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for the
Ethernet 2 Subnet Mask second
Ethernet interface on the device. You assign these numbers; see page 19.
Ethernet 2 Gateway
Ethernet 2 DNS (SNAP PAC controllers only) Not currently used; leave at 0.0.0.0
(Wired+Wireless devices only) Unique hardware Media Access Control (MAC) identi-
Wireless LAN MAC Address
fier for the device’s wireless LAN interface.
WLAN IP Address
WLAN Subnet Mask (Wired+Wireless devices only) IP address, subnet mask, and gateways for the wire-
WLAN Primary Gateway less LAN interface on the device. You assign these numbers; see page 23.

WLAN Secondary Gateway

WLAN Primary DNS
(Wired+Wireless devices only) Not currently used; leave at 0.0.0.0
WLAN Secondary DNS

150 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

Description Explanation
A value of 0 (the normal setting) means the device sends a request (a BootP or DHCP
request) for an IP address only if its IP address is 0.0.0.0. A value of 1 means the
Always BootP/DHCP On Powerup
device sends a BootP or DHCP request every time it is turned on. See page 8 for more
information.
Whether temperatures on the I/O unit are handled in Fahrenheit or Celsius. Set when
Degrees F/C1
you configure the I/O unit (page 32). Celsius is the default.
If the I/O unit has a watchdog, the watchdog timeout in milliseconds. Set when you
Comm Watchdog Time (msec)1
configure the I/O unit (page 32). Default is 0 (no watchdog).
Only for SNAP PAC analog input modules that return 16-bit values. If a value goes out
Out of Range Value (16-bit) of range, this number appears as the value. Default is -32,768. Can be changed; see
page 152.
Only for SNAP PAC analog input modules that return 32-bit values, such as the
SNAP-AIRATE-HFi and SNAP-AIRTD-8U modules. If a value goes out of range, this
Out of Range Value (32-bit)
number appears as the value. Default is -2147483648. Can be changed; see
page 152.
Shows scanner and control engine options. Value can be any of the following or a
combination of them, in hex. See “Scanner Flags” for more information.
1 = Alarms are being processed in the digital scanner rather than the analog scanner.1
2 = Analog/HDD scanner is disabled. (Disables scanning of high-density digital mod-
Scanner Flags
ules as well as analog modules.)1
4 = Digital scanner is disabled.1
8 = (applies to all standalone and on-the-rack controllers) PAC Control engine is
stopped.
Shows the number of times the processor (brain or on-the-rack controller) has
4-Channel Digital Scan Count1 scanned the digital points for 4-channel digital modules on the I/O unit. Can be used
for benchmarking.
Shows the number of times the processor has scanned the analog and high-density
Analog & High Density Dig Scan Count1
digital module points on the I/O unit. Can be used for benchmarking.
Milliseconds since the last time the device was turned on. Value rolls over after
Milliseconds Since Powerup
4,294,967,295 ms, which is equal to 49.71 days.
Time since the device was last turned on. Time is shown in the format
Elapsed Time Since Powerup
days:hh:mm:ss
TCP Minimum RTO (msec.)
TCP Initial RTO (msec.)
TCP communication settings; see page 227.
TCP Retransmits
TCP Idle Session Timeout (msec.)
TCP Idle Session Timeout Count Number of times the device closed the session because it was idle.
Ethernet Errors: Late Collisions
Ethernet Errors: Excessive Collisions Values other than 0 may indicate network problems. See page 229.
Ethernet Errors: Others
Mask in hex showing location of analog, serial, and high-density digital modules on the
Smart Modules Present1 rack. Module 15 is in bit position 15; module 0 is in bit position 0. (For help in under-
standing masks, see “Mask Data” on page 195.)
Maximum number of PID loops possible on the device (96 on PAC-R, EB, and SB
PID Loops Supported
brains). See page 64.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 151

READING BASIC DEVICE INFORMATION

Description Explanation
Number of 4-channel digital modules supported (0, 8, or 16).
Added in PAC firmware 8.1; older firmware doesn’t include this address. Useful for
SNAP-PAC-R1 and SNAP-PAC-R1-B.
Digital Modules Supported Due to B-series rack limitations, R1-Bs support 4-channel I/O
modules only in the first 8 rack positions.
R1s with serial numbers below 600,000 support 8 digital modules in the first 8 rack
positions; newer R1s support 16.
Indicates that a smart module has been added, removed, or reset. (ARCNET is used
on the rack for communication between the processor and analog, serial, or high-den-
Arcnet Reconfigs Detected1
sity digital modules.) NOTE: If the rack contains only 4-channel digital modules, ignore
this value.
Arcnet Reconfigs Initiated by I/O Unit1 Error on the rack’s ARCNET bus. Not a concern unless it happens frequently.
Arcnet Transmit Attempts Since Powerup1
Arcnet ACKs1
Arcnet Timeouts1 Refers to the ARCNET bus on the rack. May be useful in troubleshooting communica-
Arcnet Other (node not found, etc.)1 tion to analog, serial, or high-density digital modules.

Arcnet Timeout Value (msec.)1

Arcnet Receive Interrupts1
Ethernet MAC Resets Since Powerup
Caused by EMI, RFI, or other electrical noise.
Dig. Output Point Resets Since Powerup1,2
Related to digital counters. May have missed counts. Contact Opto 22 Product Sup-
Dig. Interrupt Failures Since Powerup1
port.
(milliseconds per scan) Average length of time the processor takes to scan all analog
and high-density digital points on the rack. Based on the last 100 scans (last 50 scans
Analog & High Density Digital Scanner1
for points on high-density digital modules, as they are included in every second scan).
A value of -1 means the scanner is not running.
(milliseconds per scan) Average length of time the processor takes to scan all 4-chan-
4-Channel Digital Scanner1 nel digital points on the rack, based on the last 100 scans. A value of -1 means the
scanner is not running.
How many times the processor has rediscovered a smart module (analog, serial,
Module X - Times Discovered1 high-density digital). Normal value is zero; values over 1 may indicate that a module is
resetting.
1
Does not apply to SNAP PAC S-series and SoftPAC controllers

Changing Status Data

The following items in the Status Read/Status Write windows can be changed in PAC Manager if the device
supports them.

Always BootP/DHCP on Powerup Out of Range Value (16-bit)

Degrees F/C Out of Range Value (32-bit)
Comm Watchdog Time Scanner Flags
TCP Settings Domain Name
Digital Feature Scan Interval Strategy Download Method
Max Analog and High Density Digital Scan Interval Turnaround Delay
Communication Error Blink Codes
Ethernet 2 Interface Settings

152 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .

The Inspect window opens.
– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, no data is displayed in the Status Read pane.
– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.
– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.

– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list
of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

2. In the Device Name field, type the name of the device (or choose it from the drop-down list).

PAC Manager User’s Guide 153

READING BASIC DEVICE INFORMATION

3. Click Status Write.

Items that can be changed are listed in the upper section of the dialog box. To change one, click its Value
field and either choose from the drop-down list or enter the new value as described below:
Always BootP/DHCP on Powerup (All devices): If you change this field to Yes, the current IP address
becomes temporary and the device will send a BootP broadcast the next time it is turned on. If you
change this field to No, the current IP address is saved to flash memory and becomes a static IP address.
Degrees F/C and Comm Watchdog Time (I/O units only): Changes settings for the whole I/O unit.
IMPORTANT: Set Degrees F/C before configuring temperature inputs. If some inputs are already
configured, reset their Upper and Lower Scaled Units after changing Degrees F/C.
TCP settings: CAUTION: Before changing TCP settings, see page 227.
Digital Feature Scan Interval and Max Analog and High Density Digital Scan Interval (I/O units
only): Default is 1000 milliseconds for analog and 1 milliseconds for digital. You can decrease the scan
interval (to make it scan more frequently) to make sure the scanner isn’t slowed or stopped by heavy
communication on the network. You can also shut down the scanner immediately by changing its scan
interval value to -1 (does not require restarting the I/O unit). As of PAC firmware version 8.1, analog
modules with more than 4 points are scanned no faster than every 30 milliseconds, and analog modules
with four or fewer points are scanned no faster than every 6 milliseconds, to maintain synchronization
with the module. Note that scan interval changes revert to default values when power is lost, unless you
save your changes to flash.
Out of Range Value (16-Bit) and Out of Range Value (32-Bit): Set the value that an analog input
module returns when a signal is above or below a defined range. If the default out-of-range value is
potentially a valid in-range value, you can enter a different value to indicate an out-of-range condition.
Most SNAP analog input modules use the 16-bit out-of-range value, which has a default value of -32,768.
Analog input modules that return a 32-bit value (such as the SNAP-AIRATE-HFi and SNAP-AIRTD-8U
modules) use the 32-bit out-of-range value, whose default value is -2147483648.
Scanner Flags: To change the way scanners work or stop/start the control engine, enter one or a
combination of the following values in hex.
– (I/O units only) To process alarms in the digital scanner rather than the analog scanner, enter 1.

154 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

– (I/O units only) To disable the analog scanner, enter 2.

– (I/O units only) To disable the digital scanner, enter 4.
– (PAC-R only) To stop the PAC Control engine runtime, enter 8.
For example, if you have a SNAP-PAC-R1 I/O unit with digital I/O only and are not using a PAC Control
strategy, you can get faster reactions to events by entering 1 + 2 + 8, which would be 0x0000000B. NOTE:
You must save to flash and restart for this change to take effect.
Strategy Download Method (SNAP PAC controllers only): Choose Background to enable background
downloading. (For details, see the PAC Control User’s Guide, form 1700).
Turnaround Delay (controllers or brains with serial ports): Enter how long the controller or brain should
wait to send a response to serial communication. Default is zero (no delay).
Communication Error Blink Codes (SB brains only): For troubleshooting, choose Enabled from the
drop-down list to see communication error blink codes. (See the Troubleshooting section in the brain
user’s guide for details.) Be sure you turn off blink codes after troubleshooting; they will degrade
performance.
Ethernet 2 IP Address information (SNAP PAC controllers only): See “Assigning an IP Address to Ethernet
2 (SNAP PAC Controller Only)” on page 19 for information.
4. When you have finished entering changes, click Apply.
Most changes take effect immediately. If you change the Scanner Flags, secondary IP address
information, or strategy download method, however, you must store the configuration to flash and
then restart the controller or brain. See also “Assigning an IP Address to Ethernet 2 (SNAP PAC Controller
Only)” on page 19.

Referencing I/O Points

The following sections show input and output point numbers for I/O units.
For SNAP serial communication modules, see page 156. You will also need the SNAP Serial
Communication Module User’s Guide (form 1191).
CAUTION: Make certain you are using the correct rack for the processor. Using an incompatible rack can cause
severe damage to the brain or controller.

SNAP PAC Racks

Use any of these racks With any of these processors
SNAP-PAC-RCK4
SNAP-PAC-R1, SNAP-PAC-R1-FM*, SNAP-PAC-R1-W*
SNAP-PAC-RCK4-FM*
SNAP-PAC-R2, SNAP-PAC-R2-FM*, SNAP-PAC-R2-W*
SNAP-PAC-RCK8
SNAP-PAC-EB1*, SNAP-PAC-EB1-FM*, SNAP-PAC-EB1-W*
SNAP-PAC-RCK8-FM*
SNAP-PAC-EB2*, SNAP-PAC-EB2-FM*, SNAP-PAC-EB2-W*
SNAP-PAC-RCK12
SNAP-PAC-SB1*
SNAP-PAC-RCK12-FM*
SNAP-PAC-SB2 *
SNAP-PAC-RCK16 SNAP-PAC-RCK16-FM*
* Obsolete part number

SNAP PAC mounting racks can hold up to 4, 8, 12, or 16 Opto 22 SNAP I/O modules. Point features and
modules supported vary by processor; see the processor’s data sheet for specifications.
Each module contains 1 to 32 channels (points), depending on the module. Examples of modules are shown
in the following diagram.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 155

READING BASIC DEVICE INFORMATION

Module position 0, 4-ch digital:

Channels: 3 2 1 0

Module position 6, high-density

digital:

Channels: 31 0 Module position 8, analog:

Channels
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
:

Module position 12, analog:

Channels: 1 0
Module position 14, serial:

Ports: B A

Serial Modules
NOTE: Serial modules cannot be used with SNAP PAC SB brains.

SNAP-SCM-232, SNAP-SCM-485, SNAP-SCM-485-422, and SNAP-SCM-W2 modules each have two serial ports,
A and B. Profibus modules (SNAP-SCM-PROFI) have one serial port.
To establish an Ethernet connection between the SNAP PAC I/O unit and a serial module, you use the IP
address of the I/O unit the module is on, plus the TCP port number for the module’s serial port. The following

156 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

table shows default port numbers for each port in each position on the largest rack. For a Profibus module, use
the Port A port number.
Module Module
Port TCP port Number Port TCP port Number
Position Position
A 22500 A 22516
0 8
B 22501 B 22517
A 22502 A 22518
1 9
B 22503 B 22519
A 22504 A 22520
2 10
B 22505 B 22521
A 22506 A 22522
3 11
B 22507 B 22523
A 22508 A 22524
4 12
B 22509 B 22525
A 22510 A 22526
5 13
B 22511 B 22527
A 22512 A 22528
6 14
B 22513 B 22529
A 22514 A 22530
7 15
B 22515 B 22531

These port numbers can be changed if necessary. See page 47 for instructions.

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES, POINTS, AND FEATURES

Before you can read or write to I/O points, you must configure point types and point features. You can do so
using PAC Manager’s Inspect window. Remember, however, that configurations you set in the Inspect window
cannot be saved to a configuration file. They are sent directly to an individual I/O unit. To use a configuration
file, see “Chapter 2: Configuring Devices,” especially “Configuring I/O Modules and Points” on page 36.

Point Types Requiring Configuration

The SNAP PAC I/O processor can recognize analog, serial, and high-density digital modules, and it assumes a
default configuration for all points on those modules. Any module position not occupied by an analog, serial,
or high-density module is assumed to be a 4-channel digital input module.
You’ll need to configure the following point types:
• All digital output points on 4-channel digital modules. Use point type 180.
• Analog points that do not use the default point type for the module. For example, if the points on a
SNAP-AIRTD module are 120 Ohm Nickel 3-wire RTDs (–80 to +260 °C), they must be configured,
because the default for that module is 100 Ohm Platinum 3-wire RTDs (–200 to +850 °C). Point types for
analog modules are shown in the tables beginning on page 160. Default point types are indicated.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 157

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES, POINTS, AND FEATURES

Point Features Requiring Configuration

Point features vary based on the processor and the module. The following point features are not automatic
and must be configured for each point that uses them:
• High-speed digital input counters and quadrature counters
• Digital and analog watchdogs
• Analog scaling, clamping, offset and gain, and average filter weight
See “Using I/O Point Features” on page 71 for a description of features.

Configuring Analog and Digital Points and Features

1. .In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
The Inspect window opens.

2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the I/O unit (or choose it from the drop-down
list). Click Point Config.

158 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

Module position number

Point numbers for this module are

shown in yellow.

Point zero is currently being read

here. Since this is not an analog
point, analog values are grayed
out.

To update values, click the Refresh

button. To modify values, change
the parameters (if applicable) and
click Apply.

Module position numbers are shown near the top of the page; point numbers for multi-point modules
are shown below. For more information on locating modules and points, see “Referencing I/O Points” on
page 155.
3. Click the module position and the point number you want to view or configure.
4. Choose or enter the following as necessary for the point.
a. Choose the point type from the drop-down list.
For help, see “Point Type Configuration Tables” on page 160 and “Using I/O Point Features” on
page 71.
b. Configure digital input counters in the Point Feature field as shown below:

0x00000000 Disables all digital point features

0x00000001 Enables and starts counter on digital input

0x00000004 Simple quadrature counter input (requires SNAP quadrature input module)

0x00000041 Quadrature counter input with index (requires SNAP quadrature input module)

c. For automatic reaction to analog or digital watchdogs, enable the watchdog and enter the value
that the output point should be set to if the watchdog is tripped.
d. (Analog points only) To set offset and gain for the point manually, enter values in those fields. (To
have the processor compute offset and gain, see “Calibrating Offset and Gain Using the Default
Method” on page 174.)
e. (Analog points only) Set upper and lower scaled units, filter weight, and upper and lower clamps as
necessary. (For help, see “Using I/O Point Features” on page 71.)
5. When all lines are correct, click Apply to send the configuration to the I/O unit.
All other points on the same module are automatically configured with the same features and the same
point name.
6. Click another point on the same module and change its point name and features as necessary.
7. Repeat steps for each module you need to configure.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 159

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES, POINTS, AND FEATURES

To save configuration to flash memory, see “Saving Configuration to a Device’s Flash Memory” on
page 190.

Point Type Configuration Tables

The following tables help you configure points by showing the part number, the point type in decimal and in
hex, and the module type in hex (module type is read-only). For analog modules, tables also include the
number of points per module, the unit of measurement for the module, and its range.

Digital Input and Output Modules page 160

Analog Input Modules page 160
page 166

Digital Input and Output Modules

Module & Description Point Type (Dec) Point Type (Hex) Module Type (Hex)
Digital input module* 256 100 00
Digital output module* 384 180 00
* Does not apply to SNAP high-density digital modules, which are recognized by the processor.

Analog Input Modules

Use this data for configuring point types and features (see page 157). If a module has multiple listings, the
default point type is shaded.
Channels per Module
Channel Type (Dec)

Channel Type (Hex)

Module Type (Hex)

Default Unit of
Measurement

Underrange

Overrange
Low Scale

Full Scale
Part Number &
Description

SNAP-AIARMS: 0–10 A AC/DC 71 47 71 2 A 0.0 0.0 10.0 11.0

SNAP-AIARMS-i: 0–10 A AC/DC 71 47 29 2 A 0.0 0.0 10.0 11.0
SNAP-AIARMS-i-FM*: 0–10 A AC/DC 71 47 29 2 A 0.0 0.0 10.0 11.0
SNAP-AICTD: ICTD Temp. Probe 4 4 04 2 Degrees C -273.0 -40.0 150.0 150.0
SNAP-AICTD-4: ICTD Temp. Probe 4 4 42 4 Degrees C -273.0 -40.0 150.0 150.0
SNAP-AICTD-8: ICTD Temp. Probe 4 4 4C 8 Degrees C -273.0 -40.0 150.0 150.0
SNAP-AILC: -2 to +2 mV/V Fast 34 22 0B 2 Percent -110.0 -100.0 100.0 110.0
SNAP-AILC: -2 to +2 mV/V Slow 36 24 0B 2 Percent -110.0 -100.0 100.0 110.0
SNAP-AILC: -3 to +3 mV/V Fast 35 23 0B 2 Percent -110.0 -100.0 100.0 110.0
SNAP-AILC: -3 to +3 mV/V Slow 37 25 0B 2 Percent -110.0 -100.0 100.0 110.0
SNAP-AILC: Filter of 1st channel 0 0 0B 2 Percent -110.0 -100.0 100.0 110.0
SNAP-AILC-2: -3 to +3 mV/V Fast 35 23 0C 2 Percent -110.0 -100.0 100.0 110.0
SNAP-AILC-2: -3 to +3 mV/V Slow 37 25 0C 2 Percent -110.0 -100.0 100.0 110.0
SNAP-AILC-2: -4 to +4 mV/V Fast 34 22 0C 2 Percent -110.0 -100.0 100.0 110.0
SNAP-AILC-2: -4 to +4 mV/V Slow 36 24 0C 2 Percent -110.0 -100.0 100.0 110.0
SNAP-AILC-2: Filter of 1st channel 0 0 0C 2 Percent -110.0 -100.0 100.0 110.0

160 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

Channels per Module

Channel Type (Dec)

Channel Type (Hex)

Module Type (Hex)

Default Unit of
Measurement

Underrange

Overrange
Low Scale

Full Scale
Part Number &
Description

SNAP-AIMA: -20 to +20 mA 64 40 64 2 mA -22.0 -20.0 20.0 22.0

SNAP-AIMA: 0 to +20 mA 2 2 64 2 mA -22.0 0.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA: 4 to +20 mA 3 3 64 2 mA -22.0 4.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA2-i: -1 to +1 mA 85 55 27 2 mA -1.1 -1.0 1.0 1.1
SNAP-AIMA-i: -20 to +20 mA 64 40 22 2 mA -22.0 -20.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-i: 0 to +20 mA 2 2 22 2 mA -22.0 0.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-i: 4 to +20 mA 3 3 22 2 mA -22.0 4.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-iH: 4 to +20 mA 3 3 2A 2 mA 3.2 4.0 20.0 24.0
SNAP-AIMA-iSRC: -20 to +20 mA 64 40 26 2 mA -22.0 -20.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-iSRC: 0 to +20 mA 2 2 26 2 mA -22.0 0.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-iSRC: 4 to +20 mA 3 3 26 2 mA -22.0 4.0 20.0 22.0
*
SNAP-AIMA-iSRC-FM : -20 to +20 mA 64 40 26 2 mA -22.0 -20.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-iSRC-FM: 0 to +20 mA 2 2 26 2 mA -22.0 0.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-iSRC-FM: 4 to +20 mA 3 3 26 2 mA -22.0 4.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-4: -20 to +20 mA 64 40 40 4 mA -22.0 -20.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-4: 0 to +20 mA 2 2 40 4 mA -22.0 0.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-4: 4 to +20 mA 3 3 40 4 mA -22.0 4.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-8: -20 to +20 mA 64 40 4A 8 mA -22.0 -20.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-8: 0 to +20 mA 2 2 4A 8 mA -22.0 0.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-8: 4 to +20 mA 3 3 4A 8 mA -22.0 4.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-32: -20 to +20 mA 64 40 4D 32 mA -22.0 -20.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-32: 0 to +20 mA 2 2 4D 32 mA -22.0 0.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-32: 4 to +20 mA 3 3 4D 32 mA -22.0 4.0 20.0 22.0
*
SNAP-AIMA-32-FM : -20 to +20 mA 64 40 4D 32 mA -22.0 -20.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-32-FM: 0 to +20 mA 2 2 4D 32 mA -22.0 0.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMA-32-FM: 4 to +20 mA 3 3 4D 32 mA -22.0 4.0 20.0 22.0
SNAP-AIMV-4: -150 to +150 mV 66 42 44 4 mV -165.0 -150.0 150.0 165.0
SNAP-AIMV-4: -75 to +75 mV 68 44 44 4 mV -82.5 -75.0 75.0 82.5
SNAP-AIMV2-4: -50 to +50 mV 9 9 45 4 mV -55.0 -50.0 50.0 55.0
SNAP-AIMV2-4: -25 to +25 mV 67 43 45 4 mV -27.5 -25.0 25.0 27.5
SNAP-AIPM (channel 0 only) 70 46 0A ** AC VRMS 0.0 0 250 275
SNAP-AIPM (channel 1 only) 71 47 0A ** AC ARMS 0.0 0 10 11.0
SNAP-AIPM (channel 2 only) 82 52 0A ** True power n/a n/a n/a n/a
SNAP-AIPM (channel 3 only) 83 53 0A ** Volt/Amps n/a n/a n/a n/a
SNAP-AIPM-3 (channels 0, 4 & 8) 70 46 49 ** AC VRMS 0.0 0 300 330
SNAP-AIPM-3 (channels 1, 5 & 9) 71 47 49 ** AC ARMS 0.0 0 5 5.5

PAC Manager User’s Guide 161

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES, POINTS, AND FEATURES

Channels per Module

Channel Type (Dec)

Channel Type (Hex)

Module Type (Hex)

Default Unit of
Measurement

Underrange

Overrange
Low Scale

Full Scale
Part Number &
Description

SNAP-AIPM-3 (channels 2, 6 & 10) 82 52 49 ** True power n/a n/a n/a n/a
SNAP-AIPM-3 (channels 3, 7 & 11) 83 53 49 ** Volt/Amps n/a n/a n/a n/a
SNAP-AIPM-3 (channels 12 & 13) 86 56 49 ** True power n/a n/a n/a n/a
SNAP-AIPM-3V (channels 0, 4 & 8) 100 64 48 ** AC VRMS 0.0 0 300 330
SNAP-AIPM-3V (channels 1, 5 & 9) 89 59 48 ** VAC from CT 0.0 0 0.333 0.366
SNAP-AIPM-3V (channels 2, 6 & 10) 90 5A 48 ** True power n/a n/a n/a n/a
SNAP-AIPM-3V (channels 3, 7 & 11) 90 5A 48 ** Volt/Amps n/a n/a n/a n/a
SNAP-AIPM-3V (channels 12 & 13) 184 B8 48 ** True power n/a n/a n/a n/a
SNAP-AIRATE: Rate (Frequency) 69 45 69 2 Hz 0.0 0.0 25000.0 27500.0
SNAP-AIRATE-HFi: Rate (0.1 s data
68 44 2B 2 Hz 2 2 500,000 500,000
freshness)
SNAP-AIRATE-HFi: Rate (1 s data
69 45 2B 2 Hz 20 20 500,000 500,000
freshness)
SNAP-AIRTD: 100 Ohm Pt 3-wire 10 0A 10 2 Degrees C -200.0 -200.0 850.0 850.0
SNAP-AIRTD: 100 Ohm Ni 3-wire 46 2E 10 2 Degrees C -60.0 -60.0 250.0 250.0
SNAP-AIRTD: 0–400 Ohms, Lead
15 0F 10 2 Ohms 0 0 400 440
Compensated
SNAP-AIRTD: 120 Ohm Ni 3-wire 48 30 10 2 Degrees C -80.0 -80.0 260.0 260.0
SNAP-AIRTD-10: 10 Ohm Cu 3-wire 14 0E 0E 2 Degrees C -180.0 -180.0 260.0 260.0
SNAP-AIRTD-10: 0–25 Ohms, Lead
15 0F 0E 2 Ohms 0 0 25 27.5
Compensated
SNAP-AIRTD-1K: 1000 Ohm Pt 3-wire 92 5C 0F 2 Degrees C -200.0 -200.0 850.0 850.0
SNAP-AIRTD-1K: 1000 Ohm Ni 3-wire 93 5D 0F 2 Degrees C -60.0 -60.0 250.0 250.0
SNAP-AIRTD-1K: 1000 Ohm Ni 3-wire 94 5E 0F 2 Degrees F -50.0 -50.0 275.0 275.0
SNAP-AIRTD-1K: 0–4000 Ohms, Lead
15 0F 0F 2 Ohms 0 0 4000 4400
Compensated
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–8000 Ohms - Fixed 155 9B 55 8 Ohms 0 0 8000 8800
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 1000 Ohm Ni 3-wire @
182 B6 55 8 Degrees F -46 -46 148.9 148.9
70° F
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 1000 Ohm Ni 3-wire @
181 B5 55 8 Degrees C -40 -40 135 135
0 °C
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 1000 Ohm Pt @ 0 °C 180 B4 55 8 Degrees C -200 -200 850 850
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 120 Ohm Ni @ 0 °C 179 B3 55 8 Degrees C -80 -80 260 260
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 100 Ohm Ni @ 0 °C 178 B2 55 8 Degrees C -60 -60 250 250
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 100 Ohm Pt @ 0 °C 177 B1 55 8 Degrees C -200 -200 850 850
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 10 Ohm Cu 176 B0 55 8 Degrees C -60 -60 355 355
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–8000 Ohms - Auto 171 AB 55 8 Ohms 0 0 8000 8800
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–4000 Ohms - Auto 170 AA 55 8 Ohms 0 0 4000 4400
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–2000 Ohms - Auto 169 A9 55 8 Ohms 0 0 2000 2200

162 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

Channels per Module

Channel Type (Dec)

Channel Type (Hex)

Module Type (Hex)

Default Unit of
Measurement

Underrange

Overrange
Low Scale

Full Scale
Part Number &
Description

SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–1000 Ohms - Auto 168 A8 55 8 Ohms 0 0 1000 1100

SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–800 Ohms - Auto 167 A7 55 8 Ohms 0 0 800 880
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–400 Ohms - Auto 166 A6 55 8 Ohms 0 0 400 440
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–200 Ohms - Auto 165 A5 55 8 Ohms 0 0 200 220
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–100 Ohms - Auto 164 A4 55 8 Ohms 0 0 100 110
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–80 Ohms - Auto 163 A3 55 8 Ohms 0 0 80 88
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–40 Ohms - Auto 162 A2 55 8 Ohms 0 0 40 44
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–20 Ohms - Auto 161 A1 55 8 Ohms 0 0 20 22
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–10 Ohms - Auto 160 A0 55 8 Ohms 0 0 10 11
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–4000 Ohms - Fixed 154 9A 55 8 Ohms 0 0 4000 4400
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–2000 Ohms - Fixed 153 99 55 8 Ohms 0 0 2000 2200
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–1000 Ohms - Fixed 152 98 55 8 Ohms 0 0 1000 1100
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–800 Ohms - Fixed 151 97 55 8 Ohms 0 0 800 880
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–400 Ohms - Fixed 150 96 55 8 Ohms 0 0 400 440
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–200 Ohms - Fixed 149 95 55 8 Ohms 0 0 200 220
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–100 Ohms - Fixed 148 94 55 8 Ohms 0 0 100 110
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–80 Ohms - Fixed 147 93 55 8 Ohms 0 0 80 88
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–40 Ohms - Fixed 146 92 55 8 Ohms 0 0 40 44
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–20 Ohms - Fixed 145 91 55 8 Ohms 0 0 20 22
SNAP-AIRTD-8U: 0–10 Ohms - Fixed 144 90 55 8 Ohms 0 0 10 11
SNAP-AITM: -150 to +150 mV 66 42 66 2 mV -165.0 -150.0 150.0 165.0
SNAP-AITM: -75 to +75 mV 68 44 66 2 mV -82.5 -75.0 75.0 82.5
SNAP-AITM: Type E Thermocouple 19 13 66 2 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1000.0 1000.0
SNAP-AITM: Type J Thermocouple 5 5 66 2 Degrees C -210.0 -210.0 1200.0 1200.0
SNAP-AITM: Type K Thermocouple 8 8 66 2 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1372.0 1372.0
SNAP-AITM-i: -150 to +150 mV 66 42 20 2 mV -165.0 -150.0 150.0 165.0
SNAP-AITM-i: -75 to +75 mV 68 44 20 2 mV -82.5 -75.0 75.0 82.5
SNAP-AITM-i: Type E Thermocouple 19 13 20 2 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1000.0 1000.0
SNAP-AITM-i: Type J Thermocouple 5 5 20 2 Degrees C -210.0 -210.0 1200.0 1200.0
SNAP-AITM-i: Type K Thermocouple 8 8 20 2 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1372.0 1372.0
SNAP-AITM-4i: -150 to +150 mV 66 42 32 4 mV -165.0 -150.0 150.0 165.0
SNAP-AITM-4i: -75 to +75 mV 68 44 32 4 mV -82.5 -75.0 75 82.5
SNAP-AITM-4i: -50 to +50 mV 9 9 32 4 mV -55.0 -50.0 50.0 55.0
SNAP-AITM-4i: -25 to +25 mV 67 43 32 4 mV -27.5 -25.0 25.0 27.5
SNAP-AITM-4i: Type B Thermocouple 24 18 32 4 Degrees C 42.0 42.0 1820.0 1820.0
SNAP-AITM-4i: Type C Thermocouple 32 20 32 4 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0

PAC Manager User’s Guide 163

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES, POINTS, AND FEATURES

Channels per Module

Channel Type (Dec)

Channel Type (Hex)

Module Type (Hex)

Default Unit of
Measurement

Underrange

Overrange
Low Scale

Full Scale
Part Number &
Description

SNAP-AITM-4i: Type D Thermocouple 33 21 32 4 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0

SNAP-AITM-4i: Type E Thermocouple 19 13 32 4 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1000.0 1000.0
SNAP-AITM-4i: Type G Thermocouple 31 1F 32 4 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM-4i: Type J Thermocouple 5 5 32 4 Degrees C -210.0 -210.0 1200.0 1200.0
SNAP-AITM-4i: Type K Thermocouple 8 8 32 4 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1372.0 1372.0
SNAP-AITM-4i: Type N Thermocouple 30 1E 32 4 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1300.0 1300.0
SNAP-AITM-4i: Type R Thermocouple 17 11 32 4 Degrees C -50.0 -50.0 1768.0 1768.0
SNAP-AITM-4i: Type S Thermocouple 23 17 32 4 Degrees C -50.0 -50.0 1768.0 1768.0
SNAP-AITM-4i: Type T Thermocouple 18 12 32 4 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 400.0 400.0
SNAP-AITM-8: -75 to +75 mV 68 44 4F 8 mV -82.5 -75.0 75.0 82.5
SNAP-AITM-8: -50 to +50 mV 9 9 4F 8 mV -55.0 -50.0 50.0 55.0
SNAP-AITM-8: -25 to +25 mV 67 43 4F 8 mV -27.5 -25.0 25.0 27.5
SNAP-AITM-8: Type B Thermocouple 24 18 4F 8 Degrees C 42.0 42.0 1820.0 1820.0
SNAP-AITM-8: Type C Thermocouple 32 20 4F 8 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM-8: Type D Thermocouple 33 21 4F 8 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM-8: Type E Thermocouple 19 13 4F 8 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1000.0 1000.0
SNAP-AITM-8: Type G Thermocouple 31 1F 4F 8 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM-8: Type J Thermocouple 5 5 4F 8 Degrees C -210.0 -210.0 1200.0 1200.0
SNAP-AITM-8: Type K Thermocouple 8 8 4F 8 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1372.0 1372.0
SNAP-AITM-8: Type N Thermocouple 30 1E 4F 8 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1300.0 1300.0
SNAP-AITM-8: Type R Thermocouple 17 11 4F 8 Degrees C -50.0 -50.0 1768.0 1768.0
SNAP-AITM-8: Type S Thermocouple 23 17 4F 8 Degrees C -50.0 -50.0 1768.0 1768.0
SNAP-AITM-8: Type T Thermocouple 18 12 4F 8 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 400.0 400.0
*
SNAP-AITM-8-FM : -75 to +75 mV 68 44 4F 8 mV -82.5 -75.0 75.0 82.5
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: -50 to +50 mV 9 9 4F 8 mV -55.0 -50.0 50.0 55.0
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: -25 to +25 mV 67 43 4F 8 mV -27.5 -25.0 25.0 27.5
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: Type B Thermocouple 24 18 4F 8 Degrees C 42.0 42.0 1820.0 1820.0
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: Type C Thermocouple 32 20 4F 8 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: Type D Thermocouple 33 21 4F 8 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: Type E Thermocouple 19 13 4F 8 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1000.0 1000.0
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: Type G Thermocouple 31 1F 4F 8 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: Type J Thermocouple 5 5 4F 8 Degrees C -210.0 -210.0 1200.0 1200.0
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: Type K Thermocouple 8 8 4F 8 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1372.0 1372.0
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: Type N Thermocouple 30 1E 4F 8 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1300.0 1300.0
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: Type R Thermocouple 17 11 4F 8 Degrees C -50.0 -50.0 1768.0 1768.0
SNAP-AITM-8-FM: Type S Thermocouple 23 17 4F 8 Degrees C -50.0 -50.0 1768.0 1768.0

164 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

Channels per Module

Channel Type (Dec)

Channel Type (Hex)

Module Type (Hex)

Default Unit of
Measurement

Underrange

Overrange
Low Scale

Full Scale
Part Number &
Description

SNAP-AITM-8-FM: Type T Thermocouple 18 12 4F 8 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 400.0 400.0

SNAP-AITM2: -50 to +50 mV 9 9 09 2 mV -55.0 -50.0 50.0 55.0
SNAP-AITM2: -25 to +25 mV 67 43 09 2 mV -27.5 -25.0 25.0 27.5
SNAP-AITM2: Type B Thermocouple 24 18 09 2 Degrees C 42.0 42.0 1820.0 1820.0
SNAP-AITM2: Type C Thermocouple 32 20 09 2 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM2: Type D Thermocouple 33 21 09 2 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM2: Type G Thermocouple 31 1F 09 2 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM2: Type N Thermocouple 30 1E 09 2 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1300.0 1300.0
SNAP-AITM2: Type R Thermocouple 17 11 09 2 Degrees C -50.0 -50.0 1768.0 1768.0
SNAP-AITM2: Type S Thermocouple 23 17 09 2 Degrees C -50.0 -50.0 1768.0 1768.0
SNAP-AITM2: Type T Thermocouple 18 12 09 2 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 400.0 400.0
SNAP-AITM2-i: -50 to +50 mV 9 9 21 2 mV -55.0 -50.0 50.0 55.0
SNAP-AITM2-i: -25 to +25 mV 67 43 21 2 mV -27.5 -25.0 25.0 27.5
SNAP-AITM2-i: Type B Thermocouple 24 18 21 2 Degrees C 42.0 42.0 1820.0 1820.0
SNAP-AITM2-i: Type C Thermocouple 32 20 21 2 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM2-i: Type D Thermocouple 33 21 21 2 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM2-i: Type G Thermocouple 31 1F 21 2 Degrees C 0.0 0.0 2320.0 2320.0
SNAP-AITM2-i: Type N Thermocouple 30 1E 21 2 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 1300.0 1300.0
SNAP-AITM2-i: Type R Thermocouple 17 11 21 2 Degrees C -50.0 -50.0 1768.0 1768.0
SNAP-AITM2-i: Type S Thermocouple 23 17 21 2 Degrees C -50.0 -50.0 1768.0 1768.0
SNAP-AITM2-i: Type T Thermocouple 18 12 21 2 Degrees C -270.0 -270.0 400.0 400.0
SNAP-AIV: -10 to +10 VDC 12 C 12 2 VDC -11.0 -10.0 10.0 11.0
SNAP-AIV: -5 to +5 VDC 11 B 12 2 VDC -5.5 -5.0 5.0 5.5
SNAP-AIV-i: -10 to +10 VDC 12 C 23 2 VDC -11.0 -10.0 10.0 11.0
SNAP-AIV-i: -5 to +5 VDC 11 B 23 2 VDC -5.5 -5.0 5.0 5.5
SNAP-AIV-4: -10 to +10 VDC 12 C 41 4 VDC -11.0 -10.0 10.0 11.0
SNAP-AIV-4: -5 to +5 VDC 11 B 41 4 VDC -5.5 -5.0 5.0 5.5
SNAP-AIV-8: -10 to +10 VDC 12 C 4B 8 VDC -11.0 -10.0 10.0 11.0
SNAP-AIV-8: -5 to +5 VDC 11 B 4B 8 VDC -5.5 -5.0 5.0 5.5
SNAP-AIV-32: -10 to +10 VDC 12 C 4E 32 VDC -11.0 -10.0 10.0 11.0
SNAP-AIV-32: -5 to +5 VDC 11 B 4E 32 VDC -5.5 -5.0 5.0 5.5
*
SNAP-AIV-32-FM : -10 to +10 VDC 12 C 4E 32 VDC -11.0 -10.0 10.0 11.0
SNAP-AIV-32-FM: -5 to +5 VDC 11 B 4E 32 VDC -5.5 -5.0 5.0 5.5
SNAP-AIV2-i: -100 to +100 VDC 72 48 24 2 VDC -110.0 -100.0 100.0 110.0
SNAP-AIV2-i: -50 to +50 VDC 73 49 24 2 VDC -55.0 -50.0 50.0 55.0
SNAP-AIVRMS: 0–250 VAC/VDC 70 46 70 2 VAC/VDC 0.0 0.0 250.0 275.0

PAC Manager User’s Guide 165

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES, POINTS, AND FEATURES

Channels per Module

Channel Type (Dec)

Channel Type (Hex)

Module Type (Hex)

Default Unit of
Measurement

Underrange

Overrange
Low Scale

Full Scale
Part Number &
Description

SNAP-AIVRMS-i: 0–250 VAC/VDC 70 46 28 2 VAC/VDC 0.0 0.0 250.0 275.0

SNAP-AIVRMS-i-FM*: 0–250 VAC/VDC 70 46 28 2 VAC/VDC 0.0 0.0 250.0 275.0
SNAP-AIR40K-4: 0 to 40K Ohms 74 4A 43 4 Ohms 0 0 40,000 44,000
SNAP-AIR40K-4: 0 to 20K Ohms 75 4B 43 4 Ohms 0 0 20,000 22,000
SNAP-AIR40K-4: 0 to 10K Ohms 76 4C 43 4 Ohms 0 0 10,000 11,000
SNAP-AIR40K-4: 0 to 5K Ohms 77 4D 43 4 Ohms 0 0 5000 5500
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 400K Ohms 105 69 54 8 Ohms 0 0 400,000 440,000
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 400K Autorange 188 BC 54 8 Ohms 0 0 400,000 440,000
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 200K Ohms 106 6A 54 8 Ohms 0 0 200,000 220,000
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 100K Ohms 107 6B 54 8 Ohms 0 0 100,000 110,000
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 50K Ohms 108 6C 54 8 Ohms 0 0 50,000 55,000
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 40K Ohms 74 4A 54 8 Ohms 0 0 40,000 44,000
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 20K Ohms 75 4B 54 8 Ohms 0 0 20,000 22,000
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 10K Ohms 76 4C 54 8 Ohms 0 0 10,000 11,000
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 5K Ohms 77 4D 54 8 Ohms 0 0 5000 5500
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 4K Ohms 38 26 54 8 Ohms 0 0 4000 4400
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 2K Ohms 39 27 54 8 Ohms 0 0 2000 2200
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 1K Ohms 40 28 54 8 Ohms 0 0 1000 1100
SNAP-AIR400K-8: 0 to 500 Ohms 41 29 54 8 Ohms 0 0 500 550
SNAP-pH/ORP: -1 to +1 VDC 78 4E 25 2 VDC -1.1 -1.0 1.0 1.1
SNAP-pH/ORP: 0–14 pH 79 4F 25 2 pH -1.4 0.0 14.0 15.4
SNAP-pH/ORP: -0.5 to +0.5 VDC 80 50 25 2 VDC -0.55 -0.5 0.5 0.55
SNAP-PID-V 99 63 D0 4 Percent 0 0 100.0 110.0
* Obsolete part number
** The SNAP-AIPM module monitors one device from channel 0 (volts) and channel 1 (amps). Channels 2 and 3
return calculated values. The SNAP-AIPM-3 and SNAP-AIPM-3V monitor three phases from channels 0,4, & 8
(volts) and channels 1,5, & 9 (amps). All other channels return calculated values. See the SNAP AIPM Modules
Data Sheet (form 1453) for details.

166 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

Analog Output Modules

Use this data for configuring point types and features (see page 157).

Channels per Module

Channel Type (Dec)

Channel Type (Hex)

Module Type (Hex)

Default Unit of
Measurement

Underrange

Overrange
Low scale

Full scale
Part Number &
Description

SNAP-AOA-3: 4–20 mA 131 83 83 1 mA 4.0 4.0 20.0 20.0

SNAP-AOV-5: 0–10 VDC 133 85 85 1 VDC 0.0 0.0 10.0 10.0
SNAP-AOA-23: 4–20 mA 163 A3 A3 2 mA 4.0 4.0 20.0 20.0
SNAP-AOA-23-iSRC: 4–20 mA 163 A3 B3 2 mA 4.0 4.0 20.0 20.0
SNAP-AOA-23-iSRC-FM*: 4–20 mA 163 A3 B3 2 mA 4.0 4.0 20.0 20.0
SNAP-AOA-23-iH: 4–20 mA 163 A3 AB 2 mA 4.0 4.0 20.0 20.0
SNAP-AOV-25: 0–10 VDC 165 A5 A5 2 VDC 0.0 0.0 10.0 10.0
SNAP-AOV-27: -10 to +10 VDC 167 A7 A7 2 VDC -10.0 -10.0 10.0 10.0
SNAP-AOA-28: 0–20 mA 168 A8 A8 2 mA 0.0 0.0 20.0 20.0
SNAP-AOVA-8: 0–5 VDC 144 90 CF 8 VDC 0.0 0.0 5.0 5.0
SNAP-AOVA-8: 0–10 VDC 145 91 CF 8 VDC 0.0 0.0 10.0 10.0
SNAP-AOVA-8: -5 to +5 VDC 146 92 CF 8 VDC -5.0 -5.0 5.0 5.0
SNAP-AOVA-8: -10 to +10 VDC 147 93 CF 8 VDC -10.0 -10.0 10.0 10.0
SNAP-AOVA-8: 4–20 mA 148 94 CF 8 mA 4.0 4.0 20.0 20.0
SNAP-AOVA-8: 0–20 mA 149 95 CF 8 mA 0.0 0.0 20.0 20.0
SNAP-AOD-29: TPO 5–60 VDC 169 A9 A9 2 Percent n/a 0.0 100.0 n/a
SNAP-AOD-29-HFi: TPO 2.5–24 VDC 131 83 B9 2 Percent n/a 0.0 100.0 n/a
* Obsolete part number

Configuring Serial Modules in the Inspect Window

(Not available on SB brains) Using the Inspect window, you can change many parameters for a serial module.
However, because changes you make in the Inspect window are sent directly to the controller or I/O unit and
cannot be saved to a configuration file, make sure you save the configuration to flash memory. For
instructions, see “Saving Configuration to a Device’s Flash Memory” on page 190. To use a configuration file,
see Chapter 2: Configuring Devices.
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
2. In the Inspect Opto 22 Device window, type the IP address of the I/O unit (or choose it from the
drop-down list).
3. Click Communications and then click the type of module from the submenu.
4. Choose the module’s position number from the drop-down list.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 167

CONFIGURING I/O MODULES, POINTS, AND FEATURES

Data for this module is

shown in the window.

For help in understanding or changing data, see the following sections:

– “Configuring RS-232 and RS-485/422 Serial Communication Modules” on page 47
– “Configuring Wiegand Modules” on page 52
– “Configuring Profibus Modules” on page 54
– “Configuring SSI (Serial Synchronous Interface) Modules” on page 55
– “Configuring CAN Modules” on page 56
– “Configuring HART Modules” on page 60
See also the SNAP Serial Communication Module User’s Guide (form 1191).
5. To save configuration to flash memory, see “Saving Configuration to a Device’s Flash Memory” on
page 190.

Configuring, Viewing, or Changing PID Loops

For information about PID loops, see page 64. PIDs are normally configured in a configuration file following
the steps on page 66. However, you can also configure, view, or change them using PAC Manager’s Inspect
window. (Remember that changes made here cannot be saved to a configuration file.)
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
The Inspect window opens.
– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, no data is displayed in the Status Read pane.
– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.

168 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.

– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list
of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the I/O unit (or choose it from the drop-down
list). Click PID and choose PID Loops from the submenu.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 169

READING AND WRITING TO POINTS

Information for this PID loop is

shown in the window.

3. From the drop-down list, choose the PID loop number you want to configure, view, or change.
Existing PID loops are indicated by an asterisk (*) next to the number.
4. To configure or change the PID, click inside the cell in the Value column and type the new value or
choose it from a drop-down list, if one is available. When you have finished making changes, click Apply
to send them to the I/O unit.
NOTE: If you are using PAC Control, it is easiest to tune PID loops in your PAC Control strategy running in Debug
mode. For details, see the PAC Control User’s Guide (form 1700).

For information on memory map addresses and what they contain, see the OptoMMP Protocol Guide (form
1465).

READING AND WRITING TO POINTS

You can use PAC Manager to read or change I/O point values. You must configure points before you can
read or write to them.
CAUTION: If you are using PAC Control, reading and writing is normally done in the PAC Control strategy logic or
in Debug mode. If you use the steps in this section to write to an I/O unit, be very careful you do not interfere with
strategy logic.

1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .

The Inspect window opens.
– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, no data is displayed in the Status Read pane.
– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.

170 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.

– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list
of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the I/O unit (or choose it from the drop-down
list).
3. Click Digital Point or Analog Point, depending on the type of point you want to read or write to. For
digital points, see “Reading and Writing to Digital Points.” For analog points, see page 173.

Reading and Writing to Digital Points

NOTE: For points on high-density digital modules, you can read or write to individual points using the steps in this
section. To read or write to all points at one time, see “Reading and Writing to SNAP High-Density Digital Points” on
page 181.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 171

READING AND WRITING TO POINTS

Digital Input Points

Here’s an example showing a SNAP digital input point. Module position numbers are shown near the top of
the Inspect Opto 22 Device window, with the point numbers for each module listed just below the position
number. For more information on locating modules and points, see “Referencing I/O Points” on page 155.

Module position number

Point numbers for this

module. Point 1 is currently
being read here.

To update values, click the

Refresh button.

Since point 1 is an input point,

you can turn counting on and
off or clear counters and
latches.

1. Click the point number you want to read or write to.

The current values for that point number appear in the Read Area. The Status data at the top right corner
of the window shows the date and time values were last read. The Read Area and the Write Area change
depending upon the point type.
2. To turn counting on or off or to clear counters and latches, click the buttons in the Counter State and
Clear areas near the bottom of the window. (For more information on these features, see page 73.)
Your changes are immediately sent to the I/O unit, and the window is updated to reflect your changes.

Digital Output Points

The following example shows a digital output point.

172 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

Current values for point 1 on

this digital output module.
Click the Refresh button to
update values.

Change point state on an

output point by clicking a
button in the Write Area.

1. Click the point number you want to read or write to.

2. The current values for that point number appear in the Read Area. The Status data at the top right corner
of the window shows the date and time values were last read. The Read Area and the Write Area change
depending upon the point type.
3. To turn an output point on or off, click a button in the Write Area.
The change is immediately sent to the I/O unit, and the window is updated.

Reading and Writing to Analog Points

Analog Input Points

This example shows an analog input point. Module position numbers are shown near the top of the Inspect
Opto 22 Device window, with the point numbers for each module listed just below the position number. For
more on locating modules and points, see “Referencing I/O Points” on page 155.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 173

READING AND WRITING TO POINTS

Module position number

Point numbers for this

module. Point 1 is currently
being read here.

Click the Refresh button to

update values.

Since point 1 is an input point,

you can clear minimum and
maximum values or set offset
and gain.

The Two-Point Method

allows you to enter a real-world
range of values
for offset and gain.

1. Click the point number you want to read or write to.

The current values for that point number appear in the Read Area.
2. To clear minimum and maximum values, click the buttons in the Clear area (see page 75 for information).
3. To set offset and gain, use the default method (described below), or click the Two-Point Method and
follow the steps on page 176.
Your changes are immediately sent to the I/O unit, and the window is updated to reflect your changes.

Calibrating Offset and Gain Using the Default Method

You adjust an analog point’s offset and gain to ensure that the measured values are accurate.
This section describes how to have the offset and gain automatically calculated and set for you.
NOTE: See “Calculating Offset and Gain Using the Two-Point Method” on page 176 if:

– You don't have access to a calibrator, or

– The point uses inverted scaling and your device has PAC firmware R9.5b or lower. (In inverted
scaling, the lower scaled value is greater than the upper scaled value.)
Starting with the introduction of SNAP-B3000-ENET, all SNAP PAC brains (including SBs), SNAP Ethernet I/O units,
and E2 brain boards can automatically calculate offset and gain for analog input points. If a -50 mV to +50 mV
input receives signals that are slightly off (for example, not exactly -50 mV at the lowest point), the offset and gain
can be calculated so that values appear accurately when read.
Offset and gain values affect engineering units (EU). For a temperature input, engineering units are in degrees
C or F, depending on how the I/O unit is configured.

174 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

IMPORTANT: To calibrate the point, the I/O unit must be turned on and attached to the network, and you must
have access to the I/O unit in order to use the calibrator. For points on a SNAP PAC SB-series brain, connect directly via
serial or through the controller via Ethernet. (See page 27 for details.)

Save the configuration to flash so that it is not lost when power is turned off. Since each calibration is for a specific
point on a specific I/O unit, the result cannot be saved to the configuration file and cannot be sent to any other I/O
unit.

First, calculate offset, and then calculate gain. The offset must be calculated at the signal corresponding to
zero engineering units (EU), and the gain must be calculated at the signal corresponding to the point’s
maximum input range value (or, for inverted scaling, the point’s minimum input range value—in inverted
scaling, the lower scaled value is greater than the upper scaled value).
1. In Inspect mode, click the Analog Point button.
2. Click the module and analog input point you want to calibrate.

Module

Point

Offset and
Gain buttons

3. On the analog input point, use a calibrator to input the signal that corresponds to zero Engineering Units
(EU).
Example 1:SNAP-AIV (-10 to +10 VDC) configured with default scaling
zero EU = 0 VDC
Example 2: SNAP-AIV (-10 to +10 VDC) configured with custom scaling
Actual Scaled
Units VDC PSI
Lower -10 0*
Upper +10 100
*Zero EU is 0 PSI, which corresponds to a -10 VDC field signal

4. Click the Calc and Set Offset button.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 175

READING AND WRITING TO POINTS

5. Use the calibrator to input the signal corresponding to the maximum input range value—or for inverted
scaling, to the minimum input range value—for the configured point type.
(In inverted scaling, the lower scaled value is greater than the upper scaled value.)
For precise values, refer to the configured Point Type or see the module's data sheet.
Example:
SNAP-AIV module; Point Type of -10 to +10 VCD:
Maximum Input Range Value = +10 VDC
For inverted scaling, Minimum Input Range Value = -10 VDC
6. Click the Calc and Set Gain button.
NOTE: To store offset and gain values permanently, you must save the change to flash when you send the
configuration data to the I/O unit (see page 69).

Calculating Offset and Gain Using the Two-Point Method

You adjust an analog point’s offset and gain to ensure that the measured values are accurate.
• Offset represents the low scale offset from the correct value.
• Gain represents the slope of the scaling equation.
The two-point method allows you to use any real-world range of Engineering Units to calculate offset and
gain. Use this method when it isn’t convenient or possible to input a signal that equates to either the
zero-scale or full-scale engineering units for a module’s point type. Also, you must use the two-point method
if the analog point you're calibrating uses inverted scaling and you're using PAC firmware R9.5b or lower. (PAC
firmware R9.5c and higher can automatically calculate offset and gain for analog points that use inverted
scaling.)
When using the two-point method, choose two points that are as far apart as possible.
1. If it isn’t already open, open the Inspect Opto 22 Device window for the point you want to calibrate (Tools
> Inspect | Analog Point button).
2. Click the Two-Point Method button in the Offset and Gain area in the bottom-right corner of the Write
Area.
NOTE: You may have to scroll down to see the button.

Two-Point Method button

3. Use a calibrator to input a signal corresponding to the low end of the desired range.

176 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

For example, a SNAP-AIV module has a range of –10 to +10 VDC, so you might choose a range of 1.0 to
8.0 if it’s convenient. In that case, you would use the calibrator to input a low end of 1.0 VDC on the input
point.
NOTE: For best results, choose two points that are as far apart as possible.

4. Note the signal’s value on the calibrator and type this value in the Expected Value field.

Expected Value

Read button

5. Click the Read button to read the value that the input point is returning in response to this signal. This
value appears in the Actual Value field.
6. Use the calibrator again to input a signal corresponding to the high end of the desired range.
Using the SNAP-AIV example in step 2, for the high end you would use the calibrator to input 8.0 VDC on
the input point.
7. Type the Expected Value for the high-end value, and then click Read.
8. Click the Calculate button to calculate the offset and gain.
9. Click Send Values to send the offset and gain to the device.
10. Save the settings to flash memory to make sure that the data is not lost when power to the device is
turned off. See “Saving Configuration to a Device’s Flash Memory” on page 190.

Analog Output Points

The following example shows an analog output point.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 177

READING AND WRITING TO POINTS

Current values for point 1

on module 2. To update
values, click the Refresh
button.

Change the value on an

output point by using
the Write Area.

1. Click the point number you want to read or write to.

The current values for that point number appear in the Read Area.
2. To change the value of an output point, enter the value in the Write Area (either Scaled or Counts) and
click Apply.
The change is immediately sent to the I/O unit, and the window is updated.

Reading Analog and Digital Banks

You can use PAC Manager to read a bank of points at one time. (Currently it is not possible to write to a bank of
points using PAC Manager.) You must configure points before you can read them.
NOTE: Bank reading cannot be done on digital or analog modules containing more than four points. To read or write
to all points on a high-density digital module, see page 181.

1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .

The Inspect window opens.
– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, no data is displayed in the Status Read pane.
– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.

178 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.

– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list
of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the I/O unit (or choose it from the drop-down
list). Click Digital Bank or Analog Bank.
See also:

PAC Manager User’s Guide 179

READING AND WRITING TO POINTS

Digital Bank Window

Values are current as of the Status date and time.

Click Refresh to update values.

Remember that values for points on high-density digital modules are not included.
You can copy part or all of the data in this window and paste it into another file, such as a text file or email. Just
highlight what you want to copy, right-click it, and choose Copy from the pop-up menu (or use Ctrl+C). To
highlight all data in the window, right click in the window and choose Select All.

Data Formats. Most digital bank data is in the form of a mask. For example, the State of Digital Points value
shown in the previous figure is this mask:
0x00000000 0000000C
This mask shows, in hex, the state of all 64 possible points (maximum rack of 16 modules with four points per
module). The lowest points are on the right:

Hex: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C
Binary: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1100
Points: 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0 3-0
Modules: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

In this case, all points are OFF except for points 2 and 3 on the module in position 0, which are ON. For more
help in interpreting bank data, see page 196.
Bank counter data, however, uses unsigned 32-bit integers; for help in interpreting counter data, see page 196.

180 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

Analog Bank Window

Values are current as of the Status date and time.
Click Refresh to update values.

For help in interpreting analog point data, see “IEEE Float Data” on page 197.

Reading and Writing to SNAP High-Density Digital Points

In PAC Manager, you can read or write to points on high-density digital modules in two ways: one at a time
using the Digital Point button (see page 171), or all at once as shown below.
1. To read or write to points on high-density digital modules, click the Inspect button in the PAC
Manager main window.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 181

READING AND WRITING TO POINTS

2. In the Inspect Opto 22 Device window, type the Device Name (or IP address) of the I/O unit (or choose it
from the drop-down list). Click High Density.

3. Click the module number for the point you want to read or write to.

182 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

SNAP High-Density Digital Input

For an input module, the current states and latches appear, both as bitmasks in hex and individually for each
point. Counter values appear in the Counter column.

To clear latches for a point, highlight the point number and click the Clear On-Latch or Clear Off-Latch button.
To clear the counter for a point, highlight the point and click the Clear Counter button.
The change is immediately sent to the I/O unit, and the window is updated.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 183

READING AND WRITING TO POINTS

SNAP High-Density Digital Output

For an output module, the current states appear, as bitmasks in hex and for each point.

To turn a point on or off, highlight the point number and click the Turn On or Turn Off button.
The change is immediately sent to the I/O unit, and the window is updated.

Reading System Date and Time

SNAP PAC controllers and brains have a real-time clock. A SoftPAC controller uses the computer’s clock.
1. To read the date and time on the device, click the Inspect button in the PAC Manager main
window.
2. In the Inspect window, type the name of the device (or choose it from the drop-down list). Click System
Date And Time.
The device’s date and time appear.
NOTE: Although you can change the date and time by clicking a cell in the Value column and typing in the new
number, then clicking Apply, there is a slight delay before the time is set on the unit. Other ways of setting time
may be more accurate, for example, using PAC Control to synchronize system date and time. See also “Setting
Up System Date and Time” on page 116 for another method.

Reading and Writing to the Scratch Pad Area

Before using this section, be sure to read “Event/Reaction Concepts” on page 127.
You can read the current state of Scratch Pad bits and current values in Scratch Pad integers, strings, and floats
using PAC Manager. You can also change these values in real time, which can be useful for testing. If you are
running PAC Control, make sure your changes do not conflict with strategy logic.
1. To read or change the Scratch Pad area, click the Inspect button in the PAC Manager main window.

184 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

2. In the Inspect Opto 22 Device window, type the IP address of the I/O unit (or choose it from the
drop-down list). Click Scratch Pad and then choose the area you want from the pop-up menu.

Scratch Pad Bits

The Scratch Pad bits window shows you the current state of the Scratch Pad bits (as of the Status date and
time) and the current On and Off masks. You can change any of these masks by clicking its cell in the Value
column and typing in the new mask, then clicking Apply.

Values are current as of the Status date and time.

Click Refresh to update values.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 185

READING AND WRITING TO POINTS

Scratch Pad Integers, Floats, and Strings

Scratch Pad Floats are used as the example here, but integers and strings are similar. Current values are shown
as of the Status date and time. To update values, click Refresh.

Change the value in the When all new values are

Value column. entered, click Apply.

The Select All and Unselect All buttons control the check marks in the Apply column boxes. The Clear All
button puts all values at zero.
1. To change a value in Scratch Pad integers, floats, or strings, click the cell in the Value column and type the
new value.
A check mark appears in the Apply column box. If you do not want to send a value, click the box to
uncheck it.
2. Click the Apply button to write the new values to the Scratch Pad.
All the checked items are changed.

Data Logging
Data logging is normally configured in a configuration file (see page 87), but you can change it in the Inspect
window. Remember that changes made here cannot be saved to a configuration file, however. To change
configuration, with the I/O unit’s IP address in the Inspect window, click Data LogData Logging Configure.
For help, see the information in the steps on page 87.
To read the data in a data log you have set up, use PAC Manager’s Inspect window. See instructions on
page 89. To clear all data from a data log, see page 90.

186 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

Reading or Changing PID Loops

For information about PID loops, see page 64. PIDs are normally configured in a configuration file following
the steps on page 66. However, you can also configure, view, or change them using PAC Manager’s Inspect
window. (Remember that changes made here cannot be saved to a configuration file.)
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
The Inspect window opens.
– If you haven’t used the Inspect window before, no data is displayed in the Status Read pane.
– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.
– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.

– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list
of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 187

READING AND WRITING TO POINTS

2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the I/O unit (or choose it from the drop-down
list). Click PID and choose PID Loops from the submenu.

Information for this PID loop is

shown in the window.

3. From the drop-down list, choose the PID loop number you want to configure, view, or change.
Existing PID loops are indicated by an asterisk (*) next to the number.
4. To configure or change the PID, click inside the cell in the Value column and type the new value or
choose it from a drop-down list, if one is available. When you have finished making changes, click Apply
to send them to the I/O unit.
NOTE: If you are using PAC Control, it is easiest to tune PID loops in your PAC Control strategy running in Debug
mode. For details, see the PAC Control User’s Guide (form 1700).

For information on memory map addresses and what they contain, see the OptoMMP Protocol Guide (form
1465).

Reading or Changing Events and Event Messages

Digital, alarm, serial, timer, and Wiegand events are normally configured in a configuration file. Event
messages are configured in a configuration file if you are using PAC Control; otherwise, they are configured in
the Inspect window. See Chapter 4: Setting Up Events and Reactions for configuration steps on all events and
event messages.
However, you can read current events and also change their configuration in the Inspect window. Digital
Events are shown below as an example.

188 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

Current status of the event (as of the

Status date and time) is shown here.

Choose the event

number from the
drop-down list.

This event’s
configuration data is
shown here.

Reading or Changing Communications and Other Data

Other data on the I/O unit or standalone controller can also be read and changed using PAC Manager’s Inspect
window. The following table shows where to find the data in the Inspect window and references page
numbers in this guide for information to help you understand what you are reading or how to change it:
To read or change Click this in the Inspect window For help, see
Security CommunicationsNetwork Security page 78
PPP CommunicationsPPP page 123
Streaming CommunicationsStreaming page 104
Email CommunicationsE-mail page 100
Modbus CommunicationsModbus page 112
SNMP Agent CommunicationsSNMP page 96
Serial ports on brain or
CommunicationsCommunication Port Control page 118
controller

In addition, you can read or write to any memory map address by clicking OtherGeneric Read/Write. See
the memory map appendix in the OptoMMP Protocol Guide (form 1465) to make certain you have the correct
address before making any changes.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 189

WRITING COMMANDS TO THE DEVICE

WRITING COMMANDS TO THE DEVICE

NOTE: If you are using the PAC Control Redundancy Kit and redundant controllers, do not use PAC Manager to work
with your controllers. Instead, use the PAC Redundancy Manager that comes with PAC Control Professional (version
R9.0 or higher).

Using OptoMMP Device Commands

CAUTION: These hardware commands directly affect the operation or configuration of the device. Be careful when
you use them, as they cannot be undone.

Saving Configuration to a Device’s Flash Memory

Saving configuration data to the controller or I/O unit’s flash memory makes sure that the data is not lost
when power to the device is turned off.
If you are using a configuration file (as in most of Chapters 2, 3, and 4), you can choose to save configuration
data to flash memory when the file is loaded to the I/O unit. However, if you are writing configuration directly
to the device (as in this chapter), you’ll need to follow these steps to save to flash.
Note that this command saves to flash the things you can configure in PAC Manager. It does not affect a PAC
Control strategy, which is saved to flash via PAC Control or PAC Terminal.
CAUTION: If you are using PAC Manager R9.0a or higher, PAC firmware R9.0a or higher, and loader version 6.0 or
higher, and if a controller has a microSD card installed and the card already contains configuration data, that data
will be overwritten. See the controller user’s guide for complete information about microSD.

1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .

2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the device, or choose it from the drop-down
list. Click Status Write.
3. In the Operation Command list, highlight Store configuration to flash.

4. Click Send Command.

190 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

The configuration data is stored to flash memory and a Success message appears.

Restarting the Device

Restarting the device is just like turning the power off and then turning it back on again. This command can
be used for both I/O units and controllers. For an I/O unit, if configuration data has not been saved to flash
memory, restarting resets points to their defaults.
For some configurations to take effect, the device must be restarted. A SNAP PAC controller must be restarted
after you configure its secondary IP address, for example. For an I/O unit, if you are using a configuration file (as
in most of Chapters 2, 3, and 4), you can choose to restart the unit when the file is loaded to the I/O unit and
saved to flash memory. However, if you are writing configuration directly to the I/O unit (as in this chapter),
after you store to flash, you need to follow these steps to restart it.
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the device, or choose it from the drop-down
list. Click Status Write.
3. In the Operation Command list, highlight Restart Device from powerup.

4. Click Send Command.

The device is restarted and a Success message appears.

Resetting to Defaults and Restarting

Resetting the device to defaults erases configuration information from the device’s flash memory. (It does not
erase IP address settings nor PAC Control strategy files in a controller.) Resetting also does the following:
• If the device has PAC firmware R9.0a or higher and loader R6.0 or higher and a microSD card is present,
resetting erases PAC firmware, strategy, and IP address and configuration data from the card (does not
erase other data files or I/O coprocessor firmware)
• Clears all point configuration and features, such as offsets and gains, custom scaling, latches, counters,
and minimum/maximum data
• Turns off digital outputs and defaults all digital points to inputs

PAC Manager User’s Guide 191

WRITING COMMANDS TO THE DEVICE

• Sets analog outputs to zero scale (0 counts)

• Restarts the device
Follow these steps to reset and restart the device:
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the I/O unit, or choose it from the drop-down
list. Click Status Write.
3. In the Operation Command list, highlight Reset to defaults and Restart Device.

4. Click Send Command.

The I/O unit is set to defaults and restarted. A Success message appears.

Sending a Powerup Clear

The powerup clear command clears a flag that indicates the I/O unit has lost and then regained power.
Normally a powerup clear command is automatically sent, so normally you won’t need to use this command.
If you receive a powerup clear error message, however, you can use PAC Manager to send the command. Note
that a power loss means that any configuration data not stored to the I/O unit’s flash memory has been lost.
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the device. Click Status Write.
3. In the Operation Command list, highlight Send powerup clear.
4. Click Send Command.
The powerup clear is sent, and a Success message appears.

Using microSD Commands

NOTE: These commands require PAC Manager R9.0a or higher and PAC firmware R9.0a or higher. Use Status Read to
see the firmware version (see “Reading Basic Device Information” on page 147).

192 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

SNAP PAC S-series and R-series controllers manufactured from November 2008 to the present have a microSD
card slot that accommodates cards up to 2 GB. These cards can be used to log data, of course, but they can
also be used as a kind of boot disk for the controller, so that you can replace a failed controller with a new one
by simply putting the prepared microSD card into the new controller, turning the controller on, and
connecting it to the network. The new controller boots from the card and configures itself; you can then use
the controller’s Reset button to save the data on the card to flash memory.
Before using the card or any of these commands, be sure to read the section on microSD in the Maintenance
chapter of the controller user’s guide. A few steps are repeated here for convenience, but the user’s guide has
the complete information.
Three types of information can be put on the card to use it as a boot disk:
• PAC firmware files
• Strategy files
• Configuration data
Configuration data includes all current configurations (those that can be done in PAC Manager) plus the
controller’s IP address and IP settings. The steps below show only how to add configuration data; see the
controller user’s guide to add firmware and strategy files.

Putting Configuration Data on the microSD Card

1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the device, or choose it from the drop-down
list. Click Status Write.
3. In the Operation Command list, highlight Store configuration and IP settings to microSD card.

4. Click Send Command.

The controller’s IP settings and all current configuration data are saved to the card.
After you have replaced a controller with a new one by using the microSD card as a boot disk, you must save
the data from the card to the controller’s flash memory, so it will be available in case the microSD card is

PAC Manager User’s Guide 193

WRITING COMMANDS TO THE DEVICE

removed. Cycling power does not do this. Instead, follow the steps in the Maintenance chapter (microSD
section) of your controller’s user’s guide.

Using Other microSD Card Commands

You can also use the following commands with a microSD card in the controller. These commands require PAC
Manager R9.0a or higher and PAC firmware R9.0a or higher. Read microSD card information in the controller
user’s guide before using the card.
1. In the Inspect window, type the device’s name or IP in the Device Name field, click Status Write, and
choose the command you need in the Operation Command list:
– Erase Configuration from microSD—deletes all configuration and IP address data from the card.
Does not delete other data files, firmware, or strategy files on the card.
– Erase Firmware from microSD—deletes firmware on the card, wherever it is located; also deletes
firmware command and response files. Does not delete data files or strategy files.
– Erase Strategy from microSD—deletes only the strategy from the card. Does not delete data files, IP
address and configuration data, or firmware files.
2. Click Send Command.

Clearing Configurations and Data Samples

You can use PAC Manager to clear the following configurations: digital events (both old and expanded), alarm
events, email, PID loops, and PPP. You can also clear data in the data log. (Note that some of these features do
not apply to some devices. See the comparison chart on page 9.)
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the I/O unit. Click Status Write. In the Operation
Command list, scroll down to see commands listed under Other.

3. Click the command you want:

194 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

– Clear “Digital Events - Expanded” configuration (Clears digital events in PAC firmware 8.1 and higher.
For PAC firmware 8.0 and older, clears Timers configuration.)
– Clear “Digital Events - Old” configuration (Clears digital events in PAC firmware 8.0 and older.)
– Clear Alarm Events configuration
– Clear PPP configuration
– Clear E-mail configuration
– Clear PID Loops configuration
– Clear Data Logging Samples
4. With the command you want highlighted, click Send Command.
The command is sent immediately to the I/O unit, and you see a Success message.

FORMATTING AND INTERPRETING DATA

Data is formatted differently for different addresses in the device’s memory map. Starting memory map
addresses are shown in PAC Manager; for a complete list of memory map addresses, see the OptoMMP
Protocol Guide (form 1465).
This section shows how to format and interpret various types of data when you are reading or writing to a
memory-mapped device.

Mask Data
Some data is in the form of a 32-bit or 64-bit mask—four or eight addresses, each holding eight bits. Each bit
in the mask contains the data for one thing in a group: one channel, one module, one Scratch Pad bit, etc.

Mask Data for groov and SNAP I/O units

For example, most high-density digital module data (for both groov and SNAP) and most SNAP digital bank
data is in this form (groov I/O units and groov RIO modules do not support banks). For example, to read the
state of SNAP digital channels in a bank, you would read the eight bytes starting at FFFFF0400000.
Here’s how the data would be returned:

Therefore, at address FFFFF0400000:

This hex data: B 1
Equals this binary data: 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
Showing the states: On Off On On Off Off Off On
Of these channels: 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
On these modules: 15 14

Data from other addresses marked as masks is formatted in a similar way.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 195

FORMATTING AND INTERPRETING DATA

Mask Data for E1s

Unsigned 32-bit Integer Data

Much of the data in the memory map is in the form of unsigned integers, either one byte, two bytes, or four
bytes. With multiple bytes, since the memory-mapped devices use a Big Endian architecture, the high order
byte is in the low order address.
For example, SNAP digital bank counter data is in 4-byte unsigned integers. It takes four bytes to contain the
data for one channel. To read digital bank counter data for channel 0 on module 0, you would start with
address FFFFF0400100. The following table shows the pattern of bank counter data for the first few channels
on a SNAP rack:

The most significant byte is at the lowest address. For module 0, channel 0, for example, you might receive the
following data:

The 32-bit integer for this reading would be 16 BB 18 87 (most significant byte at lowest address). This hex
figure correlates to the decimal value 381,360,263.
Remember that if you are processing this data using a Little Endian computer (such as an Intel-based PC), you
must convert the data from the Big Endian format in order to use it. Little Endian format is the opposite of Big
Endian; Little Endian places the most significant byte at the highest address.

Digital Channel Data (4-Channel Modules)

NOTE: For high-density digital modules, see “Mask Data” on page 195.

(Does not apply to groov I/O or groov RIO modules, which have more than 4 channels.) For consistency in
starting addresses, data for individual digital channels has a length of four bytes. However, only the least
significant bit contains the data you’re looking for.

196 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 5: READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES

For example, to read the state of channel 0 on module 0, you would start with address FFFFF0800000. Data
would be returned as follows:

IEEE Float Data

For individual analog channels, values, counts, and minimum and maximum values for one channel are
located next to each other in the memory map. All are four bytes and are IEEE 754 floats.
For example, individual analog channel data for channels 0 and 1 on module 0 appears in these addresses:
Module Channel Data Beginning Address Ending Address
Scaled units (E.U.*) FFFF F026 0000 FFFF F026 0003
Counts FFFF F026 0004 FFFF F026 0007
0
Minimum value (E.U.*) FFFF F026 0008 FFFF F026 000B
Maximum value (E.U.*) FFFF F026 000C FFFF F026 000F
0
Scaled units (E.U.*) FFFF F026 0040 FFFF F026 0043
Counts FFFF F026 0044 FFFF F026 0047
1
Minimum value (E.U.*) FFFF F026 0048 FFFF F026 004B
Maximum value (E.U.*) FFFF F026 004C FFFF F026 004F
* Engineering Units

IEEE 754 float format is as follows:

1 bit 8 bits 23 bits

x xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Sign Exponent Significand

Float calculation: (-1)Sign x [1 + Significand/223] x 2 (Exponent-127)

Example for Opto 22 memory map
At this address: base address base address + 1 base address + 2 base address + 3
This hex data: 41 77 33 33
In binary: 0 100 0001 0 111 0111 0011 0011 0011 0011
In these bits: 31 30 . . . 23 22 . . . 0
Equals (in decimal): 0 130 7,811,891
Representing: Sign Exponent Significand

Decimal = (-1)0 x [1 + 7,811,891/223] x 2 (130-127)

= 1 x [1.931] x 8
= 15.45 (rounded to 2 decimal places)

PAC Manager User’s Guide 197

FORMATTING AND INTERPRETING DATA

For more information on floats and issues that may arise in their use, see the Using Floats Technical Note (form
1755) available on our website, www.opto22.com.

Analog Bank Data

(Does not apply to groov I/O units or groov RIO modules.) Remember that the bank area of the memory map is
set up for four channels per module. Analog modules with more than four channels (points) will show data for
channels 0–3 only. If the analog modules you are using have only one or two channels, the addresses for the
upper two or three channels in each module will contain the following: for output modules, 0; for input
modules, FFFFFFFF.
For example, to read all bank analog channel values in scaled units, you would read 256 bytes starting at
address FFFFF0600000. Here’s how data for two-channel input modules in positions 0 and 1 would appear:
Beginning Address Ending Address Data Format Module Channel
FFFF F060 0000 FFFF F060 0003 four bytes—IEEE float 0 0
FFFF F060 0004 FFFF F060 0007 four bytes—IEEE float 1
FFFF F060 0008 FFFF F060 000B FFFFFFFF 2
FFFF F060 000C FFFF F060 000F FFFFFFFF 3
FFFF F060 0010 FFFF F060 0013 four bytes—IEEE float 1 0
FFFF F060 0014 FFFF F060 0017 four bytes—IEEE float 1
FFFF F060 0018 FFFF F060 001B FFFFFFFF 2
FFFF F060 001C FFFF F060 001F FFFFFFFF 3

198 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 6: Maintaining Devices

INTRODUCTION
This chapter includes step-by-step procedures for maintaining controllers and brains, including:
• Viewing and changing IP addresses (below).
• Loading new firmware (page 201).
To find out the current brain firmware version, see “Getting Device and Firmware Information—
Individual Device” on page 224.)
• Maintaining files (page 215).
For other maintenance tasks, such as resetting the device to factory defaults or handling a device whose IP
address you don’t know, see the controller or brain user’s guide.

CHANGING IP ADDRESSES
If you need to change an IP address or subnet mask on an Ethernet-based device, you can do so using PAC
Manager. You must know the current IP address in order to change it. The white sticker on the device may
show the IP address. If not, see the device’s user guide for instructions.
• SNAP PAC controllers and brains
• E1 and E2 brain boards
• SNAP Simple I/O brains
• SNAP Ultimate and SNAP Ethernet brains with firmware version R5.0 or higher

1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open it, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)

PAC Manager User’s Guide 199

CHANGING IP ADDRESSES

2. In the menu bar, click ToolsChange IP Settings.

3. In the Current IP Address field, type the IP address of the device whose address you want to view or
change. Click Read Current Settings to see the current subnet mask, gateway address, and DNS address.

4. To change the IP address, subnet mask, or other addresses, enter the new numbers. Make sure you have
typed everything correctly. When everything is correct, click Change IP Settings.
After you confirm the change, a message appears stating that the change was successful and that the
device will restart. Restarting may take 10 to 20 seconds to complete. When you see the following
indicator, the device is ready for use with its new address:
– The SNAP-PAC-S1’s, SNAP-PAC-R1’s, and SNAP-PAC-R1-B’s STAT LED shows solid green or solid
orange when viewed from the top (green means a strategy is running; orange means no strategy is
running).
– The SNAP-PAC-EB1’s or SNAP-PAC-EB2’s STAT LED shows solid green.
Remember to write the IP address on the sticker or white area on the device.

200 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 6: MAINTAINING DEVICES

INSTALLING NEW FIRMWARE

NOTE: To load firmware on an R-series controller secured with a private key using PAC Terminal Secure Strategy
Distribution (SSD), see the technical note provided with the purchase of SSD. If you follow the procedures
documented here, you’ll get an error.

All SNAP PAC controllers and brains1, and SNAP serial communication modules, contain firmware.
If a new version of the firmware is released or if the firmware should become damaged, you can use PAC
Manager to load new firmware to the device.
Typically, firmware files are created for a specific series of products (for example, firmware for the R1 series,
which includes SNAP-PAC-R1, -R1-B, and obsolete R1-FM controllers). Firmware files have the file extension
“.bin.” Sometimes we package firmware files for multiple series of products in a zip file. If you’ve downloaded a
firmware zip file from our website, you’ll need to unzip it to access the individual .bin files.
To get the newest firmware file, you can use the Get Latest Firmware feature in PAC Manager (or any browser
like Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, and Microsoft Edge) to download the firmware from Opto 22’s website2.
If your SNAP PAC controller has a microSD card slot, you can copy the necessary .bin files to the microSD card,
and then load the firmware from the card. This method can be easier if your PAC isn’t networked. (For
instructions to load firmware from a microSD card, see the controller user's guide.)
Typically, PAC software requires a matching (or higher) version number of controller firmware. This is because
the firmware must be able to support new features in the software. It’s usually OK to have controller firmware
that is newer (that is, has a higher version number) than the version of PAC software you have. There can be
exceptions, however—such as when a change in the firmware requires a matching change in the software.
PAC Control keeps track of the dependencies between different versions of controller firmware and software,
and will display a warning when the controller firmware is lower than the minimum version number
recommended for your software. (The warning is displayed in PAC Control when you try to go into Debug
mode to download a strategy.)
The steps to load new firmware depend on the type of device you have, and whether the device’s current
firmware is damaged.
• To load firmware for SB brains, see page 205.
• To load firmware for serial communication modules, see page 208.
• For all other controllers and brains (including SNAP Ultimate brains with firmware R5.0 or higher), see
page 202.
• To load I/O coprocessor firmware, see page 209.
• To replace damaged firmware (indicated by three slow red blinks of the STAT LED after powerup), see
page 212.

Firmware Loading’s Effect on Data in the Device

Successfully loading firmware to a controller or brain erases (clears) all data in volatile memory (RAM) and in
non-volatile memory (battery-backed RAM).3 This includes:
• The PAC Control strategy
• All strategy variables, including persistent variables
• The PAC Control strategy’s Autorun flag

1 In addition, rack-mounted controllers and brains manufactured starting in 2016 may contain an I/O coprocessor,

which has its own firmware. For details, see page 209.
2 To download previous versions of Opto 22 firmware and software, go to our FTP site at

ftp://ftp.opto22.com/Public_Folders_(Unsecured)/Archives_(Software_and_Firmware)/
3 I/O coprocessor firmware is not cleared when you update controller or brain firmware. For details, see page 209.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 201

INSTALLING NEW FIRMWARE

• I/O point, Event, and PID loop configurations

• Scratch pad values
• User files
• Any other memory map configurations
The following items are cleared from flash memory:
• The PAC Control strategy
• The PAC Control strategy archive
If the following items have been stored to flash memory, they are not cleared by a firmware load:
• I/O point, Event, and PID loop configurations.
• Scratch pad values.
• User files.
• Some memory map configuration items. (Note that some memory map configuration items are cleared
by a firmware load. For details, see the OptoMMP Protocol Guide, form 1465.)
A successful firmware load also restarts the device. Restarting a device causes data in volatile memory and in
battery-backed RAM to be lost. This means that accumulated data (such as counts from analog and digital
totalizers) is reset. For these reasons, you shouldn’t attempt to load firmware to devices that are running.
And what happens if you select the wrong IP address?
• If the IP address you select is for an Opto 22 device that doesn’t match with the firmware type (for
example, your controller is a SNAP-PAC-R1 and you try to load EB2 firmware), nothing on your controller
is erased. PAC Manager simply displays an error in the Results area and it won’t attempt to install the
firmware.
• If you select an IP address that is not an Opto 22 device (for example, the IP address belongs to a network
printer), nothing on your controller is erased. PAC Manager displays an error in the Results area and it
won’t attempt to install the firmware.
• If you mistakenly select an IP address for an Opto 22 device that matches the firmware file (for example,
you load R1 firmware to an R1 unit that you don’t want to update), PAC Manager installs the firmware
with the same effects listed above.
For these reasons, you should be careful when selecting the IP addresses of devices to load firmware to.

Loading Controller and Brain Firmware (Except SB Brains)

For troubleshooting, see page 204.
For SB brains, see page 205.
To replace damaged firmware, see page 212.

Use the steps in this section to load PAC firmware on:

• SNAP PAC controllers
• SNAP PAC EB brains
• E1 and E2 brain boards
• SNAP Ultimate brains with firmware version R5.0 or higher
Before beginning, be sure to have:
– Address information for the controller(s) and/or brain(s) that will receive the new firmware.
– The PAC firmware file for your product, or Internet access to download the firmware from our
website.
1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open it, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)

202 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 6: MAINTAINING DEVICES

2. Click the Maintenance button .

3. Make sure Install Firmware is highlighted in the Command list.

4. If you already have the firmware file on your computer, network, or microSD card, skip to step 5.
If you need to get the new firmware file:
a. Click the blue Get Latest Firmware link.
The link opens your browser and takes you to the Downloads section of our website,
www.opto22.com
b. On the Downloads webpage, choose the firmware for your part number, and then download it to
your PC. Firmware files have the file extension “.bin.” Sometimes we package firmware files for
multiple series of products in a zip file. If you’ve downloaded a firmware zip file from our website,
you’ll need to unzip it to access the individual .bin files.
5. In PAC Manager’s I/O Unit Maintenance dialog box, click the browse button , and then navigate to
the firmware (.bin) file for your product.
Double-click the file to select it. The dialog box closes, and the path and filename appear in the Firmware
Filename field.
6. If the SNAP devices you want to update are displayed in the IP Addresses list, skip to step 7.
If you have previously saved a list of IP addresses and want to use the list, click Load to select and load the
saved list, and then skip to step 7.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 203

INSTALLING NEW FIRMWARE

If the IP address you want isn’t displayed, click Add, and then enter a device’s IP address or host name, or
a range of consecutive IP addresses.

Choose one of these options to add IP addresses:

Type a single IP address here.

Enter a host name here.

To enter a range of IP addresses, click here,

and then enter the From and To addresses.

When you’ve finished adding IP addresses, click OK.

7. In the IP Addresses list, highlight the IP addresses to send firmware to. To select multiple devices, hold
down the Ctrl key as you click the devices.
NOTE: Do not multi-select daisy-chained or multi-dropped -EB series Ethernet brains. You must update their
firmware one device at a time.

In this example, these devices will receive the firmware update.

You can change the amount of seconds PAC Manager waits before verifying the devices have restarted.

8. If you have changed the OptoMMP port (see page 78), enter the correct port number in the Port field.
9. CAUTION: Loading firmware erases the current firmware in the selected device. You cannot undo
the erase. Make sure you’ve highlighted the IP addresses you want to update, and not others by
accident. For details, see “Firmware Loading’s Effect on Data in the Device” on page 201.
To load the firmware, click Execute.
The file is loaded to the SNAP devices, and progress is shown in the Results area.
When the file has completed loading and the devices are restarted, a “Success” message is displayed in the
Results area.

Troubleshooting
• If, during the firmware update process, a Timeout error message appears in the Results area, you can try
temporarily disabling any firewalls on the computer running PAC Manager.

204 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 6: MAINTAINING DEVICES

Firewalls, such as the ones that come with some anti-virus software programs and the built-in firewall in
Windows, can prevent PAC Manager from receiving FTP communications from the controller, which will
result in a timeout error. (Firewalls in a router shouldn't be a problem.)
You can reenable the firewalls after loading the firmware.
• If disabling firewalls is not an option, you can try
– Connecting the PC directly to the controller or brain.
– Configuring a firewall exception for PAC Manager.
To configure a firewall exception in your system's anti-virus software, see the manufacturer's
instructions.
To configure a firewall exception in Windows, see page 10.
• If you’re using EB brains in a daisy-chain or multi-dropped configuration, you must update their firmware
one device at a time. This is because, after the firmware update, network communication is disrupted
when each brain in the chain is restarted.
• You may encounter an issue if you’re updating an R-series controller that has PAC firmware R9.2c or lower.
This issue is resolved, and details are available on our website, OptoKnowledgeBase article KB82101
http://www.opto22.com/site/knowledgebase/kb_view_article.aspx?aid=2059
• You may encounter an issue in either of these situations:
– You’re updating an R-series controller with a microSD card slot and PAC firmware R9.5a or lower.
(Wireless controllers are not affected.)
– A microSDHC card is inserted in your R-series controller when you’re updating PAC firmware R9.5a or
lower. (Wireless controllers are not affected.)
These issues have been resolved. For details, see our website:
– OptoKnowledgeBase article KB86172
http://www.opto22.com/site/knowledgebase/kb_view_article.aspx?aid=2962
– OptoKnowledgeBase article KB86180
http://www.opto22.com/site/knowledgebase/kb_view_article.aspx?aid=2945

Loading SB Brain Firmware

These instructions apply to SNAP PAC SB brains. For other brains and controllers, see page 202.
NOTE: For an SB brain that has damaged firmware (indicated by three slow red blinks of the STAT LED after powerup),
see page 212.

Before beginning, make sure you have an Internet connection to obtain the firmware. Also, choose how you
will connect to the SB brain (for more information, see the brain user’s guide):
• Through the S-series controller—see steps in “Installing SB Firmware Through the Controller,” below.
• Directly from the PC to the brain (requires a PCI-AC48 adapter card in the PC)—see “Installing SB
Firmware Directly from PC to Brain” on page 207.

Installing SB Firmware Through the Controller

1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)

PAC Manager User’s Guide 205

INSTALLING NEW FIRMWARE

2. In the PAC Manager menu bar, click ToolsInstall Firmware via Ethernet.

3. Click Install Firmware Through Ethernet Passthrough Connection, and then click OK.

4. In the Controller section, enter the IP address of the controller. Leave the Port at 2001 unless you have
changed it. Choose the serial port on the controller that the brain is connected to, and make sure the
baud rate matches that on the brain. Change Timeout and 2-Wire if necessary.
5. In the Opto 22 device section, choose the type of SB brain and enter its serial address.
6. Click the blue Get Latest Firmware link.
The link opens your browser and takes you to the Firmware Downloads section of our website,
www.opto22.com
7. Choose the firmware for your part number from the list and download it to your PC.
If you have any difficulty obtaining or loading new firmware, contact Opto 22 Product Support.
8. Click the browse button and locate the firmware file you just downloaded. Double-click the
filename.

206 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 6: MAINTAINING DEVICES

The path and filename appear in the Filename field.

9. When all the fields are correct, click Start Update.
Progress is shown in the lower part of the window. When the process is complete, the device is ready to
use.

Installing SB Firmware Directly from PC to Brain

This method requires a serial connection from the brain to the PC, via an RS-485 converter such as an Opto 22
PCI-AC48 adapter card.
1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open it, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
2. In the PAC Manager menu bar, click ToolsInstall Firmware via Serial Connection.

3. Click Install via RS-485 Connection.

4. In the Computer section, choose the COM port the brain is connected to. Make sure the baud rate
matches that on the brain. Change the Timeout if necessary.
5. In the Opto 22 Device section, choose the type of SB brain and enter its serial address.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 207

INSTALLING NEW FIRMWARE

6. Click the blue Get The Latest Firmware link.

The link opens your browser and takes you to the Firmware Downloads section of our website,
www.opto22.com
7. Choose the firmware for your part number from the list and download it to your PC.
If you have any difficulty obtaining or loading new firmware, contact Opto 22 Product Support.
8. Click the browse button and locate the firmware file you just downloaded. Double-click the
filename.
The path and filename appear in the Filename field.
9. When all the fields are correct, click Start Update.
Progress is shown in the lower part of the window. When the process is complete, the device is ready to
use.

Loading Serial Module Firmware

If you have a SNAP PAC I/O unit, you can load new serial module firmware to a SNAP serial communication
module on the I/O unit.
1. Make sure you have an Internet connection so you can download the new serial module firmware file.
2. If PAC Manager isn’t already open it, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
3. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Maintenance button .
4. In the Command list, highlight Install Module Firmware.

5. Click the blue Get Latest Firmware link.

The link opens your browser and takes you to the Firmware Downloads section of our website,
www.opto22.com
6. Choose the firmware for your part number from the list and download it to your PC.
If you have any difficulty obtaining or loading new firmware, contact Opto 22 Product Support.
7. Click the browse button and locate the serial module firmware file you just downloaded.
Double-click the filename.

208 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 6: MAINTAINING DEVICES

The path and filename appear in the Filename field.

8. In the Module Position field, type the serial module’s position on the rack (0–15).
9. In the IP Addresses list, highlight the IP address of the I/O unit the serial module is on. (If the correct IP
address is not shown, click Add to add it.)
You can load serial module firmware to multiple I/O units at the same time, but only if the modules are in
identical positions on all I/O units.
10. Click Execute.
The serial module firmware file is loaded to the I/O unit and then loaded to the serial module, and a
Success message appears in the Results area.

Loading I/O Coprocessor Firmware

For information about loading PAC firmware, see “Installing New Firmware” on page 201.

The SNAP PAC I/O coprocessor is a programmable chip that can be updated in newer Opto 22 rack-mounted
controllers and brains. It replaces an older, obsolete chip. The change has no effect on function or
performance.
The new programmable chip is included in Opto 22 rack-mounted controllers and brains, starting with the
date codes listed below.
NOTE: For devices manufactured during the month and year listed, use PAC Manager to find out if your device has
an I/O coprocessor. (For details, see page 210.)

Product Manufacturing Date Code (MM/YY)

SNAP-PAC-R1, -R1-FM*, R1-W* 06/16
SNAP-PAC-R1-B 01/16
SNAP-PAC-R2, -R2-FM*, R2-W* 02/16
SNAP-PAC-EB1*, -EB1-FM*, EB1-W* 03/17 (See Note)
SNAP-PAC-EB2*, -EB2-FM* 08/16
SNAP-PAC-EB2-W* 03/17
SNAP-PAC-SB1* 05/17 (See Note)
SNAP-PAC-SB2* 06/17 (See Note)
* Obsolete part numbers

Special Note about EB1s, SB1s, and SB2s

As of November 14, 2017, the following products manufactured with I/O coprocessors had firmware R3.0a.
You do not need to update the firmware in these products. Note that these products are all obsolete as of
2023:
• SNAP-PAC-EB1
• SNAP-PAC-EB1-FM
• SNAP-PAC-EB1-W
• SNAP-PAC-SB1
• SNAP-PAC-SB2

Does My Product Have an I/O Coprocessor?

A device's manufacturing date code can rule out whether the device has an I/O coprocessor, but to know for
certain, you can inspect the device in PAC Manager.
Using the Manufacturing Date Code

PAC Manager User’s Guide 209

INSTALLING NEW FIRMWARE

If your device is easily accessible, you can visually check its manufacturing date code to see when it was
manufactured. If it was manufactured before the dates listed in the table on page 209, it doesn't have a chip
that can be updated.

The manufacturing date code (month and

year in MM/YY format) appears in the top
half of a bisected circle, printed on a white
label attached to the device.

Using PAC Manager R9.5a or higher

1. In PAC Manager, click Tools > Inspect to open the Inspect Opto 22 Device window.
2. In the Device Name field, select or enter your device.
3. Look at the Value for I/O Coprocessor Firmware Version.
If the Value is A0.0a or 0 (zero), your device does not have an I/O coprocessor.

These devices don't have an I/O

coprocessor.

This device has an

I/O coprocessor.
You should update its
firmware.

Using PAC Manager R9.4c or lower

1. To verify you can connect to your controller or brain, click Tools > Inspect.
Then, in the Device Name field, select or enter your device, and press Enter (or click Refresh).
2. If you're connected, click Other > Generic Read/Write.

210 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 6: MAINTAINING DEVICES

a. In the Address: 0x FFFF field, type: F030024C

b. In the Type field, select: 32-Bit Integer
3. Click Refresh.
If the Value is not 0 (zero), your device has an I/O coprocessor, and you should update its firmware.

A number in the Value field means the device has an I/O coprocessor.
Your device's number may be different.

This device doesn't have an I/O coprocessor.

Getting and Loading the I/O Coprocessor Firmware

I/O coprocessor firmware updates are posted on the Opto 22 website. To successfully load the I/O coprocessor
firmware, you must have both:
• PAC Manager R9.5a or higher
• PAC Firmware R9.5a or higher in the device that you're updating
If your device has PAC firmware R9.4c or lower and you aren't ready to upgrade to a newer version of PAC
firmware, follow these steps:
1. Temporarily load PAC firmware R9.5a (or higher).
2. Follow the instructions below to load the I/O coprocessor firmware.
3. Load your previous version of PAC firmware (to overwrite the higher version you installed in step 1).
Previous versions of software and firmware are available from our FTP site:
ftp://ftp.opto22.com/Public_Folders_(Unsecured)/Archives_(Software_and_Firmware)/

To get the I/O coprocessor firmware update file:

Go to the Downloads section of the Opto 22 website, choose the firmware for your part number, and then
download it to your PC. Firmware files have the file extension “.bin.”
NOTE: If your device is wireless, select the file for the comparable controller or brain. For example, if you have a
SNAP-PAC-R1-W, select the file for the R1 controller, SNAP-PAC-R1-IO-Coprocessor-R3.0a.bin.

Sometimes we provide firmware files for multiple series of products in a zip file. If you’ve downloaded a
firmware zip file from our website, you’ll need to unzip it to access the individual .bin files.
To load the I/O coprocessor firmware:

PAC Manager User’s Guide 211

INSTALLING NEW FIRMWARE

CAUTION: Updating the I/O coprocessor firmware will reboot your controller or brain.
It will not overwrite your configuration data, but the reboot will cause accumulated data (such as counts from
analog and digital totalizers) to be reset.
1. In PAC Manager, open the I/O Unit Maintenance window (Tools > Maintenance).
2. In the Command list, select Install I/O Coprocessor Firmware.
3. Click the Browse button, and then navigate to the folder containing the firmware files.
4. Select the firmware file for your controller or brain, and then click Open.
NOTE: If your device is wireless, select the file for the comparable controller or brain. For example, if you have a
SNAP-PAC-R1-W, select the file for the R1 controller, SNAP-PAC-R1-IO-Coprocessor-R3.0a.bin.

5. In the IP Addresses list, click the device you want to update.

Use the Add button to add devices to the list.
To select multiple devices, hold down the Ctrl key as you click the devices.
NOTE: Do not multi-select daisy-chained or multi-dropped -EB series Ethernet brains. You must update their
firmware one device at a time.

6. Click Execute to load the firmware.

After the file is loaded and the devices are restarted, a “Success” message appears in the Results area.
If the load fails (for example, if the file you selected isn't compatible with your device), the device's I/O
coprocessor firmware is not changed or overwritten. However, the device will restart, and a “Fail” message
appears in the Results area.
If you select a device that does not have an I/O coprocessor, or if the device has SNAP PAC firmware R9.4c or
lower, the Results area displays “Command not supported in the build,” and the device does not automatically
restart.

Replacing Damaged Firmware

If the STAT LED on a controller or brain blinks red slowly three times after powerup, the firmware in the device
is damaged. For details, see the Blink Codes section in the device's user guide.
Follow these steps to replace damaged firmware.
1. Make sure you have the following before beginning:
– Address information for the controller(s) and/or brain(s) that will receive the new firmware.
– Internet access to obtain new firmware from our website.
2. Follow instructions in the device’s user guide to restart the device in failsafe bootloader mode. Watch for
the blink code to make sure the device is in this mode.
3. Attach the PC with PAC Manager to the controller or brain using a crossover cable or “straight-through”
Ethernet cable as required:
– EB-series brains can be connected with either type of cable.
– Computers with a Gigabit Ethernet network interface controller (NIC) card can use either type of
cable (because the NIC card has the ability to adapt.)
– For R-series and S-series controllers that:
– Have an SD card slot, use a straight-through Ethernet cable.
– Do not have an SD card slot, use a crossover cable.
– For SB-series brains:
– Connect through the S-series controller;
– Or connect directly from the PC using a serial cable and a PCI-AC48 adapter card.
For more information on connections, see the device’s user’s guide.

212 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 6: MAINTAINING DEVICES

4. If PAC Manager isn’t already open it, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
5. In the PAC Manager menu bar, click ToolsInstall Firmware via Failsafe Bootloader Mode. Click OK at the
message about products it can be used with.

6. Choose one:
– For a SNAP PAC controller or EB brain, click the Ethernet tab and continue with step 7.
– For an SB brain, if you’re connecting to the brain through the S-series controller, click the Ethernet
Pass-Through tab and skip to step 8.
– For an SB brain, if you’re connecting serially from the PC to the brain, click the Serial Direct tab and
skip to step 9.
7. For a controller or EB brain, enter the IP address and subnet of the PC (not the controller or brain). Choose
the controller’s or brain’s device type from the drop-down list. Skip to step 10.
8. For an SB brain using Ethernet Pass-Through, do the following:
– In the Controller section, enter the IP address of the controller. Leave the Port at 2001 unless you
have changed it. Choose the serial port on the controller that the brain is connected to, and make
sure the baud rate matches that on the brain.
– In the Opto 22 device section, choose the type of SB brain and enter its serial address. Skip to
step 10.
9. For an SB brain using Serial Direct, do the following:
– In the Computer section, choose the COM port the brain is connected to. Make sure the baud rate
matches that on the brain.
– In the Opto 22 device section, choose the type of SB brain and enter its serial address. Go on to
step 10.
10. Click the blue Get Latest Firmware link.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 213

INSTALLING CA ROOT CERTIFICATES

The link opens your browser and takes you to the Firmware Downloads section of our website,
www.opto22.com
11. Choose the firmware for your part number from the list and download it to your PC.
If you have any difficulty obtaining or loading new firmware, contact Opto 22 Product Support.
12. Click the browse button and locate the firmware file you just downloaded. Double-click the
filename.
The path and filename appear in the Filename field.
13. When all the fields are correct, click Start Update.
Progress is shown in the lower part of the window. When the process is complete, either repeat from
step 7 for another device, or click Done.
The device is now ready to use.

INSTALLING CA ROOT CERTIFICATES

NOTE: As part of the process of installing the certificate on the controller, the controller will be restarted to
activate the certificate. You may need to schedule a system shutdown to coordinate putting the certificate on the
controller and rebooting the controller.

To place a root certificate in the /pki/root-certs folder on your controller:

1. In the PAC Manager menu bar, click Maintenance .
2. In the Command list, select Upload File To I/O Unit.
3. Click the Browse button and browse to the location of the certificate. Select the certificate, and then
click OK.
4. In the Destination field, type /pki/root-certs/ and the name you want the certificate to have on the
controller; for example:
/pki/root-certs/Equifax_Secure_Certificate_Authority.cer
5. Select the IP address of the SNAP PAC device that you want to install the certificate on.

6. Click Execute.
7. (Optional) Repeat steps 2–6 if you have additional certificates to install.
8. Select the Save Files To Flash command, and then click Execute.
9. Restart the SNAP PAC device to activate the certificates.

214 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 6: MAINTAINING DEVICES

MAINTAINING FILES
The memory in a SNAP PAC controller or brain includes a substantial area available for file storage:

SNAP-PAC-S1 SNAP-PAC-S2
SNAP-PAC-S1-FM* SNAP-PAC-S2-W* 2.5 MB
SNAP-PAC-S1-W

SNAP-PAC-R1
SNAP-PAC-R2
SNAP-PAC-R1-B
SNAP-PAC-R2-FM* 2.0 MB
SNAP-PAC-R1-FM*
SNAP-PAC-R2-W*
SNAP-PAC-R1-W*

Limited only by the size of the hard

SoftPAC drive on the computer the software
runs on.

SNAP-PAC-EB1* SNAP-PAC-EB2*
SNAP-PAC-EB1-FM* SNAP-PAC-EB2-FM* 2.0 MB
SNAP-PAC-EB1-W* SNAP-PAC-EB2-W*

* Obsolete part numbers

In addition, beginning in early 2009, microSD slots were added to S-series and R-series PACs for removable
storage up to 2 GB.
In the file storage area or on a suitable removable disk, you can store any types of files. These files can be
sorted into directories or folders just as they can on a PC, and they are available for use within a PAC Control
strategy or an application you develop. For example, the SNAP device can read the files, add data to them, and
even send data from them via FTP to another device on the network.
For managing general data files on a microSD card, see instructions in the Maintenance chapter of the
controller user’s guide. Do not use PAC Manager for general microSD file management. However, you can use
PAC Manager for some functions related to firmware, strategy, and configuration files on the card. See “Using
microSD Commands” on page 192.
To use PAC Control strategy logic to create and manage files, see “Communication Commands” in
Chapter 10 of the PAC Control User’s Guide.

Tools for Managing Files

There are several tools you can use to manage files. You can use FTP software or even Windows Explorer to
move files to and from the device via FTP, and you can use PAC Manager to move and manage files on the
device. Here are some additional details:
• PAC Control lets you programmatically work with the SNAP PAC controller or I/O unit’s file system,
within your control strategy. You can create files and folders on the device and write to, add data to, or
read them; receive file data via FTP; send all or part of the data in a file via FTP, and more. PAC Control
works with one I/O unit at a time. A PAC Control strategy can also FTP files to one or more other I/O units
or controllers.
• PAC Manager’s main advantage for file management over other commercially available FTP client
software is that it can work with multiple Ethernet devices at once, for example sending data via FTP to
ten I/O units at the same time, or deleting the same file from multiple I/O units simultaneously. However,
PAC Manager can see only the folders and files at the root of the device’s file system (not the names of
files within folders). For this reason, do not use PAC Manager for working with files on a microSD card in
the controller, as all of its files are in a directory.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 215

MAINTAINING FILES

• Newer versions of Windows Explorer can be used for FTP operations with a single controller or I/O unit.
It’s easy to drag and drop files and folders to the device, and you can see the complete file structure. You
may find that data isn’t always refreshed correctly.
• Other FTP software products you can download may be more reliable than Windows Explorer; they
also may give you extra features like communication details, which are useful for debugging. Some may
not support filenames with spaces or other specific characters. They work with one device at a time.
• You can also use a command prompt for FTP, again with one device at a time.
• Note that FTP cannot be used through a firewall in the PC. Make sure any firewall in the computer is
disabled before you try to work with files. Firewalls in a router should not be a problem, however.
Keep the following limitations in mind as you work with files on controllers and I/O units:

Maximum length for filenames and directory names 127 characters

All ASCII characters except *, ?, null, and /

Filename characters allowed NOTE: Some FTP client software may not allow spaces
or specific characters.

Path name component separator /

Maximum number of files and directories that can be
16
open simultaneously

Limited only by available memory

Maximum directory depth NOTE: PAC Manager reads only the root names; files
within folders are not listed.

Limited only by available memory. Each file uses 516

Maximum number of files bytes of overhead plus its number of bytes rounded up
to the nearest multiple of 516 bytes.

Limited only by available memory. Each directory uses

Maximum number of directories
516 bytes.

Approximately 2.5 MB on a SNAP PAC S-series, 2 MB

on a SNAP PAC R-series or EB brain (varies slightly
Maximum amount of memory available in the
depending on the device’s firmware version). Data stor-
device’s file system
age on a SoftPAC controller is limited only by the size of
the hard drive on the computer the software runs on.

Maximum amount of memory available in removable

2 GB (available on S-series and R-series PACs)
storage (per microSD card)

When using the SNAP device as an FTP server, for example with an FTP client such as CuteFTP, you can use an
anonymous login. The device ignores any user ID or password.
CAUTION: Make sure you save files to flash memory if needed. If power to the controller or I/O unit is turned off, files
are destroyed unless they have been saved to flash. (Does not apply to files in removable storage.)

Moving Files to the SNAP PAC Controller or I/O Unit

To move files to the SNAP PAC controller or I/O unit, use any standard FTP client software or PAC
Manager. (Do not use PAC Manager for files on a microSD card.) A maximum of five devices can FTP files to a
SNAP controller or I/O unit simultaneously.
Follow these steps to move files to the SNAP device using PAC Manager:
1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open it, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)

216 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 6: MAINTAINING DEVICES

2. Click the Maintenance button .

3. In the Command list, highlight Upload File To I/O Unit. Click the browse button and locate the
source file you want to load.
4. In the Destination field, type the filename as you want it to appear on the SNAP PAC device.
The filename can be the same or different from the source filename. You can specify a path on the device
using the separator / For example, to place the file Product Categories.txt into the folder Products, you
would type: Products/Product Categories.txt If the folder does not exist, it is created.
5. If the IP address(es) of the device(s) you want to load the file to appear in the IP Addresses list, skip to
step 7. (Or, if you have previously saved a list of IP addresses, click Load to load the saved list.) If the
address(es) you need don’t appear in the list, click Add.

6. Enter the address or a range of consecutive addresses, then click OK.

The address(es) you entered appear in the I/O Unit Maintenance dialog box.
7. Highlight the IP addresses to load the file to.
8. Click Execute.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 217

MAINTAINING FILES

The file is loaded to the I/O units, and a Success message appears in the Results area.

File to upload (source)

Highlighted IP addresses
Path and filename on will receive file
I/O unit(s)

Moving Files from the SNAP PAC Controller or I/O Unit

To move files from the SNAPPAC controller or I/O unit, use any standard FTP client software or PAC
Manager (do not use PAC Manager for files on a microSD card), or use the FTP communication handle in a PAC
Control strategy. (In PAC Control, a maximum of 16 communication handles can be used simultaneously to
FTP files. For details, see “Communication Commands” in the PAC Control User’s Guide (form 1700).
Here’s how to move files from the device using PAC Manager:
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Maintenance button .

218 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 6: MAINTAINING DEVICES

2. In the Command list, highlight Download File From I/O Unit.

3. In the Filename field, enter the filename (and path, if any) of the file on the controller or I/O unit.
For example: Products/Product Categories.txt
4. In the Destination field, enter the path and filename where you want the file to go (or click the browse
button to locate the path, then type in the filename).
The filename can be the same or different from the source filename.
5. In the IP Addresses list, highlight the IP address of the SNAP PAC device you are downloading the file
from. (If it does not appear, click Add to add it to the list.)
6. Click Execute.
The file is loaded from the device, and a Success message appears in the Results area.

Reading Filenames
You can use PAC Manager to read and list the names of all files and folders in the root of the controller or I/O
unit. Note that files located inside folders (or folders inside folders) are not listed, even though they are there.
PAC Manager will not show any files on a microSD card. You can use a standard FTP software program to see
them.
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Maintenance button .
2. In the Command list, highlight Read Filenames On I/O Unit.
3. In the IP Addresses list, highlight the IP address of the SNAP PAC device you are reading. (If it does not
appear, click Add to add it to the list.)
4. Click Execute.
The list of root file and folder names appears in the Results area.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 219

MAINTAINING FILES

All root-level files and

folders on the device
with the IP address
10.192.55.67.

Folders are designated

as <DIR>.

The listing shows the file or folder name, the file’s size in bytes (or <DIR> for folders), and the date and
time it was placed there (in the format YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss).

Deleting a File from a SNAP PAC Controller or I/O Unit

You can also use PAC Manager to delete a file from one device or from several devices at once. (You cannot
use it to delete files on a microSD card.)
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Maintenance button .
2. In the Command list, highlight Delete File On I/O Unit.
3. In the Filename field, type the filename (and path, if any) of the file you want to delete.
For example: Products/Product Categories.txt
4. In the IP Addresses list, highlight the IP address(es) of the SNAP PAC device(s) you are deleting the file
from. (If the correct IP addresses are not shown, click Add to add an address or group of addresses, or if
you have saved a list of IP addresses, click Load to load the saved list.)
5. Click Execute.
The file is deleted and a Success message appears in the Results area.

Using Flash Memory with the File System

You can use PAC Manager to move files between the controller or I/O unit’s file system and its flash memory,
which stores files so they are not lost if the device loses power. Remember that flash memory is smaller than
the memory available for file storage; check the controller’s or I/O unit’s data sheet for details. (You cannot use
PAC Manager with files on a microSD card.)
You can do any of the following on one or multiple devices:
• Save all files in the file system to flash memory
• Clear all file system files from flash memory (does not affect firmware, strategy files, or point configuration
data)
• Load files from flash memory into the device’s file system, replacing all files in the file system

220 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 6: MAINTAINING DEVICES

Follow these steps:

1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Maintenance button .
2. In the Command list, highlight the command you want to use.
In the following example, Save Files To Flash is highlighted.

3. In the IP Addresses list, highlight the IP address(es) of the device(s) you want the command to apply to. (If
the correct IP addresses are not shown, click Add to add an address or group of addresses, or if you have
saved a list of IP addresses, click Load to load the saved list.)
CAUTION: Make sure you have chosen the correct command and the devices you want to affect. You cannot
undo these commands.

4. Click Execute.
The command is executed and a Success message appears in the Results area.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 221

MAINTAINING FILES

222 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 7: Troubleshooting

INTRODUCTION
If you are having difficulty using PAC Manager, here are some suggestions that may help. In addition, make
sure to check the Troubleshooting section in the device’s user’s guide. If you cannot find the answers you need
in these guides, contact Opto 22 Product Support. For contact information, see page 4.

PAC MANAGER ERROR MESSAGES

When you send configurations to I/O units in PAC Manager, you may see the following messages in the lower
part of the Send Configuration to I/O Unit dialog box:
Message Notes
Could not open I/O unit: [IP address] or
Timeout error. Check basic communication with the device (See the
An error occurred while connecting to I/O Unit
Troubleshooting appendix in the device’s user guide for help).
[IP address].
[number] points successfully configured. Success message.
Could not configure digital module [number], point [number].
Check the point to make sure it’s correct for the module type installed.
Could not configure analog module [number], point [number].
Module [name] exists at position [number] but was not config- Check configuration; an analog module is at this position but no points
ured have been configured on it yet.
Could not configure temperature. These configurations apply to the I/O unit as a whole, not to individual
Could not configure watchdog. points. Contact Product Support for help. (See page 4.)

Save to Flash—Operation Failed.

Contact Product Support. (See page 4.)
Clear Flash on I/O Unit: [name of unit]—Operation Failed.
Communication could not be established with the restarted I/O PAC Manager successfully connected to the device but could not send
Unit it a PUC. Check cables and communication.

TROUBLE CONNECTING TO THE I/O UNIT OR CONTROLLER

See the Troubleshooting section in the user’s guide for your device:
• SNAP PAC S-series—the SNAP PAC S-Series Controller User’s Guide (form 1592)
• SNAP-PAC R-series—the SNAP PAC R-Series Controller User’s Guide (form 1595)
• SNAP PAC EB and SB brains—the SNAP PAC Brains User's Guide (form 1690)
•

PAC Manager User’s Guide 223

USING PAC MANAGER TO TROUBLESHOOT PROBLEMS

Trouble Assigning an IP Address to a Brain or Controller

If you cannot see a SNAP controller or brain that needs a static IP address assigned, it may be because your
network or PC is not allowing the BootP request through to PAC Manager.
If you suspect a network issue (for example, rules on a managed switch), bypass all network devices and
connect your PC directly to the controller or brain with a crossover cable.
If you still have trouble, firewalls and security software limitations on your PC may be the problem. See
“Checking Network Setup and PC” on page 10 to troubleshoot this issue.

USING PAC MANAGER TO TROUBLESHOOT PROBLEMS

PAC Manager can be useful in troubleshooting problems with I/O units and controllers. Before calling Opto 22
Product Support, you can use PAC Manager to get device and firmware information and view diagnostic
messages. To help with communication problems, you can change TCP settings. You can also check for
Ethernet errors, which indicate network problems.

Getting Device and Firmware Information—Individual Device

These steps provide information for one device at a time. To get information on all devices on the Ethernet
network at once, see page 226.
If you need to contact Opto 22 Product Support for assistance in using an I/O unit or controller, it is helpful to
have device and firmware information at hand before you call us.
1. Start PAC Manager as follows:
– In Windows 7, press the Windows Start key , and then click All Programs > Opto 22 > PAC
Project > PAC Manager 10.4.
– In Windows 10, press the Windows Start key , type PAC Manager 10.4 and then press the
Enter key.
2. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
3. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the device. Click Status Read.

224 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING

This example shows a SNAP-PAC-S1; other devices are similar.

Keep this window open on your screen when you call Product Support.
NOTE: Because the Status Read area is used for both standalone controllers and I/O units, some items apply to some
devices and not others. The following items do not apply to standalone controllers:

Degrees F/C PID Loops Supported

Comm Watchdog Time (msec.) Digital Modules Supported
Scanner Flags Arcnet data
4-Channel Digital Scan Count Digital resets and interrupt failures since powerup
Analog & High Density Dig Scan Count Analog and Digital Scanners (msec per scan)
Smart Modules Present Module X - Times Discovered

For help in interpreting Status Read data, see page 149.

Viewing Diagnostic Messages

PAC Manager displays a Diagnostic Messages button (yellow exclamation mark) on the Status Read page
when any of the following conditions are detected:
• The OptoMMP port is not set to the default value of 2001.
• The Modbus port is not set to the default value of 502.
• The SNMP port is not set to the default value of 161.
• The FTP server port is not set to the default value of 21.
• The Control Engine port is not set to the default value of 22001.
• This device is set to Always BootP on Powerup.
• The I/O coprocessor firmware in this device needs to be updated.
• The analog and high density digital scanner is turned off.1
• The digital 4-channel scanner is turned off.1

PAC Manager User’s Guide 225

USING PAC MANAGER TO TROUBLESHOOT PROBLEMS

• The control engine is turned off.1

1
For more information about scanners, see “Scanner Flags” in “Changing Status Data” on page 152.
NOTE: If your SNAP-PAC R-series controller cannot communicate via the host port after attempting to update
firmware, see KB82101, Updating to firmware 9.2c or higher may fail on SNAP-PAC-R controllers, on the Opto 22
website.

If you see the button, click it and read the diagnostic messages. They may help you solve problems or provide
useful information when you call Product Support.

Exclamation mark button

Getting Device and Firmware Information—Multiple Devices

You can get device type, IP address, and firmware information for all Opto 22 Ethernet-based devices on one
network, all at one time. This method is especially useful for making sure firmware is up to date on all devices.
Note that SNAP PAC SB brains are not included, since they are on a serial, not an Ethernet, network.
1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)

226 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING

2. In the PAC Manager menu bar, click ToolsFind Opto 22 MMP Devices.

3. Click Find.
PAC Manager discovers all Ethernet-based Opto 22 memory-mapped devices on the network and lists
their MAC addresses, IP addresses, firmware versions, and unit types.

TCP Settings
Retransmit timeout (RTO) refers to the length of time the controller waits while communicating before timing
out. The RTO is determined by the controller’s TCP/IP stack, and the stack continually recalculates the RTO
based on recent network traffic. If the network becomes busier, for example, the stack automatically adjusts
the RTO to a higher value.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 227

USING PAC MANAGER TO TROUBLESHOOT PROBLEMS

If the TCP/IP stack times out while trying to transmit data, it doubles the current RTO and tries again. This
process continues for five retries; after that, the device stops trying and sends a timeout message.
If you are receiving frequent timeout messages from the device, you can change the TCP parameters in PAC
Manager.
1. Start PAC Manager:
Click the Windows Search button and type PAC Manager 10.4.
2. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect icon .
3. In the Device Name field, type the name or IP address of the controller.
Then, click Status Write.

CAUTION: Note the following recommended settings:

TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout (msec): 250
TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout (msec): 3000
TCP Retransmission Attempts: 5
TCP Idle Session Timeout (msec): 240,000

If you set these fields too low, you may not be able to communicate with the device at all—even through PAC
Manager—to fix the settings. Then you would have to reset the controller to factory defaults.

4. Change these four fields as necessary:

Minimum RTO sets an absolute minimum value for the RTO. The device’s calculated RTO will never go
below this value.
Initial RTO sets the RTO for the first communication try. Be careful: since all future tries are based on this
value, if you set it too low for network conditions, a connection will never be made.
TCP Retransmits sets the number of times the device retries communication. Larger, busier networks
need a higher number of retransmits than smaller networks with less traffic.
TCP idle session timeout sets how long (in milliseconds) the device allows a session to remain open
without any activity. After this time, the device checks the session to make sure it is still good, and closes
it if it is not. The default is 240,000 milliseconds, or four minutes.
5. Click the Apply button to write your changes to the controller.
6. In the Operation Commands list, highlight Store configuration to flash. Click Send Command.
7. In the Operation Commands list, highlight Restart brain from powerup. Click Send Command.
The new TCP parameters are set.

228 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING

Checking Ethernet Errors

If you are having problems communicating with the controller or I/O unit, follow troubleshooting suggestions
in the user’s guide for the device.
You can use PAC Manager to check Ethernet errors reported by the SNAP PAC device. These errors indicate
network problems. You will need to know the device’s IP address.
1. If PAC Manager isn’t already open, start it. (For instructions, see the footnote on page 11.)
2. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
3. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the controller or I/O unit. Click Status Read.
4. Scroll down until you see these items:
Ethernet Errors: Late Collisions
Ethernet Errors: Excessive Collisions
Ethernet Errors: Others

Ethernet Errors

All three of these items should have a value of zero. If any of these items has a value other than zero, you
may have a network problem.

Troubleshooting Serial Communication

If you need to troubleshoot serial communication over PPP, you can turn on logging for the port the modem
uses. Any data received or transmitted on the port is logged to a file on the controller, which you can retrieve
using FTP and analyze for problems.
You can also log communication with a serial device or I/O unit for troubleshooting, but since the log file logs
serial data sent only between PAC Control and the serial device or I/O unit, it is easier to log communication in
your PAC Control strategy in these cases.
CAUTION: Logging adds significant overhead to serial communication. Do not enable logging unless you are
troubleshooting.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 229

USING PAC MANAGER TO TROUBLESHOOT PROBLEMS

Creating the Log File

1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the controller (or choose it from the
drop-down list).
3. Click Communications and choose Communication Port Control from the submenu.
The Inspect window shows the ports and features that apply to the controller you’re inspecting.

4. Find the port you’re troubleshooting. In its Logging For Communication Port # field, click Disabled and
change it to Enabled.
Logging begins immediately.

Retrieving the Log File

1. Before retrieving the log file, go back to the PAC Manager Inspect window and set Logging For
Communication Port # back to Disabled (see steps in the previous section).
When you disable logging, all data is flushed to the file.
2. Use an FTP client to retrieve the log file, which is located in the root directory of the controller’s file
system and named Comm<x>.log (where <x> is the physical serial port number).
See “Maintaining Files” on page 215 for information on FTP clients, and “Moving Files from the SNAP PAC
Controller or I/O Unit” on page 218 for how to retrieve the file.

Reading the Log File

In the log file, full duplex serial communication is transformed into a single stream using these rules:
• Data bytes are not transformed in any way. The binary data byte is logged.
• A direction byte is prepended to every data byte: 0 = outgoing, 1 = incoming.
• The data stream is terminated by a null character (ASCII 0x00).
The maximum log file size is 16 kb. When it reaches the end, the log stream wraps to the beginning of the file.
To locate the oldest data in a wrapped file, search for a null character in place of a 1 or 0; since the null

230 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING

terminates the log data stream, the next logged data byte is the oldest data byte in the file. If the null
character is at the end of the file, the file has not wrapped.

Troubleshooting Wireless LAN Communication

If you are having difficulty with wireless LAN communication on a Wired+Wireless controller or brain (part
number ending in -W), Opto 22 Product Support may ask you to log WLAN data.
1. (SNAP PAC controllers only) Make sure there is a microSD card to receive the log file.
If no card is in the microSD slot, no log file is created. (A card is not required for a SNAP PAC EB-W brain,
which has no card slot.)
2. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
3. In the Inspect window’s Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the controller (or choose it
from the drop-down list).
4. Click Wireless LAN and choose Wireless LAN Configure.
5. Change the WLAN Logging value as Product Support directs.
6. Enter the Network Key.
7. Click Apply. When asked to restart the device, click Yes.
The log is always written to the same file; path and filename on both controllers and brains is:
/sdcard0/ATH0.LOG

If the file already exists, new data is appended to the end of it.
The log file looks similar to this:

Product Support will interpret the log file.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 231

USING PAC MANAGER TO TROUBLESHOOT PROBLEMS

232 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 A: Menus

FILE MENU
New. Displays the Create New Tag Database dialog, allowing you to specify the name and location of a new
tag database. If changes to the current configuration have not been saved, you will be asked if you wish to
save those changes before proceeding. Only one configuration may be open at a time.

Open. Displays the Open Tag Database dialog, allowing you to open a previously created tag database. If
changes to the current configuration have not been saved, you will be asked if you wish to save those changes
before proceeding. Note that only one configuration may be open at a time.

Close. Closes the current configuration. If changes to the configuration have not been saved, you will be
asked if you wish to save those changes.

Save. Displays the Save Tag Database dialog, allowing you to save your configuration to disk.

Save As. Displays the Save Tag Database As dialog, allowing you to define a new name and/or location for
the current configuration.

(Recent Tag Databases). The four most recently opened Tag Databases are listed below Save As on the
File menu. Selecting any of them is equivalent to choosing Open Tag Database from the File menu and
entering the tag database name.

Exit. Closes the current configuration file and exits PAC Manager. If changes to the current configuration have
not been saved, you will be asked if you wish to save those changes before exiting PAC Manager.

EDIT MENU
Cut. Has no current functionality.

Copy. Available when an I/O Unit is highlighted in the tree view. When selected, the highlighted I/O Unit will
be copied to the clipboard.

Paste. Pastes an I/O Unit from the clipboard into the strategy tree. This item is enabled only when an I/O Unit
has been previously copied to the clipboard.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 233

TOOLS MENU

TOOLS MENU
Select menu items in the Tools menu to inspect and manage SNAP PAC controllers and brains, including
configuring IP addresses, installing firmware, and exchanging files.

Send Configuration to I/O Unit. After you have finished configuring I/O units and saved the
configuration file, you must load the configuration file into the I/O unit’s memory. This menu item opens the
Send Configuration To I/O Unit dialog box.

Inspect. Opens the Inspect Opto 22 Device window. Select this menu item to view and change I/O and other
configuration settings for a specific SNAP PAC controller or brain.
IMPORTANT: Configuration changes made to the I/O Unit in the Inspect window are not saved in the PAC Manager
configuration file.

Maintenance. Displays the I/O Unit Maintenance window. Select this menu item to upgrade firmware,
exchange files, and manage items in flash memory.

Assign IP Address. Displays the Assign IP Address dialog. Select this menu item to see all Opto 22 Ethernet
devices that are broadcasting DHCP or BootP requests. You can then assign IP addresses to these devices and
test the addresses to confirm proper communication.

Change IP Settings. Displays the Change IP Settings dialog box. Select this menu item to change the IP
address and related network settings on a SNAP PAC controller or brain.

Install Firmware via Ethernet. Opens the Maintenance dialog box, which is used to download new
firmware to SNAP PAC controllers and brains.

Install Firmware via Serial Connection. Launches the application OptoFlash-ENET, which is used to
download new firmware to SNAP Ethernet and SNAP Simple brains via a serial connection. See the online help
included with OptoFlash-ENET for more information.

Install Firmware via Failsafe Bootloader Mode. Provides a way to install firmware when the firmware
in the device is damaged. See “Replacing Damaged Firmware” on page 212.

Import/Copy I/O Unit. Displays the Inspect Opto 22 Device window. This dialog enables you to save an I/O
unit’s flash memory image to a file on your hard disk. This image file can then be used to configure another I/O
unit. Configuration information can also be read directly from an I/O unit and sent directly to another I/O unit,
or imported into PAC Manager to create a new I/O unit configuration that can be expanded upon.

Modbus Calculator. Converts an I/O unit memory map address to a Modbus Unit ID and Register Address.
See “Determining Modbus Unit ID and Register Address” on page 114.

Find Opto 22 MMP Devices. Displays a dialog box you can use to find the MAC and IP addresses (see
“Find Opto 22 MMP Devices” on page 257) of all Opto 22 memory-mapped devices on the Ethernet network.

VIEW MENU
Toolbar. Toggles the display of the toolbar.

Status Bar. Toggles the display of the Status Bar.

234 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX A: MENUS

HELP MENU
Help Topics. Opens the PAC Manager Help file’s index of topics.

Manuals. Provides the PAC Manager User’s Guides in PDF format.

Opto 22 on the Web. Provides links to downloads, product support, and the Opto 22 website.

About PAC Manager. Provides general information about PAC Manager, including the version number and
copyright information.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 235

HELP MENU

236 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 B: Dialog Boxes

ADD/EDIT ANALOG POINT

Use this dialog box to add analog points or edit the configuration of existing analog points.

Name. Type in a name for the I/O point. The name must start with a letter and may contain letters, numbers,
and underscores (spaces are converted to underscores).

Description (optional). Enter a description of the point.

Type. When the channel can be configured as either an input or an output, select the type from the
drop-down list.

Module. Select the I/O module or point type from the drop-down list. All available modules of the type
specified will be included.

Units. Each analog module has a default set of units. These units are displayed in this field. If you assign
custom units to the module (by clicking the Custom button), the custom units will appear here instead.

Zero Scale. The module’s default zero-scale value appears here. This can be changed to a custom value (by
clicking the Custom button).

Full Scale. The module’s default full-scale value appears here. This can be changed to a custom value (by
clicking the Custom button).

Default button. Click here to return the units, zero-scale value, and full-scale value to the defaults for the
module. This is useful if you have assigned custom units and values through the Custom button that you now
wish to ignore.

Custom button. Click here to display the Scale Analog Readings to assign custom units, zero-scale, and/or
full-scale values to the module. For example, you could change the voltage range of a 0–10 VDC module to be
interpreted instead as a pressure range of 20–200 psia.

Watchdog. Click No (the default) to disable a watchdog on this point, or click Yes to enable the watchdog
(available for outputs only). If you select Yes, a new field will appear to allow you to define the value to be
assigned to the output should the watchdog be triggered. Enter a value between the zero-scale and full-scale
values (described above).
A watchdog is triggered if no communication activity is detected on the bus for the amount of time specified
in the Watchdog field of this point’s I/O unit.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 237

ADD/EDIT DIGITAL POINT

ADD/EDIT DIGITAL POINT

Use this dialog box to configure a digital point for an I/O unit.

Name. Type in a name for the I/O point. The name must start with a letter and may contain letters, numbers,
and underscores (spaces are converted to underscores).

Description (optional). Enter a description of the point.

Type. When the channel can be configured as either an input or an output, select the type from the
drop-down list.

Module. Select the I/O module or point type from the drop-down list. All available modules of the type
specified will be included.

Features. Click here to view and select from the available features for the I/O point you are configuring.
Features are available only if you are adding a point to a multifunction I/O unit. By default no feature is
selected.
For inputs, depending on the module and I/O unit, you may be able to configure the module as a counter,
on-pulse, off-pulse, frequency, period, on-time totalizer, off-time totalizer, or quadrature counter feature. You
may be able to configure an output module as a time-proportional output (TPO).

Watchdog. This field, which appears only if you enable the watchdog, also has only two values. Click the
field and select On or Off from the drop-down list. Remember, watchdogs are available only for output
modules.

ADD/EDIT EVENT MESSAGE

Use this dialog box to add a new event message or edit an existing event message.

Message Name. Type in a descriptive name for this event message. The message name is not sent to the
I/O Unit. It is used only within PAC Manager to differentiate event messages from one another.

Message Text. For e-mail, serial, and SNMP event messages, type in the text to be sent as the message. For
MemMap Copying, this field holds the Source Memory Map address or the Source Data. Plugins can be used
in the message text. The text limit is 127 characters.

Streaming. To have the I/O Unit periodically stream data back to a PC, select Enabled from the drop-down
list. You must first use Configure Streaming to set the host(s) to receive the streamed data.
Period (sec). Enter the interval in seconds at which streaming should take place. A value of 0 means that
data will be streamed only once.

E-mail. To have the I/O Unit send the Message Text using e-mail, select Enabled from the drop-down list. You
must first use Configure E-mail to set the e-mail address that will receive the Message Text.
Period (sec). Enter the interval in seconds at which the e-mail should be sent. A value of 0 means that
the e-mail message will be sent only once.

Serial Module. To have the I/O Unit send the Message Text as a string through a serial communication
module, select Enabled or Disabled from the drop-down list and enter the string to send in the Message Text
area. You must first use Configure Serial Modules to set serial modules and their ports.
Serial Ports Mask. Enter a mask representing the serial modules and ports to send the message
through. Bits 0-31 correspond to ports 0-31.

238 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

SNMP Trap. To have the I/O Unit send the Message Text as an SNMP trap, select Enabled from the
drop-down list. You must first use Configure SNMP Agent to set up SNMP system variables, community
groups, and management hosts.
Period (sec). Enter the interval in seconds at which to send the SNMP trap. A value of 0 means that the
trap will be sent only once.
Trap Type. Enter the trap type required by your SNMP management software. Refer to the
documentation for your SNMP management software for information on determining the required
SNMP trap type.
Priority. If you are using SNMP with an outgoing PPP (modem) connection and want the SNMP trap
stored in the I/O Unit until the next communication, set Priority to Low. If you want the I/O Unit to
immediately dial out and send the trap, set Priority to High.

MemMap Copy Destination. To change the state of a digital point on a different I/O Unit, or to copy data
from one memory map address to another, select Enabled from the drop-down list and complete the
MemMap Address, IP Address, Period (msec), and IP Port fields for the location the data is being copied to. In
the Message Text area, enter the source data or memory map location data is being copied from.
MemMap Address. Enter the destination memory map address in hexadecimal. You do not have to
include the leading FFFF.
Period (msec). Enter the interval in milliseconds at which the MemMap copy should take place. A value
of 0 means that the copy will be done only once.
IP Address. Enter the IP address of the destination I/O Unit. Use 0.0.0.0 if copying to an address on the
same I/O Unit.
IP Port. Enter the IP port of the destination I/O Unit. This field is ignored if copying to the same I/O Unit.

ADD/EDIT I/O UNIT

Use this dialog box to add a new I/O Unit or edit an existing I/O Unit.
1. Enter a name for the I/O unit. The name must start with a letter and may contain letters, numbers, and
underscores. Spaces are converted to underscores.
2. (Optional) Enter a description of the unit.
3. Select the type of I/O unit from the drop-down list.
4. Choose whether temperatures will be handled in Fahrenheit or Celsius.
5. Specify the communication port to use (2001, unless you have changed it for security purposes).
6. Enter the I/O unit’s IP address.
7. The Address List area shows IP addresses of the I/O units that should receive this configuration. If you
have I/O units that are exactly alike, list all of them here. That way you can download the configuration
file to all the I/O units at once. To list them, click Add and enter a single IP address or a range of addresses.
8. Select whether you want a Watchdog on the unit. The default is No (disabled). If you select Yes, a new
field appears; enter the Watchdog timeout value in seconds. The default timeout is 0.5 seconds.
When a watchdog is enabled, the I/O unit monitors activity on the port. If no communication is received
for the specified interval, the unit automatically sets designated digital and analog I/O points to values
you have set in the Watchdog field of the Add/Edit Analog Point or Add/Edit Digital Point.

ADD/EDIT IP ADDRESS
Use this dialog box to add an IP Address or a range of IP Addresses that will all receive this I/O unit
configuration. Usually these are I/O units that are exactly alike. Also use this dialog box to modify a single IP
address.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 239

ADD/EDIT MEMORY MAP VALUES

1. Click either Add one IP Address or Add a range of IP Addresses.

2. For a single IP address, enter or change the address and click OK.
3. To add a range of IP addresses, enter the first address in the range in the From field. Enter the last IP
address in the To field. Then click OK.

ADD/EDIT MEMORY MAP VALUES

Use this dialog box to add a new Memory Map Value or edit an existing Memory Map Value.

Address. Type in a valid Memory Map Address. The address must be in hexadecimal and correspond to a
valid write area in the device’s Memory Map. Use the OptoMMP Protocol Guide (form 1465) as a reference.

Value. Type in the value to send to the above address. The value may be in hexadecimal (integer types only)
or decimal. For hex, precede the value with 0x. (Based on this convention, PAC Manager will remember if your
value is in hex or decimal.)

Type. Select the type of Memory Map Value.

ADD/EDIT PID LOOPS

Use this dialog box to add or change PID loops on SNAP PAC brains and R-series controllers. You can configure
up to 96 PID loops. Four algorithms are available to choose from.
See also “Configuring PID Loops” on page 64.
1. Enter a unique, descriptive name for the PID.
2. (Optional) Enter a description of the PID.
3. Select the type of input: I/O Point, Host, or PID Output.
– If the PID’s process variable comes from an I/O point on the same unit, select I/O Point. Choose the
point from the drop-down list or type a point name to configure a new point.
– If the PID’s process variable comes from an PAC Control strategy, select Host. Enter an initial value for
the input.
– If the PID’s process variable is the output of another PID on this brain (a cascading control loop),
select PID Output. Choose the PID from the drop-down list.
4. (Optional) If you chose I/O Point or PID, check the Square Root box if the error should be calculated
based on the square root of the process variable (applies to flow control systems where volumetric flow is
proportional to the square root of a signal from a flow transducer).
5. Set the valid range of the process variable by entering the low range and the high range. (See below
for optional responses to out-of-range input.)
6. Choose the source for the setpoint: I/O Point, Host, or PID Output.
– To control the setpoint using a device such as a potentiometer, select I/O Point; choose an I/O point
from the drop-down list or type a new point name.
– To control setpoint using PAC Control or PAC Display, select Host and enter an initial value.
– If another PID loop will control the setpoint, select PID Output and choose the PID from the
drop-down list.
7. Choose the destination for the PID output: I/O Point or Host. (To use the output for controlling the
setpoint or input of another PID, choose Host.)
8. Enter upper and lower clamp values to prevent the output from exceeding a desirable range. These
values should equal the range of the output point, if used. Or choose values to make sure that the output
device doesn’t shut off (for example, keeping a circulation pump running regardless of the PID output) or

240 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

that the output never reaches a destructively high setting (for example, keeping a motor below
maximum).
9. (Optional) Enter minimum and maximum change values. The output won’t respond until the
minimum change is reached (for example, you may not want a heater to turn on to correct a 1 degree
error). Maximum change prevents too drastic a change in output (for example, you could limit the
increase in a pump’s output to prevent pipe breakage). The default for both minimum and maximum is
zero, which disables the feature.
10. Choose how the PID should respond (output options) if the input goes out of range. If no boxes are
checked, the PID will freeze output at the current value. To have PAC Control logic or an operator respond,
check Switch to manual mode. To force the output to a specific value, check Force output and type the
output values. NOTE: If both boxes are checked (forced output and manual mode), the output will be forced
and the PID put into manual mode; but if the PID is already in manual mode, the output will not be forced.
11. Choose algorithm: Velocity, ISA, Parallel, Interacting. See also “Algorithm Choices” on page 64.
12. Choose mode. Auto activates the PID. Manual requires that PAC Control logic or an operator control the
PID output.
13. Enter a scan rate to determine how often the input is scanned and the controller output is calculated.
Minimum value is 0.001 (1 millisecond). Scan time should be greater than system lag (the time it takes for
the controller output to have a measurable effect on the system). Also consider other PIDs and tasks on
the brain competing for processing power.
14. Enter a positive or negative value for Gain. Heating systems usually require a negative value and cooling
systems a positive value. NOTE: Gain is usually refined during the tuning process.
15. (Optional) Enter Feed Forward Initial and Feed Forward Gain values if you need to offset the
controller output in your application. These values are constants that are multiplied and added to the
controller output; often they are not used in PIDs.
16. (Optional) Enter Integral (Tune I) and Derivative (Tune D) settings if you know the desirable settings.
However, Integral and Derivative are not essential to basic configuration and are better determined in the
tuning process.
17. Click OK.

ADD/MODIFY NEW DEVICE

To add a new I/O Unit Name, click Options to open the Add New Device dialog box.
Device Name: Enter a name for the I/O unit. You can use the IP address or any unique name. Change the
timeout if necessary.
Direct Connection to Ethernet Device: Use this option if there is a direct connection to the brain via an
Ethernet cable.
• IP Address or Hostname: Enter the IP address or hostname of an Ethernet I/O unit, such as a PAC EB-series
or PAC R-series device.
• Ethernet Port: Use the default of 2001 for Ethernet Port unless you have changed the port.
Direct Connection to Serial Device: Use this option if the I/O unit is connected directly to the PC using a
serial cable and a PCI-AC48 adapter card.
• PC Serial Port: Enter the serial port on the PC where the brain is connected.
• PC Baud Rate: The baud rate on the PC must match the rate set on the brain.
• Serial Device Address: Enter the serial address of the brain.
Pass-Through Ethernet Controller to Serial Device: Use this option for SNAP-PAC-SB1 and SB2 brains
connected to a SNAP-PAC-S1 or S2 controller.
• IP Address or Hostname: Enter the IP address or hostname of the S-series controller.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 241

ADD/MODIFY NEW DEVICE

• Ethernet Port: Use the default of 2001 for Ethernet Port unless you have changed it.
• Controller Serial Port: Enter the controller’s serial port where the brain is connected. On a SNAP-PAC-S1, it’s
Serial 2. On a SNAP-PAC-S2, it could be any port.
• Controller Baud Rate: The baud rate on the controller must match the rate set on the brain.
• Serial Device Address: Enter the serial address of the brain.
• 2-Wire RS-485: Check this box for a 2-wire RS-485 connection. SNAP-PAC-S1 controllers support only
2-wire RS-485. SNAP-PAC-S2 controllers support 2-wire or 4-wire RS-485.

242 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

ASSIGN IP ADDRESS
Use this dialog box to assign IP addresses to Opto 22 devices, either by listening for devices sending DHCP or
BootP broadcasts, or by first creating a list of mappings.
NOTE: In order to assign IP addresses, you must be logged in with administrator rights.

See also “Assigning an IP Address” on page 8, especially “Checking Network Setup and PC.”
Each device ships from the factory with a unique MAC address (printed on a label on the device) and a default
IP address of 0.0.0.0, which is invalid. SNAP PAC controllers and EB-series brains, SNAP-LCE, SNAP Ultimate,
SNAP Ethernet, and SNAP Simple I/O send out a BootP broadcast when first turned on. E1s and E2s send out a
DHCP broadcast. In most cases, you must give each of these devices a fixed, static IP address. See also
“Assigning IP Addresses to SNAP PAC” on page 10.
Assigning IP Addresses to SNAP PAC
If your network has a DHCP server, either assign a static IP address before connecting the device to the
network (preferred), or disable the server. Note the MAC address of each device that needs an IP address, and
turn on the device(s).
NOTE: SNAP PAC controllers have two separate Ethernet network interfaces. Each interface has a separate MAC
address and therefore takes a separate IP address. Only ENET1 sends a BootP request. Once you have assigned this
primary IP address, you can assign the secondary address using the Inspect Opto 22 Device window.

1. Double-click the MAC address of the device in the upper list.

2. In the Mapping dialog box, enter the IP Address and Subnet Mask for the device. If it will be talking to a
device on another subnet, enter the Gateway (router) address. If it will talk only on the local subnet, leave
the gateway address all zeros (0.0.0.0). Leave the DNS address at 0.0.0.0 and the Host Name field blank.
Click OK.
3. The new IP address information appears in the upper list in the dialog box, and the device’s status
changes to Mapped. The address information also appears in the lower list to show that this device has
been mapped to this address.
4. With the device still highlighted, click Assign. The address is saved to flash memory and the status
changes to Static IP. To verify that the IP address has been successfully assigned, highlight the device in
the upper list and click Test. A DOS window opens and the IP address is pinged.
5. For future reference, write the IP address next to the MAC address on the white sticker provided on the
device.
6. To save the list of IP address and MAC address mappings (the lower list in the dialog box), click Save List.
NOTE: If you have a large number of devices or are on a separate network, you can create the mappings list first, save
it, and then load it into PAC Manager later. Devices that match the mappings receive their IP addresses as soon as
they appear in the upper list. Click Assign All to save them.

ASSIGN SECONDARY IP ADDRESS

SNAP PAC controllers each have two, independent Ethernet network interfaces. With PAC Project Professional,
you can use these interfaces to segment the control network from the company network or for Ethernet link
redundancy. For more information, see the PAC Control User’s Guide (form 1700), the PAC Display User’s Guide
(form 1702) and the OptoOPCServer User’s Guide (form 1439, available with the purchase of PAC Project
Professional or OptoOPCServer).

PAC Manager User’s Guide 243

CONFIGURE E-MAIL

IMPORTANT: The two Ethernet interfaces will work only if they are on separate network segments, so the control
engine can clearly determine where to direct communication. For example:

ENET1 ENET2

IP Address: 192.168.0.12 10.0.0.5

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

The first Ethernet interface, ENET1, sends a BootP broadcast and is assigned an IP address just like other Opto
22 devices (see “Assign IP Address” on page 243).
To assign an IP address to ENET2, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that ENET1 has already received an IP address.
2. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button.
3. In the Inspect window, enter the IP address for ENET1 and click Status Read. Status information for the
controller appears in the window. If the secondary IP address has not been assigned yet, the secondary IP
address information will show all zeros.
4. Click Status Write. Enter the IP address information for ENET2 in the Value column in the Secondary IP
Address, Secondary Subnet Mask, and (if necessary) Secondary Default Gateway fields. Click Apply. The
information is sent to the SNAP PAC, but it cannot communicate on the secondary interface until it is
restarted.
5. In the Operation Commands section, highlight Restart Device from powerup. Then click Send Command.
The SNAP PAC controller is restarted. You can check to make sure the controller is back on line by clicking
Status Read again and making sure the secondary IP address information is shown. To verify communication,
open PAC Manager on a PC that is on the same network segment as the secondary IP address, and use the
Inspect window to check status.

CONFIGURE E-MAIL
You can send an email message or page someone in response to an event. Use this dialog box to set up email
parameters. See “Configure Event Messages” on page 245 to set up the message itself.

IP Address and Port. Enter the IP address and port number of the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
server the I/O unit will use to send email. You should be able to get this information from your network
administrator.

Timeout. Enter the length of time in milliseconds the I/O unit should wait for a response from the email
server. The default is 30,000.

From. Enter a valid email address that will identify the I/O unit to the person who receives the email.

To. Enter the email address of the person who will receive the email.

Subject. Enter a phrase that will indicate the purpose of the email to the person receiving it. Note that this
subject line applies to all email messages sent by this I/O unit. Plugins can be used in this field. For example, if
a similar email will be sent at intervals (such as an email of the data log), you can use the seqid plugin to put a
sequence number at the end of each subject line. This plugin is in the format:
$!_seqid_
So, for example, if you enter Ultimate Data Log $!_seqid_ in the subject field, the first email message will have
a subject line of Ultimate Data Log 0, the next message will have a subject line of Ultimate Data Log 1, and so
on. For information on other plugins, see “Using Plugins” on page 95.

244 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

IMPORTANT: For the configuration to take effect, you must upload the configuration file to the brain, save it to flash
memory, and restart the brain.

CONFIGURE EVENT MESSAGES

If you are using PAC Control or PAC Manager 9.0 or higher, configure event messages in the
configuration file as shown on page 92.
If you are not using PAC Control or are using a PAC Manager version less than 9.0, you cannot
configure event messages in a configuration file. Instead, use PAC Manager’s Inspect mode and follow the
steps below. Note that event messages are not available on SB brains, since messaging requires an Ethernet
connection.
1. In the PAC Manager main window, click the Inspect button .
– If you have not used the Inspect window before, the window will not show any data. Select your
controller from the drop-down list.
– If you have used the Inspect window before, the last device you inspected is shown in the Device
Name field, and current Status Read information appears in the window.

– If you have configured other devices, they are listed in alphabetical order in the drop-down list.
– If you have configured six or more devices, the Inspect window provides two additional time-saving
features: Next and Back navigation buttons (to navigate back and forth through the alphabetized list

PAC Manager User’s Guide 245

CONFIGURE EVENT MESSAGES

of devices), and a list of the five most recently inspected devices (displayed at the top of the
drop-down list).

Next and Back navigation buttons

and Most Recently Used list
are displayed when you have
six or more devices configured.

2. In the Device Name field, type the name (or IP address) of the I/O unit (or choose it from the drop-down
list).
3. Click Events and choose Event Messages from the submenu.

4. From the drop-down list, choose the lowest unused message number.
Unused message numbers have no asterisk.
5. For an email or serial message, or optionally for an SNMP message, enter the message text.
Message text is not sent in the streaming packet. Message text is limited to 127 characters. You can place
data from the I/O unit’s memory map into the message by using a plugin (see page 95). If you are
sending a serial message, make sure the text is formatted so the serial device that receives it will
understand it.

246 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

6. Enter two masks indicating the Scratch Pad on and off bits that should trigger the message.
For help in figuring out the masks, see “Digital Point and Scratch Pad Masks” on page 132.
7. Streaming section: To send a stream of data as the message, choose Enabled from the drop-down list.
Enter how often in seconds to send the stream (0 sends it only once).
For information on streaming, see page 96.
8. E-mail section: To send an email message, choose Enabled from the drop-down list. Enter how often in
seconds to send the email (0 sends it only once).
9. Serial Module section: To send a message through a serial module to a serial device, choose Enabled from
the drop-down list. Enter a mask representing the modules and ports to receive the message.
Information in “Configuring Serial or Wiegand Events and Reactions” on page 140 may be helpful.
10. SNMP section: To send an SNMP trap as the message, change Disabled to Enabled. Enter how often to
send the trap (0 sends it only once). Also enter the trap type (determined by your SNMP management
software). If you are using SNMP with outgoing PPP and want the trap stored in the I/O unit until the next
communication, set Priority to Low. If you want the I/O unit to immediately dial out and send the trap, set
Priority to High.
For information on SNMP, see page 96.
NOTE: SNMP messages must be acknowledged. You can do so in your application or in PAC Manager’s Inspect
window: in the Message section, change the State to Acknowledge and click Apply.

11. Memmap Copy Destination section: To copy memory map data, complete this section using information
from “Copying Memory Map Data” on page 109.
12. When all fields are correct, click Apply.
13. Repeat from step 4 to configure additional event messages.
14. For each type of message you configure, make sure you also set up basic configuration:

Serial: See page 47

SNMP: See page 96
Email: See page 100
Streaming: See page 104

15. When you have finished configuring all event messages and any additional configuration required for
them, in the PAC Manager Inspect window, make sure the IP address shown is the correct one. Then click
the Status Write button in the upper-left part of the window.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 247

CONFIGURE I/O POINTS

16. In the Operation Commands list, highlight Store configuration to flash.

17. Click Send Command.

The configuration data is stored to flash memory and a Success message appears.

IMPORTANT: For the following configurations, you must also restart the unit for configuration to take effect:
Changes in TCP port for serial modules SNMP configuration
Email configuration PPP configuration
Data logging interval

18. If you have configured any of these items, in the Operation Commands list, highlight Restart I/O Unit
from powerup. Click Send Command.
The I/O unit is restarted and a success message appears.

CONFIGURE I/O POINTS

SNAP I/O units are configured by first adding a SNAP module, then configuring each point on that module.
SNAP modules and points are listed in an expandable, tree-like view. The window is resizable.

I/O Unit. Displays the I/O unit on which I/O points are being configured.

Type. Displays the type of I/O Unit for which points are going to be added. This field is for display purposes
only and cannot be modified.

Add. To add I/O points to a SNAP I/O Unit, you must first add a SNAP module to the I/O Unit, then add I/O
points to that module.
To add a SNAP module to an I/O Unit

248 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

Highlight the location where the module will be added and click the Add button. In the Add Module
dialog that appears, select the type of module (Analog Input/Output or Digital Input/Output) and the
name of the SNAP module you are configuring. Click OK.
To add an I/O point to a SNAP module
Double-click a SNAP module in the list to see the point locations it contains. Highlight the location where
the point will be added and click the Add button. Depending on whether the I/O point being added is
analog or digital, enter configuration information for the new I/O point in either the Add/Edit Analog
Point or Add/Edit Digital Point.

Modify. To change an existing SNAP module or I/O point, highlight the item in the list and click the Modify
button. Change configuration information for the SNAP module or I/O point in the Add Module dialog, the
Add/Edit Analog Point or the Add/Edit Digital Point as necessary.

Delete. To delete an existing SNAP module or I/O point, highlight the item in the list and click Delete. Before
deleting a SNAP module, you must first delete all I/O points associated with that module. When deleting I/O
points, note that only points having a reference count of zero can be deleted.

Move To. To move an I/O point to an empty channel on another (or the same) I/O Unit, highlight the point,
click Move To, and use the Move Point To to move the point. If the I/O point is referenced in a PID loop or
event/reaction, you can move the point only within the same I/O unit, not to another unit.

Expand All/Collapse All. To view or hide all I/O points in a SNAP I/O unit, click the Expand All button or the
Collapse All button.

CONFIGURE I/O POINTS (G4EB2)

G4EB2 I/O units are configured by adding a point for each G4 module.

I/O Unit. Displays the I/O unit on which I/O points are being configured.

Type. Displays the type of I/O Unit for which points are going to be added. This field is for display purposes
only and cannot be modified.

Add. Points that have not been configured yet show as Not Used. Double-click the channel number for the
point you want to add. Enter configuration information for the new I/O point. See “Configuring Digital Points
for a G4EB2” on page 39.

Modify . To change an existing point, highlight the item in the list and click the Modify button. See
“Configuring Digital Points for a G4EB2” on page 39.

Delete. To delete an existing point, highlight the item in the list and click Delete. When deleting I/O points,
note that only points having a reference count of zero can be deleted.

Move To. To move an I/O point to an empty channel on another (or the same) I/O Unit, highlight the point,
click Move To, and use the Move Point To to move the point. If the I/O point is referenced in a PID loop or
event/reaction, you can move the point only within the same I/O unit, not to another unit.

CONFIGURE I/O UNITS

This dialog box shows all the I/O units in the current configuration and is the “home base” for configuring I/O.
For more details on configuring I/O and features, see Chapter 2: Configuring Devices.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 249

CONFIGURE I/O UNITS

To resize the dialog box, move the mouse near any edge until the pointer turns into a two-way arrow, then
click and drag the border in any direction. To resize a column, click and drag the column dividers in the list
header, or double click the divider to expand the column just wide enough to display the longest item in the
column.
To configure a new I/O unit, click Add or double-click anywhere in the list box below any configured units.
The Add/Edit I/O Unit dialog box will appear.
To change an I/O unit in the list, highlight it and click Modify and change the unit’s settings in the Add/Edit
I/O Unit dialog box.
To remove an I/O unit in the list, highlight it and click Delete. Only I/O units with a reference count of zero
can be deleted.
To add or modify I/O points for the highlighted I/O unit, click I/O Points. The Configure I/O Points dialog box
will appear.
To copy and save I/O Unit configurations, click Import/Copy and select I/O units in the I/O Unit
Import/Copy dialog box that appears.
To configure additional items, click the buttons shown below:
Click PID Loops to configure proportional-integral derivative (PID) loops on SNAP PAC brains or R-series
controllers.
• Click Modules and select a module type:
– Serial Modules
(see “Configuring RS-232 and RS-485/422 Serial Communication Modules” on page 47)
– Wiegand Modules
(see “Configuring Wiegand Modules” on page 52)
– Profibus Modules
(see “Configuring Profibus Modules” on page 54)
– Motion Modules
(see the SNAP PAC Motion Control User’s Guide, form 1673)
– SSI Modules
(see “Configuring SSI (Serial Synchronous Interface) Modules” on page 55)
– CAN Modules
(see “Configuring CAN Modules” on page 56)
– HART Modules
(see “Configuring HART Modules” on page 60)
• Click Events and select an event to define or an event message to send as a reaction to an event.
• Click Scratch Pad to view and configure bitmask, integer, float, and string memory areas of a SNAP PAC
controller or brain.
NOTE: If you are using the Scratch Pad on a SNAP PAC S-series controller, you must first configure an I/O unit to
represent the controller. Configure this I/O unit as a Generic OptoMMP Device, using the IP address for the
controller. (Do not add any points or configure other features.)

• Click Communications and select the type of communication to configure, for example, PPP, Modbus,
Security, Streaming, and so on.
• Click Others to configure date and time, data logging, or I/O unit options you want to have saved in the
configuration file.

250 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

CONFIGURE MEMORY MAP VALUES

Use this dialog box to assign values to specific memory map locations that are not otherwise included in
configuration files. These values will be sent to the I/O unit or controller when you send the configuration file.
For memory map addresses and valid values, see the OptoMMP Protocol Guide (form 1465).
NOTE: If you are using a SNAP PAC S-series controller, you must first configure an I/O unit to represent the controller.
Configure this I/O unit as a Generic OptoMMP Device, using the IP address for the controller. (Do not add any points
or configure other features.)

The Memory Map Values List displays the Address, Value and Type of each Memory Map Value. The Address is
always represented in hexadecimal (hex). The Value field can contain hex or decimal values (integer types
only). If the value is in hex it is preceded by 0x. The Type field can be either 4-byte Int, 8-byte Int, Float, or
String.
• To add a new Memory Map Value, click Add to open the Add/Edit Memory Map Values dialog box.
• To change an existing Memory Map Value, highlight it and click Modify.
• To delete an existing Memory Map Value, highlight it and click Delete. To highlight more than one, hold
down the Ctrl key and click additional items in the list.

CONFIGURE PID LOOPS

Use this dialog box to configure proportional integral derivative (PID) loops on SNAP PAC brains, and R-series
controllers. You can configure up to 96 PID loops. Four algorithms are available to choose from. See also
“Configuring PID Loops” on page 64.
• To add a PID, highlight the lowest available number in the list and click Add to open the Add/Edit PID
dialog box.
• To change an existing PID, highlight it in the list and click Modify.
• To delete a PID, highlight it and click Delete.
Each PID must be configured with essential parameters and then individually tuned for efficiency. You can
configure PIDs through either PAC Manager or PAC Control, but for tuning PIDs, it’s easier to use the graphic
tuning tools in PAC Control. (For details, see the PAC Control User’s Guide, form 1700.)

CONFIGURE PPP
Local IP Address. Enter the Local IP Address for the PPP interface on the I/O unit. Enter the local Subnet
Mask only if you are using classless IP addressing. If you are not using classless IP addressing, leave the Subnet
Mask at zero, and the I/O unit will calculate the subnet mask.
IMPORTANT: The network address for the PPP interface must be different from the network ID for the Ethernet
interface. (The network address is obtained by ANDing the IP address and the subnet mask.)

Max Authentication Retries. Enter the maximum number of times a login/password combination can be
retried.

PPP Link Always Connected. If you want outgoing PPP to always be connected, so there is no need for
the I/O unit to dial out, check this box.

Modem Initialization String. Change the modem initialization string and modem hangup string if
necessary. Make sure you use the setting to ignore DTR signal in the modem initialization string:

PAC Manager User’s Guide 251

CONFIGURE PPP

The default modem initialization string is AT&D0^M~~~~

Consult the command reference that came with your modem to determine the correct initialization
command strings. A sample modem initialization string might look like this:
AT&F^M~~AT&D0&K0^M~~AT&W0^M~~AT&Y0^M~~
The &F command sets the modem back to factory defaults. The ^M tells the Ethernet I/O unit to insert a
carriage return. The ~ tells it to insert a 500ms pause. The &W0 writes the current settings to NVRAM profile 0
on the modem. The &Y0 instructs the modem to use NVRAM profile 0 after resetting.
This initialization string is just a sample; command strings for your modem may differ.

Outgoing PPP. If the I/O unit will send outgoing calls, complete the Outgoing PPP section:
Choose Enabled from the drop-down list.
In the Use Local IP Address field, choose Yes to have the I/O unit use the Local IP Address you entered for the
PPP link; choose No to have the remote device assign the I/O unit an IP address for the PPP link. The default is
No.
If you want the I/O unit to use the device the I/O unit is calling as the default gateway for all communication,
choose Yes for Set As Default Gateway. The default is No.
Enter the Login and Password the I/O unit should use for authentication when it calls the remote device.
In the Phone number field, enter the number the modem should dial for outgoing calls from the I/O unit.
Change the following fields if necessary:
• Inactivity Timeout—If the I/O unit sends no packets and receives no packets for this number of seconds
after the PPP session is negotiated, the modem will hang up. The default is 30.
• Max Connect Time—The maximum amount of time in seconds an outgoing PPP connection can stay
connected after successful negotiation. Default is zero, which disables the timer.
• Max Dial Retries—The number of times the I/O unit will redial if the first attempt fails. Default is zero.
• Retry Interval—The number of seconds the I/O unit will wait before trying to redial after the first attempt
fails. Default is zero.
• Disable Time—If the maximum connect time or maximum number of retries has been reached, the
outgoing PPP dialer waits this number of seconds before doing anything. Default is zero.

Incoming PPP. If the I/O unit will receive incoming calls via modem, complete the Incoming PPP section:
Choose Enabled from the drop-down list so the modem will listen for incoming calls.
If you want the I/O unit to use the device calling the I/O unit as the default gateway for all communication,
choose Yes for Set As Default Gateway. The default is No.
Change the Inactivity Timeout if necessary. The default is 30.
Enter the Login and Password the I/O unit should accept for incoming calls.
In the Remote IP Address field, enter the IP address the I/O unit should give to devices that dial into the I/O
unit and ask for an address. This address must be on the same subnet as the local IP address.
Enter a modem listen string to make sure the modem automatically answers calls. The default modem listen
string is ATS0=1^M~ , which instructs the modem to answer any incoming calls on the first ring. Again, refer
to your modem’s command reference for the correct listen string.

252 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

CONFIGURE PROFIBUS MODULES

(Not applicable to SB brains) Profibus modules (part number SNAP-SCM-PROFI) are a type of serial module.
Before configuring a Profibus module, see the SNAP Serial Communication Module User’s Guide (form 1191)
for more information about these modules.
1. With the configuration file open, right-click the name of the I/O unit the Profibus module is on. From the
pop-up menu, choose Configure.
The Configure I/O Units dialog box opens.

Modules
button

2. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted. Click the Modules button and choose Profibus Modules
from the pop-up menu.

3. In the Number field, choose the Profibus module’s position from the drop-down list. Click to put a check
mark in the Used box.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 253

CONFIGURE SERIAL MODULES

4. If you need to change port numbers, enter the new numbers for each port in the TCP port Number field.
5. Change the Baud Rate and EOM Character List fields if necessary to match your Profibus devices. Choose
whether to have the module automatically send a Test Message when turned on (the default is Yes).
6. When data is correct, repeat from step 3 for additional Profibus modules.
7. When all Profibus modules are configured, click OK to close the dialog box and return to configuring I/O
units.
IMPORTANT: If you have changed a TCP port number, you must save the change to flash and restart the I/O unit
when you send the configuration data to the I/O unit (see “Sending Configuration Data to the I/O Unit” on page 69).

CONFIGURE SERIAL MODULES

This dialog allows you to configure SNAP serial communication modules (part numbers SNAP-SCM-232 and
SNAP-SCM-485) for use with the I/O unit. For each serial module port you want to use, click the corresponding
row and then enter or modify the values in the columns listed below. Most values can be changed by
selecting a new value from a drop-down list.

Status. To enable a port on a serial module, select the appropriate row and click the Status column. A
drop-down list is displayed with the choices Enabled, Disabled, and Clear. Choosing Enabled activates the
entire row and assigns default values to each column. Choosing Disabled deactivates the row but doesn’t
change any values in the other columns. Choosing Clear deactivates the row and clears all the other columns.
Only the columns that are Enabled will be sent to the I/O unit.

Module. The module location on the SNAP I/O rack. This value cannot be changed.

Port. The serial module port being configured. Each serial module has two ports, A and B. This value cannot
be changed.

IP Port. The IP Port number for access to the serial port. The default value that appears should work for most
IP communication, and changing this value shouldn’t be necessary. If the IP port number is changed, however,
the I/O unit must be restarted for the change to take effect.

Baud Rate. Choose the baud rate. The default is 9600.

Parity. Choose None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space from the drop-down list. The default is None.

Data Bits. Choose 8 or 7 from the drop-down list. The default is 8.

Stop Bits. Choose 1 or 2 from the drop-down list. The default is 1.

EOM Chars. Enter hexadecimal values representing the End Of Message characters that the I/O Unit should
be looking for. The default is 0D0A, which is the ASCII representation for carriage return and linefeed. A
maximum of eight hexadecimal digits may be entered.

Test Message. Select Yes in the drop-down list if you want the I/O Unit to send a test message on powerup.
Select No if no test message is desired. The default value is Yes.

CONFIGURE SNMP AGENT

SysName. Enter the name assigned to the I/O unit as a managed node within the SNMP management
system.

254 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

SysLocation. Enter the physical location of the I/O unit.

SysContact. Enter the ID of the contact person for the I/O unit.

Community Groups. To set up the Community Groups you need, highlight a line in the list. Click the String
cell within the line and type the name of the group. Then click in the Read, Write, and Trap cells and choose
Yes or No from the drop-down list to indicate whether that group has privileges to read, write, and receive
traps.

Management Hosts. To set up Management Hosts, highlight a line in the list. Start with hosts on the local
network first, because the system sends messages to hosts in numeric order, and it stops sending messages
when it finds a host that it cannot connect to. Click the Community String cell and enter the name of the
community group the host belongs to. Click the Host IP Address cell and enter its IP address, including the
dots (for example, 10.192.55.60).

Version. From the drop-down list, choose the version of SNMP you are using.

Destination Port. 161 is the default port for SNMP communications. If you know that your application will
use a different port, enter the number of that port here.

Authentication/Cold Start Trap. To enable authentication or cold start traps, click the box to check it.

CONFIGURE STREAMING
Enable Streaming. To enable streaming, choose Yes from the drop-down list.

Enable I/O Mirroring. I/O mirroring is a separate function. It’s generally not a good idea to use both
streaming and mirroring on the same I/O unit. See “Mirroring I/O Point Data” on page 107 for more
information.

Interval. Enter how often in milliseconds you want the I/O unit to send the streamed data. If you are
configuring streaming to use only as an event message, set the streaming interval to 0. Zero means that the
stream will be sent only once.

Use Default Streaming Area. To stream all addresses in the Streaming section of the I/O unit’s memory
map, click Use Default Streaming Area. For more information, see the memory map appendix in the OptoMMP
Protocol Guide (form 1465). (Note that the Streaming section does not include data from high-density digital
modules.)
To stream only part of the Streaming section, or to stream a different part of the memory map, click Specify
Streaming Area. Enter the starting address in the Memory Map Address field (the address must be entered in
hex), and enter the size in bytes of the data to stream in the Size Of Data field.

IP Port. Enter the IP port on the PCs or devices that receive the streamed data. Your application must refer to
this port number. Use the default of 5001 unless you know it is already being used for another purpose.

Stream Target. Enter the IP addresses of up to eight devices to receive the streamed data.

CONFIGURE WIEGAND MODULES

(Not applicable to SB brains) Wiegand modules are a type of serial module. Before configuring a Wiegand
module, see the (form 1191) for more information about these modules.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 255

CONFIGURE WIEGAND MODULES

1. With the configuration file open, right-click the name of the I/O unit the Wiegand module is on. From the
pop-up menu, choose Configure. The Configure I/O Units dialog box opens.

Modules
button

2. Make sure the correct I/O unit is highlighted. Click the Modules button and choose Wiegand Modules
from the pop-up menu.

256 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

3. In the Number field, choose the Wiegand module’s position from the drop-down list. Click to put a check
mark in the Used box.
4. If you need to change port numbers, enter the new numbers for each port in the TCP port Number fields.
5. Click the Format/Value cell, and from the drop-down list, choose a standard data format (shown by its
total data length) or choose C for custom.
NOTE: O is the 37-bit Opto 22 format used in a sample PAC Control strategy available for use with Wiegand
modules. For details, see the SNAP Serial Communication Module User’s Guide (form 1191).

6. Change the following fields if necessary to match your Wiegand hardware device:
Data Length—total length of data in the transmission
Site Position—first bit of the site code
Site Length—length of the site code, in bits
Badge Position—first bit of the badge code (should be the next bit after the site code)
Badge Length—length of the badge code, in bits
7. When data for both ports is correct, repeat from step 3 for additional Wiegand modules.
8. When all Wiegand modules are configured, click OK to close the dialog box and return to configuring I/O
units.
IMPORTANT: If you changed a TCP port number, you must save the change to flash and restart the I/O unit when you
send the configuration data to the I/O unit (see page 69).

9. When you are ready to send all configuration data to the I/O unit, see “Sending Configuration Data to the
I/O Unit” on page 69.

FIND OPTO 22 MMP DEVICES

Use this dialog box to find out the MAC addresses, IP addresses, firmware versions, and/or unit types of all
Opto 22 memory-mapped devices on the network. Opto 22 memory-mapped devices include SNAP PAC and
SNAP-LCE controllers, SNAP Ethernet, SNAP Ultimate, and SNAP Simple I/O units, and E1 and E2 I/O units.
(Opto 22 M4-series controllers with Ethernet cards are not included.)
CAUTION: You may have problems if your network includes old Opto 22 SNAP Ethernet brains with firmware version
R1.3m or earlier, or controllers with M4SENET-100 adapter cards at firmware version R1.3k or earlier (these may be
affected by the Find feature even though it does not report them). These brains and adapter cards may have to be
rebooted if you use the Find feature. To avoid this problem, update the older devices to newer firmware first.

1. Leave the MMP Port at 2001 unless you have changed it for security purposes.
2. Adjust the Timeout if necessary for your network. Timeout is in milliseconds.
3. Click Find. All the Opto 22 MMP devices on your network are listed. The total number of devices is shown
in the Devices Found field.
4. If you want to copy device information to the clipboard, click Copy.

INSPECT OPTO 22 DEVICE

When you use the Inspect Opto 22 Device window, you are reading and writing directly to a specific SNAP PAC
controller or brain. You must have its IP address in order to do so. The type of device determines which areas
are supported.
CAUTION: Any configuration changes you make here are not saved in a configuration file.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 257

I/O UNIT IMPORT/COPY

To use the Inspect Opto 22 Device window, enter the IP address of the device (or choose it from the
drop-down list). Then click the button on the left that corresponds to what you want to do:

Status Read. See basic information about a SNAP PAC controller or brain. See “Interpreting Status Data” on
page 149.

Status Write. Send commands to a device (such as Store configuration to flash), change the unit’s basic
configuration (such as whether degrees are shown in F or C), or assign the second IP address on a SNAP PAC
controller (see “Assign Secondary IP Address” on page 243).

Wireless LAN. Choose to configure a wireless LAN or view a wireless LAN’s status. See “Configuring Wireless
LAN Communication (Wired+Wireless Models Only)” on page 23.

Point Config. Configure I/O points. See “Configuring Analog and Digital Points and Features” on page 158.

Digital Bank, Analog Bank. Read I/O points. See “Reading Analog and Digital Banks” on page 178.

Digital Point, Analog Point. Read or write to individual I/O points. See “Reading and Writing to Points” on
page 170.

High Density. Read or write to SNAP high-density digital points. See “Reading and Writing to SNAP
High-Density Digital Points” on page 181.

System. Read or change the date and time. See “Reading System Date and Time” on page 184.

Scratch Pad. Read or write to Scratch Pad Bits, Integers, Floats, and Strings. See “Reading and Writing to the
Scratch Pad Area” on page 184.

Data Log. Configure data logging and read the log. See “Data Logging” on page 186.

PID. Configure PID loops. See “Configuring, Viewing, or Changing PID Loops” on page 168.

Events. Read current events and change events; configure event messages. See “Configuring Event
Messages” on page 142.

Communications. Display information about and configure security, protocols, communication ports, and
a variety modules including serial modules (RS-232, RS-485/422, Wiegand, Profibus, Motion, SSI, CAN, and
HART modules). For information on how to configure these modules, see “Configuring I/O Modules and
Points” on page 36.

Other. Read or write to any address in the device’s memory map. For a complete list of memory map
addresses, see the OptoMMP Protocol Guide (form 1465).

I/O UNIT IMPORT/COPY

Use this dialog box to import and copy I/O unit flash memory images. An I/O unit's flash memory contains
information about any settings that have been explicitly configured for that unit. A flash memory image saves
this information so it can be stored in a file or copied to another I/O unit. The dialog box contains:

Existing I/O Unit Flash Memory. Choose an existing I/O unit. If you want to add or modify an I/O unit,
click Options. For help, see “Add/Modify New Device” on page 241.

258 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

Previously Saved I/O Unit Image File. Select this option and enter the filename of a flash memory
image file that you want to copy to another I/O unit. You can also click the Browse button at the end of the
filename field and locate the image file using the standard File Open dialog box.

Read. After selecting an Image Source option, click Read to read a flash memory image from an I/O unit or an
existing flash memory image file. Note that the dialog box does not close when you click this button.

Send Image To I/O Unit Flash Memory. Select this option and enter an I/O unit's IP address to copy the
selected flash memory image source to that unit.

Save To I/O Unit Image File. Select this option and enter the name of a file that will store the flash
memory image. You can also click the Browse button at the end of the filename field and specify the name
and location of the image file using the standard File Save dialog box.

Create New I/O Unit. Select this option to create a new I/O unit in PAC Manager using the selected flash
memory image source. Since the source image does not contain an I/O unit name, you will be prompted to
enter one. For more information, see “Creating a New I/O Unit from an Existing One” on page 29.

Send/Save/Create. After selecting an Image Destination option, click this button to copy the image source
to an I/O unit, save the image source to a file, or create a new I/O unit in PAC Manager. Note that the dialog
box does not close when you click this button, so you can repeat the Read-Send/Save/Create cycle as needed.

I/O UNIT MAINTENANCE

To use the I/O Unit Maintenance dialog box, see one of the following topics:
“Changing IP Addresses” on page 199
“Installing New Firmware” on page 201
“Maintaining Files” on page 215
For other maintenance tasks, such as resetting the device to factory defaults or handling a device whose IP
address you don’t know, see the controller or brain user’s guide.

MOVE POINT TO
Use this dialog to move an I/O point from one I/O unit to a location on another (or the same) I/O unit.
The I/O Units list displays all I/O units that are compatible with the point being moved. The current I/O unit is
highlighted. The Points list displays all I/O points on the highlighted I/O unit. Currently configured I/O points
are in gray text, and open channels are marked Unused.
1. Select an open channel on the current I/O unit or select another I/O unit (if available) from the I/O units
list and select one of its channels as the destination channel.
2. Click OK to move the I/O point to the specified channel.

SCALE ANALOG READINGS

This dialog box is used to specify a custom scale factor that will convert from the “real” units of a module to
some engineering units which describe the process parameter being measured.

Scaled Units. Type the name of the new engineering units (EU) for the module here. (Simply delete the
default scale and type a new scale—for example, PSI.) As soon as you press Tab or click outside this field, the

PAC Manager User’s Guide 259

SEND CONFIGURATION TO I/O UNIT

name of the new EU appears in the protected (grayed-out) Scaled columns in the Lower Value and Upper
Value areas of the dialog box.

Actual Lower Value. Provide the actual real-world lower value that you wish the scaled lower value to
correspond to. By default, the zero-scale value appears.
Note that inputs typically have under-range capability, which means you can specify a lower actual value less
than the zero-scale value. Outputs do not have under-range capability.

Actual Units. The actual units of the module appear here. They are displayed for reference only and cannot
be changed.

Scaled Lower Value. Type in the new scaled lower value here. This can be any floating point value.

Scaled Units. The name of the new units you typed in the Scaled Units field (above) appear here.

Actual Upper Value. Provide the actual real-world upper value that you wish the scaled upper value to
correspond to. By default, the full-scale value appears.
Note that inputs typically have over-range capability, which means you can specify an upper actual value
greater than the full-scale value. Outputs do not have over-range capability.

Actual Units. The actual units of the module appear here. They are displayed for reference only and cannot
be changed.

Scaled Upper Value. Type in the new scaled upper value here. This can be any floating point value, as long
as it is greater than the scaled lower value.

Scaled Units. The name of the new units you typed in the Scaled Units fields (above) appear here.

SEND CONFIGURATION TO I/O UNIT

Use this dialog box to send configuration information to one or more I/O Units.
I/O Units List. The list on the left shows all the I/O units in this configuration file. When you click a unit, the
Address List shows all the IP addresses associated with the highlighted unit. This is the address list you set up
in the Add/Edit I/O Unit.

Sending Configuration Information

1. Highlight the I/O unit configuration(s) you want to send.
2. Highlight the IP addresses to receive the I/O unit configuration. If you don’t highlight any addresses, the
configuration will be sent to the entire list. If you highlight more than one I/O unit configuration, each
unit configuration will automatically be sent to all the IP addresses associated with it.
3. If necessary, change the Timeout field. The timeout field shows how long, in milliseconds, PAC Manager
will try to communicate with the I/O unit before returning a timeout error.
4. To save the configuration file to flash memory as well as to RAM, check Save to Flash. To also restart the
unit, check Restart Device.
IMPORTANT: For the following configurations, you must save to flash and restart the I/O unit in order any
changes to the configuration to take effect:

– Changes in IP port for serial modules

– SNMP configuration
– Email configuration

260 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 APPENDIX B: DIALOG BOXES

– PPP configuration
– Data logging interval

Clearing Flash. To erase the flash memory of all highlighted I/O units in the list, click Clear Flash. Click
Details to show or hide the Status Area, which displays the results of the last Send or Clear Flash operation.

PAC Manager User’s Guide 261

SEND CONFIGURATION TO I/O UNIT

262 PAC Manager User’s Guide

Index

A B
accessing data log, 89 bootloader mode, for loading firmware, 212
address, assigning IP address, 8
to multiple devices, 15
alarm C
clearing configuration, 194 CA root certificate, 214
configuring, 138, 188 calibrating analog point, 45, 72, 174
description, 137 CAN modules
trigger, 137 configuring, 56
types, 137 cascading events and reactions, 128
algorithms for PIDs, 64 changing
analog bank I/O points automatically, 107
data format, 197 IP address, 199
reading, 178 clamping analog output point, 72, 75
analog module data format, 198 clearing
analog point configuration, 194
average filter weight, 72, 75 configuration data from flash memory, 70
bipolar, 74 data log, 90
calibrating, 45, 174 file from I/O unit, 220
clamping, 72, 75 files from flash memory, 220
configuring, 41, 157 resetting to defaults, 191
features, 74 communicating with I/O unit
gain, 72 assigning IP address, 8
maximum value, 72 monitoring communication, 74
minimum value, 72 communicating with processor
minimum/maximum value, 75 IP address, 8
offset, 72 communication
offset and gain, 45, 75, 174 dial-up, 123
reading, 173 modem, 123
scaling, 43, 72, 74 PPP, 123
unipolar, 74 serial, 118
viewing data, 157 wireless, 23
watchdog, 72, 74 community groups, 97
writing to, 173 configuration data on microSD card, 192
assigning IP address, 8, 15 configuration file, 27
average filter weight, 72, 75 adding analog point, 41
adding digital point, 36
adding I/O unit, 32

PAC Manager User’s Guide 263

 copying, 63 D
creating, 28
data
creating from a PAC Control strategy, 31
copying from memory map, 109
custom scaling, 43
formatting and interpreting, 195
loading to brain, 69
IEEE float format, 197
moving I/O point, 62
streaming, 92, 104
configuration, clearing, 194
data format
configuring
2-channel analog modules, 198
alarm events and reactions, 137
digital bank counters, 196
alarms, 138
digital channel, 196
CAN modules, 56
IEEE float, 197
communications port, 118
mask, 195
copying I/O configuration, 29
data logging
data logging, 87
accessing data, 89
data streaming, 104
clearing data log, 90
date and time, 116
configuring, 87, 186
delayed reactions to events, 133
values from memory map addresses, 87
digital event/reactions, 131
date and time
email, 100
configuring, 116
event messages, 92
reading, 184
event/reactions, 130
deadband, 139
I/O, 27, 157
deleting
I/O unit, 32
configuration data from flash memory, 70
mistic I/O units, 7, 8
file from I/O unit, 220
PID loops, 64, 168
deviation alarm, 137
PPP, 123
diagnostic messages, 225
Profibus modules, 54
dial-up networking, 123
RS-232 and RS-485/422 serial modules, 47
digital bank
Scratch Pad, 102
counter data format, 196
serial event/reactions, 140
reading, 178
serial modules, 167
digital channel
serial ports on brain or controller, 118
data format, 196
serial synchronous interface (SSI) modules, 55
digital event/reactions
SNMP, 96
clearing, 194
Wiegand event/reactions, 140
configuring, 131, 188
Wiegand modules, 52
description, 131
wired network security, 78
examples, 133
wireless LAN, 23
trigger, 133
control engine port, changing, 81, 84
digital point
controller
configuring, 36, 157
assigning IP address, 8
counter, 71, 73
changing IP address, 199
features, 71
control engine port, 81
latching, 71, 73
restarting, 191
on high-density module, 181
converting IEEE float, 197
quadrature counter, 71, 73
copying
reading, 171
I/O configuration, 29
state, 71, 73
memory map data, 109
viewing data, 157
counter
watchdog, 72, 74
description, 71, 73
writing to, 171
quadrature, 73
disable host communication, 81
DNS Resolver, 99

264 PAC Manager User’s Guide

downloading for serial module, 208
see loading or installing getting data about, 224, 226
loading to controller, 201
loading to I/O unit, 201
E replacing damaged, 212
edge trigger, 137 flash memory, 70
email clearing files, 220
clearing configuration, 194 loading files from, 220
configure DNS server, 99 saving configuration data to, 69, 190
configuring, 100, 189 saving file system files, 220
message, 92 float
erase format, 197
configuration from microSD, 194 IEEE, 197
firmware from microSD, 194 Modbus, 112
strategy from microSD, 194 flow control, 49
error messages, 223 format
Ethernet 2 IP address, assigning, 19 IEEE float, 197
Ethernet errors, 229 Modbus float, 112
EtherNet/IP of counter data, 196
turning off protocol, 81 of data, 195
event message of data for 2-channel analog modules, 198
configuring, 92, 188 of digital channel data, 196
plugins, 95 FTP
event/reaction, 131, 133, 188 client software comparison, 215
cascading, 128 default port, 78
configuration steps (table), 130 limiting access to, 78
configuring digital, 131 login, 80
delayed, 133 password, 80
Scratch Pad, 127 reading filenames, 219
serial, 140 sending files to and from I/O unit or controller,
types, 129 215
Wiegand, 140
exclamation mark button, 225
G
G4EB2
F configuring points, 39
failsafe bootloader mode, 212 gain, 45, 75, 173, 174
file definition, 72
clearing from flash memory, 220 gateway address, 13
deleting from file system, 220
loading from flash memory to file system, 220
reading filenames, 219 H
sending from I/O unit, 218 hardware, getting data about, 224, 226
sending to I/O unit, 216 help
file storage, removable, 215 troubleshooting, 223
file system on brain or controller, 215 high limit alarm, 137
filter address, 84, 87 high-density digital modules
filter mask, 84, 87 reading or writing to points, 181
filter weight, 75 host communication, disabling, 81
find Opto 22 MMP devices, 226 host name
firmware configure DNS server, 99
effect on device data, 201
failsafe bootloader, 212

PAC Manager User’s Guide 265

 I loading
configuration file, 69
I/O modules
files from flash memory, 220
configuring analog and digital, 27
firmware
configuring RS-232 and RS-485/422 serial mod-
effect on device data, 201
ules, 47
new firmware to I/O unit or controller, 201
viewing, 157
new firmware to serial module, 208
I/O point
logging
clearing configuration, 194
data, 87
configuring, 36, 157
serial port data, 229
features, 71
wireless data, 231
logging data, 87
login for FTP, 80
mirroring, 107
low limit alarm, 137
reading, 170
reset points to defaults, 191
writing to, 170 M
I/O unit
MAC address, 9
adding, 32
management hosts, 97
changing IP address, 199
map file, 15
clearing files from flash memory, 220
mapping IP addresses, 15
copying between configuration files, 63
mask
deleting file, 220
data format, 195
file system, 215
digital point, 132
getting files via FTP, 218
Scratch Pad, 132
hardware commands, 190
maximum value, 72, 75
loading files from flash memory, 220
memory
reading basic information, 147
saving configuration to, 190
restarting, 191
saving files, 220
saving files to flash memory, 220
memory map
sending files via FTP, 216
copying data, 109
IEEE float, 197
logging data from, 87
initializing Scratch Pad values, 102
message, 92
installing
plugins, 95
new firmware to I/O unit or controller, 201
microSD card, 215
interacting algorithm for PID, 64
microSD commands, 192, 194
IP address
minimum value, 72, 75
assigning, 8
mirroring I/O point data, 107
assigning IP address to Ethernet 2, 19
mistic I/O units, 7, 8
assigning to multiple devices, 15
MMP devices, finding, 226
assigning wireless, 23
Modbus/TCP
changing, 199
changing float format, 112
mapping, 15
configuring, 189
ISA algorithm for PID, 64
default port, 78
limiting access to, 78
K memory map address conversion, 114
modem, 123
kernel, see firmware
module types, 160
MOMO, 131
L mounting rack
M-series, 155
latch, 73
SNAP PAC, 155
definition, 71
moving
level trigger, 133
files from I/O unit, 218

266 PAC Manager User’s Guide

 files to I/O unit, 216 clearing configuration, 194
I/O point in configuration file, 62 configuring, 123, 189
must-on, must-off, 131 troubleshooting serial communication, 229
primary IP address, assigning, 10
problems, troubleshooting, 223
N processor
network assigning IP address, 8
find OptoMMP devices, 226 Product Support
security on wired network, 78 getting device and firmware data, 224, 226
security on wireless LAN, 23 Profibus
configuring modules, 54
protecting PAC Control strategy, 81
O protocol
off, 73 default ports, 78
off-latch, 71, 73 limiting access to, 78
offset, 45, 75, 173, 174 turning off EtherNet/IP, 81
definition, 72
on, 73
on-latch, 71, 73 Q
operation commands, 190 quadrature counter, 71, 73
OptoMMP
default port, 78
find devices, 226 R
limiting access to, 78 reaction
OptoMMP device commands, 190 delayed, 133
digital, 131
example, 133
P Scratch Pad, 127
PAC Control, 127, 147 trigger
and direct reads and writes, 147 analog, 137
and event/reactions, 127 digital, 133
copying configuration files from, 31 reading
managing files on I/O unit or controller, 215 analog bank, 178
protecting strategy, 81 analog point, 173
parallel algorithm for PID, 64 data log, 89
password digital bank, 178
for FTP, 80 digital point, 171
peak, 72 digital points on high-density modules, 181
PID loops filenames on file system, 219
algorithms, 64 I/O points, 170
configuring, 64, 168 I/O unit information, 147
plugins, 95 Scratch Pad, 184
point types, 160 system date and time, 184
port registered management hosts, 97
changing, for security, 78 removable storage, 215
serial, on brain or controller, 118 reset points to defaults, 191
ports for serial modules, 156 reset to defaults and restart device, 191
power Restart device from powerup, 191
powerup clear, 192 retransmit timeout (RTO), 227
restarting controller, 191 root certificate, 214
restarting I/O unit, 191
powerup clear, 192
PPP

PAC Manager User’s Guide 267

 S message, 92
trap types, 97
saving
SSI modules
configuration to flash memory, 69, 190
configuring, 55
file system files to flash memory, 220
state of digital point, 71, 73
scaling
Status Read information, 149
analog point, 43
store configuration and IP settings to microSD, 193
description, 72, 74
store configuration to flash, 190
scanner flags, 154
strategy
Scratch Pad, 127
effect of firmware download, 201
masks, 132
protecting, 81
reading, 184
streaming data, 92, 104, 189
setting initial values, 102
subnet mask, 9
writing to, 184
secondary IP address, assigning, 19
security, 23, 78, 189 T
FTP login, 80
TCP/IP
send powerup clear, 192
settings, 227
serial
stack, 227
communication, troubleshooting, 229
time, system, 116, 184
event/reactions, 140, 188
timed events, 135
message, 92
timeout, 227
ports on brain or controller, configuring, 118
timer, configuring, 194
serial modules
traps, 97
2-wire or 4-wire mode, 49
troubleshooting, 223
CAN, 56
diagnostic messages, 225
flow control, 49
Ethernet errors, 229
loading firmware, 208
getting device and firmware data, 224, 226
port numbers, 156
serial communication, 229
Profibus, 54
Status Read data, 149
serial synchronous interface, 55
TCP settings, 227
Wiegand, 52
wireless communication, 231
serial modules (RS-232, RS-485/422)
configuring, 47
serial synchronous interface U
configuring modules, 55
UDP and streaming data, 104
setting offset and gain, 45, 174
SMTP
Configure DNS server, 99 V
SNAP PAC controller
valley, 72
assigning IP address
velocity algorithm for PID, 64
Ethernet 2, 19
viewing module and point data, 157
primary, 10
file system, 215
SNAP PAC REST API, 2, 79 W
SNMP
watchdog, 74
access privileges, 97
definition, 72
agent, 97
Wiegand
community groups, 97
configuring modules, 52
configuring, 96, 189
event/reactions, 140, 188
default port, 78
wireless LAN
limiting access to, 78
configuring, 23
management hosts, 97
troubleshooting, 231

268 PAC Manager User’s Guide

writing
to analog point, 173
to digital point, 171
to digital points on high-density modules, 181
to I/O points, 170
to Scratch Pad, 184

PAC Manager User’s Guide 269

270 PAC Manager User’s Guide